6.3.2 Radio resource control information elements

38.3313GPPNRProtocol specificationRadio Resource Control (RRC)Release 15TS

AdditionalSpectrumEmission

The IE AdditionalSpectrumEmission is used to indicate emission requirements to be fulfilled by the UE (see TS 38.101-1 [15], clause 6.2.3, and TS 38.101-2 [39], clause 6.2.3).

AdditionalSpectrumEmission information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-ADDITIONALSPECTRUMEMISSION-START

AdditionalSpectrumEmission ::= INTEGER (0..7)

— TAG-ADDITIONALSPECTRUMEMISSION-STOP

— ASN1STOP

Alpha

The IE Alpha defines possible values of a the pathloss compensation coefficient for uplink power control. Value alpha0 corresponds to the value 0, Value alpha04 corresponds to the value 0.4, Value alpha05 corresponds to the value 0.5 and so on. Value alpha1 corresponds to value 1. See also clause 7.1 of TS 38.213 [13].

— ASN1START

— TAG-ALPHA-START

Alpha ::= ENUMERATED {alpha0, alpha04, alpha05, alpha06, alpha07, alpha08, alpha09, alpha1}

— TAG-ALPHA-STOP

— ASN1STOP

AMF-Identifier

The IE AMF-Identifier (AMFI) comprises of an AMF Region ID, an AMF Set ID and an AMF Pointer as specified in TS 23.003 [21], clause 2.10.1.

AMF-Identifier information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-AMF-IDENTIFIER-START

AMF-Identifier ::= BIT STRING (SIZE (24))

— TAG-AMF-IDENTIFIER-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ARFCN-ValueEUTRA

The IE ARFCN-ValueEUTRA is used to indicate the ARFCN applicable for a downlink, uplink or bi-directional (TDD) E-UTRA carrier frequency, as defined in TS 36.101 [22].

ARFCN-ValueEUTRA information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-ARFCN-VALUEEUTRA-START

ARFCN-ValueEUTRA ::= INTEGER (0..maxEARFCN)

— TAG-ARFCN-VALUEEUTRA-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ARFCN-ValueNR

The IE ARFCN-ValueNR is used to indicate the ARFCN applicable for a downlink, uplink or bi-directional (TDD) NR global frequency raster, as defined in TS 38.101-1 [15] and TS 38.101-2 [39], clause 5.4.2.

— ASN1START

— TAG-ARFCN-VALUENR-START

ARFCN-ValueNR ::= INTEGER (0..maxNARFCN)

— TAG-ARFCN-VALUENR-STOP

— ASN1STOP

– BeamFailureRecoveryConfig

The IE BeamFailureRecoveryConfig is used to configure the UE with RACH resources and candidate beams for beam failure recovery in case of beam failure detection. See also TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.1.1.

BeamFailureRecoveryConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-BEAMFAILURERECOVERYCONFIG-START

BeamFailureRecoveryConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rootSequenceIndex-BFR INTEGER (0..137) OPTIONAL, — Need M

rach-ConfigBFR RACH-ConfigGeneric OPTIONAL, — Need M

rsrp-ThresholdSSB RSRP-Range OPTIONAL, — Need M

candidateBeamRSList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofCandidateBeams)) OF PRACH-ResourceDedicatedBFR OPTIONAL, — Need M

ssb-perRACH-Occasion ENUMERATED {oneEighth, oneFourth, oneHalf, one, two,

four, eight, sixteen} OPTIONAL, — Need M

ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex INTEGER (0..15) OPTIONAL, — Need M

recoverySearchSpaceId SearchSpaceId OPTIONAL, — Need R

ra-Prioritization RA-Prioritization OPTIONAL, — Need R

beamFailureRecoveryTimer ENUMERATED {ms10, ms20, ms40, ms60, ms80, ms100, ms150, ms200} OPTIONAL, — Need M

…,

[[

msg1-SubcarrierSpacing SubcarrierSpacing OPTIONAL — Need M

]]

}

PRACH-ResourceDedicatedBFR ::= CHOICE {

ssb BFR-SSB-Resource,

csi-RS BFR-CSIRS-Resource

}

BFR-SSB-Resource ::= SEQUENCE {

ssb SSB-Index,

ra-PreambleIndex INTEGER (0..63),

}

BFR-CSIRS-Resource ::= SEQUENCE {

csi-RS NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId,

ra-OccasionList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxRA-OccasionsPerCSIRS)) OF INTEGER (0..maxRA-Occasions-1) OPTIONAL, — Need R

ra-PreambleIndex INTEGER (0..63) OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

— TAG-BEAMFAILURERECOVERYCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

BeamFailureRecoveryConfig field descriptions

beamFailureRecoveryTimer

Timer for beam failure recovery timer. Upon expiration of the timer the UE does not use CFRA for BFR. Value in ms. Value ms10 corresponds to 10 ms, value ms20 corresponds to 20 ms, and so on.

candidateBeamRSList

A list of reference signals (CSI-RS and/or SSB) identifying the candidate beams for recovery and the associated RA parameters. The network configures these reference signals to be within the linked DL BWP (i.e., within the DL BWP with the same bwp-Id) of the UL BWP in which the BeamFailureRecoveryConfig is provided.

msg1-SubcarrierSpacing

Subcarrier spacing for contention free beam failure recovery. Only the values 15 kHz or 30 kHz (FR1), and 60 kHz or 120 kHz (FR2) are applicable. See TS 38.211 [16], clause 5.3.2.

rsrp-ThresholdSSB

L1-RSRP threshold used for determining whether a candidate beam may be used by the UE to attempt contention free random access to recover from beam failure (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 6).

ra-prioritization

Parameters which apply for prioritized random access procedure for BFR (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.1.1).

ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex

Explicitly signalled PRACH Mask Index for RA Resource selection in TS 38.321 [3]. The mask is valid for all SSB resources.

rach-ConfigBFR

Configuration of random access parameters for BFR.

recoverySearchSpaceId

Search space to use for BFR RAR. The network configures this search space to be within the linked DL BWP (i.e., within the DL BWP with the same bwp-Id) of the UL BWP in which the BeamFailureRecoveryConfig is provided. The CORESET associated with the recovery search space cannot be associated with another search space. Network always configures the UE with a value for this field when contention free random access resources for BFR are configured.

rootSequenceIndex-BFR

PRACH root sequence index (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.3.3.1) for beam failure recovery.

ssb-perRACH-Occasion

Number of SSBs per RACH occasion for CF-BFR, see TS 38.213 [13], clause 8.1.

BFR-CSIRS-Resource field descriptions

csi-RS

The ID of a NZP-CSI-RS-Resource configured in the CSI-MeasConfig of this serving cell. This reference signal determines a candidate beam for beam failure recovery (BFR).

ra-OccasionList

RA occasions that the UE shall use when performing BFR upon selecting the candidate beam identified by this CSI-RS. The network ensures that the RA occasion indexes provided herein are also configured by prach-ConfigurationIndex and msg1-FDM. Each RACH occasion is sequentially numbered, first, in increasing order of frequency resource indexes for frequency multiplexed PRACH occasions; second, in increasing order of time resource indexes for time multiplexed PRACH occasions within a PRACH slot and Third, in increasing order of indexes for PRACH slots.

If the field is absent the UE uses the RA occasion associated with the SSB that is QCLed with this CSI-RS.

ra-PreambleIndex

The RA preamble index to use in the RA occasions associated with this CSI-RS. If the field is absent, the UE uses the preamble index associated with the SSB that is QCLed with this CSI-RS.

BFR-SSB-Resource field descriptions

ra-PreambleIndex

The preamble index that the UE shall use when performing BFR upon selecting the candidate beams identified by this SSB.

ssb

The ID of an SSB transmitted by this serving cell. It determines a candidate beam for beam failure recovery (BFR).

BetaOffsets

The IE BetaOffsets is used to configure beta-offset values, see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.3.

BetaOffsets information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-BETAOFFSETS-START

BetaOffsets ::= SEQUENCE {

betaOffsetACK-Index1 INTEGER(0..31) OPTIONAL, — Need S

betaOffsetACK-Index2 INTEGER(0..31) OPTIONAL, — Need S

betaOffsetACK-Index3 INTEGER(0..31) OPTIONAL, — Need S

betaOffsetCSI-Part1-Index1 INTEGER(0..31) OPTIONAL, — Need S

betaOffsetCSI-Part1-Index2 INTEGER(0..31) OPTIONAL, — Need S

betaOffsetCSI-Part2-Index1 INTEGER(0..31) OPTIONAL, — Need S

betaOffsetCSI-Part2-Index2 INTEGER(0..31) OPTIONAL — Need S

}

— TAG-BETAOFFSETS-STOP

— ASN1STOP

BetaOffsets field descriptions

betaOffsetACK-Index1

Up to 2 bits HARQ-ACK (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.3). When the field is absent the UE applies the value 11.

betaOffsetACK-Index2

Up to 11 bits HARQ-ACK (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.3). When the field is absent the UE applies the value 11.

betaOffsetACK-Index3

Above 11 bits HARQ-ACK (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.3). When the field is absent the UE applies the value 11.

betaOffsetCSI-Part1-Index1

Up to 11 bits of CSI part 1 bits (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.3). When the field is absent the UE applies the value 13.

betaOffsetCSI-Part1-Index2

Above 11 bits of CSI part 1 bits (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.3). When the field is absent the UE applies the value 13.

betaOffsetCSI-Part2-Index1

Up to 11 bits of CSI part 2 bits (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.3). When the field is absent the UE applies the value 13.

betaOffsetCSI-Part2-Index2

Above 11 bits of CSI part 2 bits (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.3). When the field is absent the UE applies the value 13.

BSR-Config

The IE BSR-Config is used to configure buffer status reporting.

BSR-Config information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-BSR-CONFIG-START

BSR-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

periodicBSR-Timer ENUMERATED { sf1, sf5, sf10, sf16, sf20, sf32, sf40, sf64,

sf80, sf128, sf160, sf320, sf640, sf1280, sf2560, infinity },

retxBSR-Timer ENUMERATED { sf10, sf20, sf40, sf80, sf160, sf320, sf640, sf1280, sf2560,

sf5120, sf10240, spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1},

logicalChannelSR-DelayTimer ENUMERATED { sf20, sf40, sf64, sf128, sf512, sf1024, sf2560, spare1} OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

— TAG-BSR-CONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

BSR-Config field descriptions

logicalChannelSR-DelayTimer

Value in number of subframes. Value sf20 corresponds to 20 subframes, sf40 corresponds to 40 subframes, and so on.

periodicBSR-Timer

Value in number of subframes. Value sf1 corresponds to 1 subframe, value sf5 corresponds to 5 subframes and so on.

retxBSR-Timer

Value in number of subframes. Value sf10 corresponds to 10 subframes, value sf20 corresponds to 20 subframes and so on.

BWP

The IE BWP is used to configure generic parameters of a bandwidth part as defined in TS 38.211 [16], clause 4.5, and TS 38.213 [13], clause 12.

For each serving cell the network configures at least an initial downlink bandwidth part and one (if the serving cell is configured with an uplink) or two (if using supplementary uplink (SUL)) initial uplink bandwidth parts. Furthermore, the network may configure additional uplink and downlink bandwidth parts for a serving cell.

The uplink and downlink bandwidth part configurations are divided into common and dedicated parameters.

BWP information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-BWP-START

BWP ::= SEQUENCE {

locationAndBandwidth INTEGER (0..37949),

subcarrierSpacing SubcarrierSpacing,

cyclicPrefix ENUMERATED { extended } OPTIONAL — Need R

}

— TAG-BWP-STOP

— ASN1STOP

BWP field descriptions

cyclicPrefix

Indicates whether to use the extended cyclic prefix for this bandwidth part. If not set, the UE uses the normal cyclic prefix. Normal CP is supported for all subcarrier spacings and slot formats. Extended CP is supported only for 60 kHz subcarrier spacing. (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 4.2). Except for SUL, the network ensures the same cyclic prefix length is used in active DL BWP and active UL BWP within a serving cell.

locationAndBandwidth

Frequency domain location and bandwidth of this bandwidth part. The value of the field shall be interpreted as resource indicator value (RIV) as defined TS 38.214 [19] with assumptions as described in TS 38.213 [13], clause 12, i.e. setting =275. The first PRB is a PRB determined by subcarrierSpacing of this BWP and offsetToCarrier (configured in SCS-SpecificCarrier contained within FrequencyInfoDL / FrequencyInfoUL / FrequencyInfoUL-SIB / FrequencyInfoDL-SIB within ServingCellConfigCommon / ServingCellConfigCommonSIB) corresponding to this subcarrier spacing. In case of TDD, a BWP-pair (UL BWP and DL BWP with the same bwp-Id) must have the same center frequency (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 12)

subcarrierSpacing

Subcarrier spacing to be used in this BWP for all channels and reference signals unless explicitly configured elsewhere. Corresponds to subcarrier spacing according to TS 38.211 [16], table 4.2-1. The value kHz15 corresponds to µ=0, value kHz30 corresponds to µ=1, and so on. Only the values 15 kHz, 30 kHz, or 60 kHz (FR1), and 60 kHz or 120 kHz (FR2) are applicable. For the initial DL BWP this field has the same value as the field subCarrierSpacingCommon in MIB of the same serving cell. Except for SUL, the network ensures the same subcarrier spacing is used in active DL BWP and active UL BWP within a serving cell.

BWP-Downlink

The IE BWP-Downlink is used to configure an additional downlink bandwidth part (not for the initial BWP).

BWP-Downlink information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-BWP-DOWNLINK-START

BWP-Downlink ::= SEQUENCE {

bwp-Id BWP-Id,

bwp-Common BWP-DownlinkCommon OPTIONAL, — Cond SetupOtherBWP

bwp-Dedicated BWP-DownlinkDedicated OPTIONAL, — Cond SetupOtherBWP

}

— TAG-BWP-DOWNLINK-STOP

— ASN1STOP

BWP-Downlink field descriptions

bwp-Id

An identifier for this bandwidth part. Other parts of the RRC configuration use the BWP-Id to associate themselves with a particular bandwidth part.

The network configures the BWPs with consecutive IDs from 1. The Network does not include the value 0, since value 0 is reserved for the initial BWP.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

SetupOtherBWP

The field is mandatory present upon configuration of a new DL BWP. The field is optionally present, Need M, otherwise.

BWP-DownlinkCommon

The IE BWP-DownlinkCommon is used to configure the common parameters of a downlink BWP. They are "cell specific" and the network ensures the necessary alignment with corresponding parameters of other UEs. The common parameters of the initial bandwidth part of the PCell are also provided via system information. For all other serving cells, the network provides the common parameters via dedicated signalling.

BWP-DownlinkCommon information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-BWP-DOWNLINKCOMMON-START

BWP-DownlinkCommon ::= SEQUENCE {

genericParameters BWP,

pdcch-ConfigCommon SetupRelease { PDCCH-ConfigCommon } OPTIONAL, — Need M

pdsch-ConfigCommon SetupRelease { PDSCH-ConfigCommon } OPTIONAL, — Need M

}

— TAG-BWP-DOWNLINKCOMMON-STOP

— ASN1STOP

BWP-DownlinkCommon field descriptions

pdcch-ConfigCommon

Cell specific parameters for the PDCCH of this BWP.

pdsch-ConfigCommon

Cell specific parameters for the PDSCH of this BWP.

BWP-DownlinkDedicated

The IE BWP-DownlinkDedicated is used to configure the dedicated (UE specific) parameters of a downlink BWP.

BWP-DownlinkDedicated information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-BWP-DOWNLINKDEDICATED-START

BWP-DownlinkDedicated ::= SEQUENCE {

pdcch-Config SetupRelease { PDCCH-Config } OPTIONAL, — Need M

pdsch-Config SetupRelease { PDSCH-Config } OPTIONAL, — Need M

sps-Config SetupRelease { SPS-Config } OPTIONAL, — Need M

radioLinkMonitoringConfig SetupRelease { RadioLinkMonitoringConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

}

— TAG-BWP-DOWNLINKDEDICATED-STOP

— ASN1STOP

BWP-DownlinkDedicated field descriptions

pdcch-Config

UE specific PDCCH configuration for one BWP.

pdsch-Config

UE specific PDSCH configuration for one BWP.

sps-Config

UE specific SPS (Semi-Persistent Scheduling) configuration for one BWP. Except for reconfiguration with sync, the NW does not reconfigure sps-Config when there is an active configured downlink assignment (see TS 38.321 [3]). However, the NW may release the sps-Config at any time.

radioLinkMonitoringConfig

UE specific configuration of radio link monitoring for detecting cell- and beam radio link failure occasions. The maximum number of failure detection resources should be limited up to 8 for both cell and beam radio link failure detection in Rel-15.

BWP-Id

The IE BWP-Id is used to refer to Bandwidth Parts (BWP). The initial BWP is referred to by BWP-Id 0. The other BWPs are referred to by BWP-Id 1 to maxNrofBWPs.

BWP-Id information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-BWP-ID-START

BWP-Id ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofBWPs)

— TAG-BWP-ID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

BWP-Uplink

The IE BWP-Uplink is used to configure an additional uplink bandwidth part (not for the initial BWP).

BWP-Uplink information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-BWP-UPLINK-START

BWP-Uplink ::= SEQUENCE {

bwp-Id BWP-Id,

bwp-Common BWP-UplinkCommon OPTIONAL, — Cond SetupOtherBWP

bwp-Dedicated BWP-UplinkDedicated OPTIONAL, — Cond SetupOtherBWP

}

— TAG-BWP-UPLINK-STOP

— ASN1STOP

BWP-Uplink field descriptions

bwp-Id

An identifier for this bandwidth part. Other parts of the RRC configuration use the BWP-Id to associate themselves with a particular bandwidth part.

The network configures the BWPs with consecutive IDs from 1. The Network does not include the value 0, since value 0 is reserved for the initial BWP.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

SetupOtherBWP

The field is mandatory present upon configuration of a new UL BWP. The field is optionally present, Need M, otherwise.

BWP-UplinkCommon

The IE BWP-UplinkCommon is used to configure the common parameters of an uplink BWP. They are "cell specific" and the network ensures the necessary alignment with corresponding parameters of other UEs. The common parameters of the initial bandwidth part of the PCell are also provided via system information. For all other serving cells, the network provides the common parameters via dedicated signalling.

BWP-UplinkCommon information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-BWP-UPLINKCOMMON-START

BWP-UplinkCommon ::= SEQUENCE {

genericParameters BWP,

rach-ConfigCommon SetupRelease { RACH-ConfigCommon } OPTIONAL, — Need M

pusch-ConfigCommon SetupRelease { PUSCH-ConfigCommon } OPTIONAL, — Need M

pucch-ConfigCommon SetupRelease { PUCCH-ConfigCommon } OPTIONAL, — Need M

}

— TAG-BWP-UPLINKCOMMON-STOP

— ASN1STOP

BWP-UplinkCommon field descriptions

pucch-ConfigCommon

Cell specific parameters for the PUCCH of this BWP.

pusch-ConfigCommon

Cell specific parameters for the PUSCH of this BWP.

rach-ConfigCommon

Configuration of cell specific random access parameters which the UE uses for contention based and contention free random access as well as for contention based beam failure recovery in this BWP. The NW configures SSB-based RA (and hence RACH-ConfigCommon) only for UL BWPs if the linked DL BWPs (same bwp-Id as UL-BWP) are the initial DL BWPs or DL BWPs containing the SSB associated to the initial DL BWP. The network configures rach-ConfigCommon, whenever it configures contention free random access (for reconfiguration with sync or for beam failure recovery).

BWP-UplinkDedicated

The IE BWP-UplinkDedicated is used to configure the dedicated (UE specific) parameters of an uplink BWP.

BWP-UplinkDedicated information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-BWP-UPLINKDEDICATED-START

BWP-UplinkDedicated ::= SEQUENCE {

pucch-Config SetupRelease { PUCCH-Config } OPTIONAL, — Need M

pusch-Config SetupRelease { PUSCH-Config } OPTIONAL, — Need M

configuredGrantConfig SetupRelease { ConfiguredGrantConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

srs-Config SetupRelease { SRS-Config } OPTIONAL, — Need M

beamFailureRecoveryConfig SetupRelease { BeamFailureRecoveryConfig } OPTIONAL, — Cond SpCellOnly

}

— TAG-BWP-UPLINKDEDICATED-STOP

— ASN1STOP

BWP-UplinkDedicated field descriptions

beamFailureRecoveryConfig

Configuration of beam failure recovery. If supplementaryUplink is present, the field is present only in one of the uplink carriers, either UL or SUL.

configuredGrantConfig

A Configured-Grant of type1 or type2. It may be configured for UL or SUL but in case of type1 not for both at a time. Except for reconfiguration with sync, the NW does not reconfigure configuredGrantConfig when there is an active configured uplink grant Type 2 (see TS 38.321 [3]). However, the NW may release the configuredGrantConfig at any time.

pucch-Config

PUCCH configuration for one BWP of the normal UL or SUL of a serving cell. If the UE is configured with SUL, the network configures PUCCH only on the BWPs of one of the uplinks (normal UL or SUL). The network configures PUCCH-Config at least on non-initial BWP(s) for SpCell and PUCCH SCell. If supported by the UE, the network may configure at most one additional SCell of a cell group with PUCCH-Config (i.e. PUCCH SCell).

In (NG)EN-DC and NE-DC, the NW configures at most one serving cell per frequency range with PUCCH. In (NG)EN-DC and NE-DC, if two PUCCH groups are configured, the serving cells of the NR PUCCH group in FR2 use the same numerology. For NR-DC, the maximum number of PUCCH groups in each cell group is one, and only the same numerology is supported for the cell group with carriers only in FR2.

The NW may configure PUCCH for a BWP when setting up the BWP. The network may also add/remove the pucch-Config in an RRCReconfiguration with reconfigurationWithSync (for SpCell or PUCCH SCell) or with SCell release and add (for PUCCH SCell) to move the PUCCH between the UL and SUL carrier of one serving cell. In other cases, only modifications of a previously configured pucch-Config are allowed.

If one (S)UL BWP of a serving cell is configured with PUCCH, all other (S)UL BWPs must be configured with PUCCH, too.

pusch-Config

PUSCH configuration for one BWP of the normal UL or SUL of a serving cell. If the UE is configured with SUL and if it has a PUSCH-Config for both UL and SUL, an UL/SUL indicator field in DCI indicates which of the two to use. See TS 38.212 [17], clause 7.3.1.

srs-Config

Uplink sounding reference signal configuration.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

SpCellOnly

The field is optionally present, Need M, in the BWP-UplinkDedicated of an SpCell. It is absent otherwise.

NOTE 1: In case of RRCReconfiguration with reconfigurationWithSync, the UE performs a MAC reset, which involves releasing the PUCCH-CSI/SRS/SR configuration in accordance with clause 5.3.12 and TS 38.321 [6], clauses 5.12 and 5.2. Hence, for these parts of the dedicated radio resource configuration, delta signalling is not supported in the message when reconfigurationWithSync is included.

CellAccessRelatedInfo

The IE CellAccessRelatedInfo indicates cell access related information for this cell.

CellAccessRelatedInfo information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CELLACCESSRELATEDINFO-START

CellAccessRelatedInfo ::= SEQUENCE {

plmn-IdentityInfoList PLMN-IdentityInfoList,

cellReservedForOtherUse ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

— TAG-CELLACCESSRELATEDINFO-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CellAccessRelatedInfo field descriptions

cellReservedForOtherUse

Indicates whether the cell is reserved, as defined in 38.304 [20]. The field is applicable to all PLMNs.

plmn-IdentityInfoList

The plmn-IdentityInfoList is used to configure a set of PLMN-IdentityInfo elements. Each of those elements contains a list of one or more PLMN Identities and additional information associated with those PLMNs. The total number of PLMNs in the PLMN-IdentityInfoList does not exceed 12. A PLMN-identity can be included only once, and in only one entry of the PLMN-IdentityInfoList. The PLMN index is defined as b1+b2+…+b(n-1)+i for the PLMN included at the n-th entry of PLMN-IdentityInfoList and the i-th entry of its corresponding PLMN-IdentityInfo, where b(j) is the number of PLMN-Identity entries in each PLMN-IdentityInfo, respectively.

– CellAccessRelatedInfo-EUTRA-5GC

The IE CellAccessRelatedInfo-EUTRA-5GC indicates cell access related information for an LTE cell connected to 5GC.

CellAccessRelatedInfo-EUTRA-5GC information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CELLACCESSRELATEDINFOEUTRA-5GC-START

CellAccessRelatedInfo-EUTRA-5GC ::= SEQUENCE {

plmn-IdentityList-eutra-5gc PLMN-IdentityList-EUTRA-5GC,

trackingAreaCode-eutra-5gc TrackingAreaCode,

ranac-5gc RAN-AreaCode OPTIONAL,

cellIdentity-eutra-5gc CellIdentity-EUTRA-5GC

}

PLMN-IdentityList-EUTRA-5GC::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPLMN)) OF PLMN-Identity-EUTRA-5GC

PLMN-Identity-EUTRA-5GC ::= CHOICE {

plmn-Identity-EUTRA-5GC PLMN-Identity,

plmn-index INTEGER (1..maxPLMN)

}

CellIdentity-EUTRA-5GC ::= CHOICE {

cellIdentity-EUTRA BIT STRING (SIZE (28)),

cellId-index INTEGER (1..maxPLMN)

}

— TAG-CELLACCESSRELATEDINFOEUTRA-5GC-STOP

— ASN1STOP

– CellAccessRelatedInfo-EUTRA-EPC

The IE CellAccessRelatedInfo-EUTRA-EPC indicates cell access related information for an LTE cell connected to EPC.

CellAccessRelatedInfo-EUTRA-EPC information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CELLACCESSRELATEDINFOEUTRA-EPC-START

CellAccessRelatedInfo-EUTRA-EPC ::= SEQUENCE {

plmn-IdentityList-eutra-epc PLMN-IdentityList-EUTRA-EPC,

trackingAreaCode-eutra-epc BIT STRING (SIZE (16)),

cellIdentity-eutra-epc BIT STRING (SIZE (28))

}

PLMN-IdentityList-EUTRA-EPC::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPLMN)) OF PLMN-Identity

— TAG-CELLACCESSRELATEDINFOEUTRA-EPC-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CellGroupConfig

The CellGroupConfig IE is used to configure a master cell group (MCG) or secondary cell group (SCG). A cell group comprises of one MAC entity, a set of logical channels with associated RLC entities and of a primary cell (SpCell) and one or more secondary cells (SCells).

CellGroupConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CELLGROUPCONFIG-START

— Configuration of one Cell-Group:

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

cellGroupId CellGroupId,

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig OPTIONAL, — Need N

rlc-BearerToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF LogicalChannelIdentity OPTIONAL, — Need N

mac-CellGroupConfig MAC-CellGroupConfig OPTIONAL, — Need M

physicalCellGroupConfig PhysicalCellGroupConfig OPTIONAL, — Need M

spCellConfig SpCellConfig OPTIONAL, — Need M

sCellToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSCells)) OF SCellConfig OPTIONAL, — Need N

sCellToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSCells)) OF SCellIndex OPTIONAL, — Need N

…,

[[

reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL — Cond BWP-Reconfig

]]

}

— Serving cell specific MAC and PHY parameters for a SpCell:

SpCellConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

servCellIndex ServCellIndex OPTIONAL, — Cond SCG

reconfigurationWithSync ReconfigurationWithSync OPTIONAL, — Cond ReconfWithSync

rlf-TimersAndConstants SetupRelease { RLF-TimersAndConstants } OPTIONAL, — Need M

rlmInSyncOutOfSyncThreshold ENUMERATED {n1} OPTIONAL, — Need S

spCellConfigDedicated ServingCellConfig OPTIONAL, — Need M

}

ReconfigurationWithSync ::= SEQUENCE {

spCellConfigCommon ServingCellConfigCommon OPTIONAL, — Need M

newUE-Identity RNTI-Value,

t304 ENUMERATED {ms50, ms100, ms150, ms200, ms500, ms1000, ms2000, ms10000},

rach-ConfigDedicated CHOICE {

uplink RACH-ConfigDedicated,

supplementaryUplink RACH-ConfigDedicated

} OPTIONAL, — Need N

…,

[[

smtc SSB-MTC OPTIONAL — Need S

]]

}

SCellConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

sCellIndex SCellIndex,

sCellConfigCommon ServingCellConfigCommon OPTIONAL, — Cond SCellAdd

sCellConfigDedicated ServingCellConfig OPTIONAL, — Cond SCellAddMod

…,

[[

smtc SSB-MTC OPTIONAL — Need S

]]

}

— TAG-CELLGROUPCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CellGroupConfig field descriptions

mac-CellGroupConfig

MAC parameters applicable for the entire cell group.

rlc-BearerToAddModList

Configuration of the MAC Logical Channel, the corresponding RLC entities and association with radio bearers.

reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent

Enables reporting of uplink and supplementary uplink Direct Current location information upon BWP configuration and reconfiguration. This field is only present when the BWP configuration is modified or any serving cell is added or removed. This field is absent in the IE CellGroupConfig when provided as part of RRCSetup message. If UE is configured with SUL carrier, UE reports both UL and SUL Direct Current locations.

rlmInSyncOutOfSyncThreshold

BLER threshold pair index for IS/OOS indication generation, see TS 38.133 [14], table 8.1.1-1. n1 corresponds to the value 1. When the field is absent, the UE applies the value 0. Whenever this is reconfigured, UE resets N310 and N311, and stops T310, if running. Network does not include this field.

sCellToAddModList

List of seconary serving cells (SCells) to be added or modified.

sCellToReleaseList

List of secondary serving cells (SCells) to be released.

spCellConfig

Parameters for the SpCell of this cell group (PCell of MCG or PSCell of SCG).

ReconfigurationWithSync field descriptions

rach-ConfigDedicated

Random access configuration to be used for the reconfiguration with sync (e.g. handover). The UE performs the RA according to these parameters in the firstActiveUplinkBWP (see UplinkConfig).

smtc

The SSB periodicity/offset/duration configuration of target cell for NR PSCell change, NR PCell change and (for NR-DC) NR PSCell addition. The network sets the periodicityAndOffset to indicate the same periodicity as ssb-periodicityServingCell in spCellConfigCommon. For case of NR PCell change and NR PSCell addition, the smtc is based on the timing reference of (source) PCell. For case of NR PSCell change, it is based on the timing reference of source PSCell. If the field is absent, the UE uses the SMTC in the measObjectNR having the same SSB frequency and subcarrier spacing, as configured before the reception of the RRC message.

SCellConfig field descriptions

smtc

The SSB periodicity/offset/duration configuration of target cell for NR SCell addition. The network sets the periodicityAndOffset to indicate the same periodicity as ssb-periodicityServingCell in sCellConfigCommon. The smtc is based on the timing of the SpCell of associated cell group. In case of inter-RAT handover to NR, the timing reference is the NR PCell. In case of intra-NR PCell change (standalone NR) or NR PSCell change (EN-DC), the timing reference is the target SpCell. If the field is absent, the UE uses the SMTC in the measObjectNR having the same SSB frequency and subcarrier spacing, as configured before the reception of the RRC message.

SpCellConfig field descriptions

reconfigurationWithSync

Parameters for the synchronous reconfiguration to the target SpCell.

rlf-TimersAndConstants

Timers and constants for detecting and triggering cell-level radio link failure. For the SCG, rlf-TimersAndConstants can only be set to setup and is always included at SCG addition.

servCellIndex

Serving cell ID of a PSCell. The PCell of the Master Cell Group uses ID = 0.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

BWP-Reconfig

The field is optionally present, Need N, if the BWPs are reconfigured or if serving cells are added or removed. Otherwise it is absent.

ReconfWithSync

The field is mandatory present in the RRCReconfiguration message:

– in each configured CellGroupConfig for which the SpCell changes,

– in the masterCellGroup at change of AS security key derived from KgNB,

– in the secondaryCellGroup at:

– PSCell addition,

– update of required SI for PSCell,

– change of AS security key derived from S-KgNB in NR-DC while the UE is configured with at least one radio bearer with keyToUse set to secondary and that is not released by this RRCReconfiguration message.

– MN handover in (NG)EN-DC.

Otherwise it is optionally present, need M. The field is absent in RRCResume or RRCSetup messages.

SCellAdd

The field is mandatory present upon SCell addition; otherwise it is absent, Need M.

SCellAddMod

The field is mandatory present upon SCell addition; otherwise it is optionally present, need M.

SCG

The field is mandatory present in an SpCellConfig for the PSCell. It is absent otherwise.

NOTE: In case of change of AS security key derived from S-KgNB/S-KeNB, if reconfigurationWithSync is not included in the masterCellGroup, the network releases all existing MCG RLC bearers associated with a radio bearer with keyToUse set to secondary. In case of change of AS security key derived from KgNB/KeNB, if reconfigurationWithSync is not included in the secondaryCellGroup, the network releases all existing SCG RLC bearers associated with a radio bearer with keyToUse set to primary.

CellGroupId

The IE CellGroupId is used to identify a cell group. Value 0 identifies the master cell group. Other values identify secondary cell groups. In this version of the specification only values 0 and 1 are supported.

CellGroupId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CELLGROUPID-START

CellGroupId ::= INTEGER (0.. maxSecondaryCellGroups)

— TAG-CELLGROUPID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CellIdentity

The IE CellIdentity is used to unambiguously identify a cell within a PLMN.

CellIdentity information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CELLIDENTITY-START

CellIdentity ::= BIT STRING (SIZE (36))

— TAG-CELLIDENTITY-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CellReselectionPriority

The IE CellReselectionPriority concerns the absolute priority of the concerned carrier frequency, as used by the cell reselection procedure. Corresponds to parameter "priority" in TS 38.304 [20]. Value 0 means lowest priority. The UE behaviour for the case the field is absent, if applicable, is specified in TS 38.304 [20].

CellReselectionPriority information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CELLRESELECTIONPRIORITY-START

CellReselectionPriority ::= INTEGER (0..7)

— TAG-CELLRESELECTIONPRIORITY-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CellReselectionSubPriority

The IE CellReselectionSubPriority indicates a fractional value to be added to the value of cellReselectionPriority to obtain the absolute priority of the concerned carrier frequency for E-UTRA and NR. Value oDot2 corresponds to 0.2, value oDot4 corresponds to 0.4 and so on.

CellReselectionSubPriority information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CELLRESELECTIONSUBPRIORITY-START

CellReselectionSubPriority ::= ENUMERATED {oDot2, oDot4, oDot6, oDot8}

— TAG-CELLRESELECTIONSUBPRIORITY-STOP

— ASN1STOP

– CGI-InfoEUTRA

The IE CGI-InfoEUTRA indicates EUTRA cell access related information, which is reported by the UE as part of E-UTRA report CGI procedure.

CGI-InfoEUTRA information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CGI-INFOEUTRA-START

CGI-InfoEUTRA ::= SEQUENCE {

cgi-info-EPC SEQUENCE {

cgi-info-EPC-legacy CellAccessRelatedInfo-EUTRA-EPC,

cgi-info-EPC-list SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPLMN)) OF CellAccessRelatedInfo-EUTRA-EPC OPTIONAL

} OPTIONAL,

cgi-info-5GC SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPLMN)) OF CellAccessRelatedInfo-EUTRA-5GC OPTIONAL,

freqBandIndicator FreqBandIndicatorEUTRA,

multiBandInfoList MultiBandInfoListEUTRA OPTIONAL,

freqBandIndicatorPriority ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL

}

— TAG-CGI-INFOEUTRA-STOP

— ASN1STOP

– CGI-InfoNR

The IE CGI-InfoNR indicates cell access related information, which is reported by the UE as part of report CGI procedure.

CGI-InfoNR information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CGI-INFO-NR-START

CGI-InfoNR ::= SEQUENCE {

plmn-IdentityInfoList PLMN-IdentityInfoList OPTIONAL,

frequencyBandList MultiFrequencyBandListNR OPTIONAL,

noSIB1 SEQUENCE {

ssb-SubcarrierOffset INTEGER (0..15),

pdcch-ConfigSIB1 PDCCH-ConfigSIB1

} OPTIONAL,

}

— TAG-CGI-INFO-NR-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CGI-InfoNR field descriptions

noSIB1

Contains ssb-SubcarrierOffset and pdcch-ConfigSIB1 fields acquired by the UE from MIB of the cell for which report CGI procedure was requested by the network in case SIB1 was not broadcast by the cell.

CodebookConfig

The IE CodebookConfig is used to configure codebooks of Type-I and Type-II (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.2)

CodebookConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CODEBOOKCONFIG-START

CodebookConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

codebookType CHOICE {

type1 SEQUENCE {

subType CHOICE {

typeI-SinglePanel SEQUENCE {

nrOfAntennaPorts CHOICE {

two SEQUENCE {

twoTX-CodebookSubsetRestriction BIT STRING (SIZE (6))

},

moreThanTwo SEQUENCE {

n1-n2 CHOICE {

two-one-TypeI-SinglePanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (8)),

two-two-TypeI-SinglePanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (64)),

four-one-TypeI-SinglePanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (16)),

three-two-TypeI-SinglePanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (96)),

six-one-TypeI-SinglePanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (24)),

four-two-TypeI-SinglePanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (128)),

eight-one-TypeI-SinglePanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (32)),

four-three-TypeI-SinglePanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (192)),

six-two-TypeI-SinglePanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (192)),

twelve-one-TypeI-SinglePanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (48)),

four-four-TypeI-SinglePanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (256)),

eight-two-TypeI-SinglePanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (256)),

sixteen-one-TypeI-SinglePanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (64))

},

typeI-SinglePanel-codebookSubsetRestriction-i2 BIT STRING (SIZE (16)) OPTIONAL — Need R

}

},

typeI-SinglePanel-ri-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (8))

},

typeI-MultiPanel SEQUENCE {

ng-n1-n2 CHOICE {

two-two-one-TypeI-MultiPanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (8)),

two-four-one-TypeI-MultiPanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (16)),

four-two-one-TypeI-MultiPanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (8)),

two-two-two-TypeI-MultiPanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (64)),

two-eight-one-TypeI-MultiPanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (32)),

four-four-one-TypeI-MultiPanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (16)),

two-four-two-TypeI-MultiPanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (128)),

four-two-two-TypeI-MultiPanel-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (64))

},

ri-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (4))

}

},

codebookMode INTEGER (1..2)

},

type2 SEQUENCE {

subType CHOICE {

typeII SEQUENCE {

n1-n2-codebookSubsetRestriction CHOICE {

two-one BIT STRING (SIZE (16)),

two-two BIT STRING (SIZE (43)),

four-one BIT STRING (SIZE (32)),

three-two BIT STRING (SIZE (59)),

six-one BIT STRING (SIZE (48)),

four-two BIT STRING (SIZE (75)),

eight-one BIT STRING (SIZE (64)),

four-three BIT STRING (SIZE (107)),

six-two BIT STRING (SIZE (107)),

twelve-one BIT STRING (SIZE (96)),

four-four BIT STRING (SIZE (139)),

eight-two BIT STRING (SIZE (139)),

sixteen-one BIT STRING (SIZE (128))

},

typeII-RI-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (2))

},

typeII-PortSelection SEQUENCE {

portSelectionSamplingSize ENUMERATED {n1, n2, n3, n4} OPTIONAL, — Need R

typeII-PortSelectionRI-Restriction BIT STRING (SIZE (2))

}

},

phaseAlphabetSize ENUMERATED {n4, n8},

subbandAmplitude BOOLEAN,

numberOfBeams ENUMERATED {two, three, four}

}

}

}

— TAG-CODEBOOKCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CodebookConfig field descriptions

codebookMode

CodebookMode as specified in TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.2.2.

codebookType

CodebookType including possibly sub-types and the corresponding parameters for each (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.2).

n1-n2-codebookSubsetRestriction

Number of antenna ports in first (n1) and second (n2) dimension and codebook subset restriction (see TS 38.214 [19] clause 5.2.2.2.3).

Number of bits for codebook subset restriction is CEIL(log2(nchoosek(O1*O2,4)))+8*n1*n2 where nchoosek(a,b) = a!/(b!(a-b)!).

n1-n2

Number of antenna ports in first (n1) and second (n2) dimension and codebook subset restriction (see TS 38.214 [19] clause 5.2.2.2.1).

ng-n1-n2

Codebook subset restriction for Type I Multi-panel codebook (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.2.2).

numberOfBeams

Number of beams, L, used for linear combination.

phaseAlphabetSize

The size of the PSK alphabet, QPSK or 8-PSK.

portSelectionSamplingSize

The size of the port selection codebook (parameter d).

ri-Restriction

Restriction for RI for TypeI-MultiPanel-RI-Restriction (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.2.2).

subbandAmplitude

If subband amplitude reporting is activated (true).

twoTX-CodebookSubsetRestriction

Codebook subset restriction for 2TX codebook (see TS 38.214 [19] clause 5.2.2.2.1).

typeI-SinglePanel-codebookSubsetRestriction-i2

i2 codebook subset restriction for Type I Single-panel codebook used when reportQuantity is CRI/Ri/i1/CQI (see TS 38.214 [19] clause 5.2.2.2.1).

typeI-SinglePanel-ri-Restriction

Restriction for RI for TypeI-SinglePanel-RI-Restriction (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.2.1).

typeII-PortSelectionRI-Restriction

Restriction for RI for TypeII-PortSelection-RI-Restriction (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.4).

typeII-RI-Restriction

Restriction for RI for TypeII-RI-Restriction (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.2.3).

ConfiguredGrantConfig

The IE ConfiguredGrantConfig is used to configure uplink transmission without dynamic grant according to two possible schemes. The actual uplink grant may either be configured via RRC (type1) or provided via the PDCCH (addressed to CS-RNTI) (type2).

ConfiguredGrantConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CONFIGUREDGRANTCONFIG-START

ConfiguredGrantConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

frequencyHopping ENUMERATED {intraSlot, interSlot} OPTIONAL, — Need S

cg-DMRS-Configuration DMRS-UplinkConfig,

mcs-Table ENUMERATED {qam256, qam64LowSE} OPTIONAL, — Need S

mcs-TableTransformPrecoder ENUMERATED {qam256, qam64LowSE} OPTIONAL, — Need S

uci-OnPUSCH SetupRelease { CG-UCI-OnPUSCH } OPTIONAL, — Need M

resourceAllocation ENUMERATED { resourceAllocationType0, resourceAllocationType1, dynamicSwitch },

rbg-Size ENUMERATED {config2} OPTIONAL, — Need S

powerControlLoopToUse ENUMERATED {n0, n1},

p0-PUSCH-Alpha P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId,

transformPrecoder ENUMERATED {enabled, disabled} OPTIONAL, — Need S

nrofHARQ-Processes INTEGER(1..16),

repK ENUMERATED {n1, n2, n4, n8},

repK-RV ENUMERATED {s1-0231, s2-0303, s3-0000} OPTIONAL, — Need R

periodicity ENUMERATED {

sym2, sym7, sym1x14, sym2x14, sym4x14, sym5x14, sym8x14, sym10x14, sym16x14, sym20x14,

sym32x14, sym40x14, sym64x14, sym80x14, sym128x14, sym160x14, sym256x14, sym320x14, sym512x14,

sym640x14, sym1024x14, sym1280x14, sym2560x14, sym5120x14,

sym6, sym1x12, sym2x12, sym4x12, sym5x12, sym8x12, sym10x12, sym16x12, sym20x12, sym32x12,

sym40x12, sym64x12, sym80x12, sym128x12, sym160x12, sym256x12, sym320x12, sym512x12, sym640x12,

sym1280x12, sym2560x12

},

configuredGrantTimer INTEGER (1..64) OPTIONAL, — Need R

rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant SEQUENCE {

timeDomainOffset INTEGER (0..5119),

timeDomainAllocation INTEGER (0..15),

frequencyDomainAllocation BIT STRING (SIZE(18)),

antennaPort INTEGER (0..31),

dmrs-SeqInitialization INTEGER (0..1) OPTIONAL, — Need R

precodingAndNumberOfLayers INTEGER (0..63),

srs-ResourceIndicator INTEGER (0..15) OPTIONAL, — Need R

mcsAndTBS INTEGER (0..31),

frequencyHoppingOffset INTEGER (1.. maxNrofPhysicalResourceBlocks-1) OPTIONAL, — Need R

pathlossReferenceIndex INTEGER (0..maxNrofPUSCH-PathlossReferenceRSs-1),

} OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

CG-UCI-OnPUSCH ::= CHOICE {

dynamic SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..4)) OF BetaOffsets,

semiStatic BetaOffsets

}

— TAG-CONFIGUREDGRANTCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ConfiguredGrantConfig field descriptions

antennaPort

Indicates the antenna port(s) to be used for this configuration, and the maximum bitwidth is 5. See TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.2, and TS 38.212 [17], clause 7.3.1.

cg-DMRS-Configuration

DMRS configuration (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.2.3).

configuredGrantTimer

Indicates the initial value of the configured grant timer (see TS 38.321 [3]) in multiples of periodicity.

dmrs-SeqInitialization

The network configures this field if transformPrecoder is disabled. Otherwise the field is absent.

frequencyDomainAllocation

Indicates the frequency domain resource allocation, see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.2, and TS 38.212 [17], clause 7.3.1).

frequencyHopping

The value intraSlot enables ‘Intra-slot frequency hopping’ and the value interSlot enables ‘Inter-slot frequency hopping’. If the field is absent, frequency hopping is not configured.

frequencyHoppingOffset

Frequency hopping offset used when frequency hopping is enabled (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.2 and clause 6.3).

mcs-Table

Indicates the MCS table the UE shall use for PUSCH without transform precoding. If the field is absent the UE applies the value qam64.

mcs-TableTransformPrecoder

Indicates the MCS table the UE shall use for PUSCH with transform precoding. If the field is absent the UE applies the value qam64.

mcsAndTBS

The modulation order, target code rate and TB size (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.2). The NW does not configure the values 28~31 in this version of the specification.

nrofHARQ-Processes

The number of HARQ processes configured. It applies for both Type 1 and Type 2. See TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.4.1.

p0-PUSCH-Alpha

Index of the P0-PUSCH-AlphaSet to be used for this configuration.

periodicity

Periodicity for UL transmission without UL grant for type 1 and type 2 (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.8.2).

The following periodicities are supported depending on the configured subcarrier spacing [symbols]:

15 kHz: 2, 7, n*14, where n={1, 2, 4, 5, 8, 10, 16, 20, 32, 40, 64, 80, 128, 160, 320, 640}

30 kHz: 2, 7, n*14, where n={1, 2, 4, 5, 8, 10, 16, 20, 32, 40, 64, 80, 128, 160, 256, 320, 640, 1280}

60 kHz with normal CP 2, 7, n*14, where n={1, 2, 4, 5, 8, 10, 16, 20, 32, 40, 64, 80, 128, 160, 256, 320, 512, 640, 1280, 2560}

60 kHz with ECP: 2, 6, n*12, where n={1, 2, 4, 5, 8, 10, 16, 20, 32, 40, 64, 80, 128, 160, 256, 320, 512, 640, 1280, 2560}

120 kHz: 2, 7, n*14, where n={1, 2, 4, 5, 8, 10, 16, 20, 32, 40, 64, 80, 128, 160, 256, 320, 512, 640, 1024, 1280, 2560, 5120}

powerControlLoopToUse

Closed control loop to apply (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.1.1).

rbg-Size

Selection between configuration 1 and configuration 2 for RBG size for PUSCH. The UE does not apply this field if resourceAllocation is set to resourceAllocationType1. Otherwise, the UE applies the value config1 when the field is absent. Note: rbg-Size is used when the transformPrecoder parameter is disabled.

repK-RV

The redundancy version (RV) sequence to use. See TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.2. The network configures this field if repetitions are used, i.e., if repK is set to n2, n4 or n8. Otherwise, the field is absent.

repK

Number of repetitions K, see TS 38.214 [19].

resourceAllocation

Configuration of resource allocation type 0 and resource allocation type 1. For Type 1 UL data transmission without grant, resourceAllocation should be resourceAllocationType0 or resourceAllocationType1.

rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant

Configuration for "configured grant" transmission with fully RRC-configured UL grant (Type1). If this field is absent the UE uses UL grant configured by DCI addressed to CS-RNTI (Type2). Type 1 configured grant may be configured for UL or SUL, but not for both simultaneously.

srs-ResourceIndicator

Indicates the SRS resource to be used.

timeDomainAllocation

Indicates a combination of start symbol and length and PUSCH mapping type, see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.2 and TS 38.212 [17], clause 7.3.1.

timeDomainOffset

Offset related to SFN=0, see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.8.2.

transformPrecoder

Enables or disables transform precoding for type1 and type2. If the field is absent, the UE enables or disables transform precoding in accordance with the field msg3-transformPrecoder in RACH-ConfigCommon, see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.3.

uci-OnPUSCH

Selection between and configuration of dynamic and semi-static beta-offset. For Type 1 UL data transmission without grant, uci-OnPUSCH should be set to semiStatic.

ConnEstFailureControl

The IE ConnEstFailureControl is used to configure parameters for connection establishment failure control.

ConnEstFailureControl information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CONNESTFAILURECONTROL-START

ConnEstFailureControl ::= SEQUENCE {

connEstFailCount ENUMERATED {n1, n2, n3, n4},

connEstFailOffsetValidity ENUMERATED {s30, s60, s120, s240, s300, s420, s600, s900},

connEstFailOffset INTEGER (0..15) OPTIONAL — Need S

}

— TAG-CONNESTFAILURECONTROL-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ConnEstFailureControl field descriptions

connEstFailCount

Number of times that the UE detects T300 expiry on the same cell before applying connEstFailOffset.

connEstFailOffset

Parameter "Qoffsettemp" in TS 38.304 [20]. If the field is absent, the value of infinity shall be used for "Qoffsettemp".

connEstFailOffsetValidity

Amount of time that the UE applies connEstFailOffset before removing the offset from evaluation of the cell. Value s30 corresponds to 30 seconds, value s60 corresponds to 60 seconds, and so on.

ControlResourceSet

The IE ControlResourceSet is used to configure a time/frequency control resource set (CORESET) in which to search for downlink control information (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 10.1).

ControlResourceSet information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CONTROLRESOURCESET-START

ControlResourceSet ::= SEQUENCE {

controlResourceSetId ControlResourceSetId,

frequencyDomainResources BIT STRING (SIZE (45)),

duration INTEGER (1..maxCoReSetDuration),

cce-REG-MappingType CHOICE {

interleaved SEQUENCE {

reg-BundleSize ENUMERATED {n2, n3, n6},

interleaverSize ENUMERATED {n2, n3, n6},

shiftIndex INTEGER(0..maxNrofPhysicalResourceBlocks-1) OPTIONAL — Need S

},

nonInterleaved NULL

},

precoderGranularity ENUMERATED {sameAsREG-bundle, allContiguousRBs},

tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList SEQUENCE(SIZE (1..maxNrofTCI-StatesPDCCH)) OF TCI-StateId OPTIONAL, — Cond NotSIB1-initialBWP

tci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList SEQUENCE(SIZE (1..maxNrofTCI-StatesPDCCH)) OF TCI-StateId OPTIONAL, — Cond NotSIB1-initialBWP

tci-PresentInDCI ENUMERATED {enabled} OPTIONAL, — Need S

pdcch-DMRS-ScramblingID INTEGER (0..65535) OPTIONAL, — Need S

}

— TAG-CONTROLRESOURCESET-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ControlResourceSet field descriptions

cce-REG-MappingType

Mapping of Control Channel Elements (CCE) to Resource Element Groups (REG) (see TS 38.211 [16], clauses 7.3.2.2 and 7.4.1.3.2).

controlResourceSetId

Value 0 identifies the common CORESET configured in MIB and in ServingCellConfigCommon (controlResourceSetZero) and is hence not used here in the ControlResourceSet IE. Values 1..maxNrofControlResourceSets-1 identify CORESETs configured by dedicated signalling or in SIB1. The controlResourceSetId is unique among the BWPs of a serving cell.

duration

Contiguous time duration of the CORESET in number of symbols (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.3.2.2).

frequencyDomainResources

Frequency domain resources for the CORESET. Each bit corresponds a group of 6 RBs, with grouping starting from the first RB group (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 10.1) in the BWP. The first (left-most / most significant) bit corresponds to the first RB group in the BWP, and so on. A bit that is set to 1 indicates that this RB group belongs to the frequency domain resource of this CORESET. Bits corresponding to a group of RBs not fully contained in the bandwidth part within which the CORESET is configured are set to zero (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.3.2.2).

interleaverSize

Interleaver-size (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.3.2.2).

pdcch-DMRS-ScramblingID

PDCCH DMRS scrambling initialization (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.3.1). When the field is absent the UE applies the value of the physCellId configured for this serving cell.

precoderGranularity

Precoder granularity in frequency domain (see TS 38.211 [16], clauses 7.3.2.2 and 7.4.1.3.2).

reg-BundleSize

Resource Element Groups (REGs) can be bundled to create REG bundles. This parameter defines the size of such bundles (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.3.2.2).

shiftIndex

When the field is absent the UE applies the value of the physCellIdconfigured for this serving cell (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.3.2.2).

tci-PresentInDCI

This field indicates if TCI field is present or absent in DL-related DCI. When the field is absent the UE considers the TCI to be absent/disabled. In case of cross carrier scheduling, the network sets this field to enabled for the ControlResourceSet used for cross carrier scheduling in the scheduling cell (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.5).

tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList

A subset of the TCI states defined in pdsch-Config included in the BWP-DownlinkDedicated corresponding to the serving cell and to the DL BWP to which the ControlResourceSet belong to. They are used for providing QCL relationships between the DL RS(s) in one RS Set (TCI-State) and the PDCCH DMRS ports (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 6.). The network configures at most maxNrofTCI-StatesPDCCH entries.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

NotSIB1-initialBWP

The field is absent in SIB1 and in the PDCCH-ConfigCommon of the initial BWP in ServingCellConfigCommon, if SIB1 is broadcasted. Otherwise, it is optionally present, Need N.

ControlResourceSetId

The ControlResourceSetId IE concerns a short identity, used to identify a control resource set within a serving cell. The ControlResourceSetId = 0 identifies the ControlResourceSet#0 configured via PBCH (MIB) and in controlResourceSetZero (ServingCellConfigCommon). The ID space is used across the BWPs of a Serving Cell.

ControlResourceSetId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CONTROLRESOURCESETID-START

ControlResourceSetId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofControlResourceSets-1)

— TAG-CONTROLRESOURCESETID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ControlResourceSetZero

The IE ControlResourceSetZero is used to configure CORESET#0 of the initial BWP (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 13).

ControlResourceSetZero information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CONTROLRESOURCESETZERO-START

ControlResourceSetZero ::= INTEGER (0..15)

— TAG-CONTROLRESOURCESETZERO-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig

The IE CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig is used to specify the configuration when the cross-carrier scheduling is used in a cell.

CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig-START

CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

schedulingCellInfo CHOICE {

own SEQUENCE { — Cross carrier scheduling: scheduling cell

cif-Presence BOOLEAN

},

other SEQUENCE { — Cross carrier scheduling: scheduled cell

schedulingCellId ServCellIndex,

cif-InSchedulingCell INTEGER (1..7)

}

},

}

— TAG-CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig field descriptions

cif-Presence

The field is used to indicate whether carrier indicator field is present (value true) or not (value false) in PDCCH DCI formats, see TS 38.213 [13]. If cif-Presence is set to true, the CIF value indicating a grant or assignment for this cell is 0.

cif-InSchedulingCell

The field indicates the CIF value used in the scheduling cell to indicate a grant or assignment applicable for this cell, see TS 38.213 [13].

other

Parameters for cross-carrier scheduling, i.e., a serving cell is scheduled by a PDCCH on another (scheduling) cell. The network configures this field only for SCells.

own

Parameters for self-scheduling, i.e., a serving cell is scheduled by its own PDCCH.

schedulingCellId

Indicates which cell signals the downlink allocations and uplink grants, if applicable, for the concerned SCell. In case the UE is configured with DC, the scheduling cell is part of the same cell group (i.e. MCG or SCG) as the scheduled cell. In case the UE is configured with two PUCCH groups, the scheduling cell and the scheduled cell are within the same PUCCH group.

CSI-AperiodicTriggerStateList

The CSI-AperiodicTriggerStateList IE is used to configure the UE with a list of aperiodic trigger states. Each codepoint of the DCI field "CSI request" is associated with one trigger state (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 6.1.3.13). Upon reception of the value associated with a trigger state, the UE will perform measurement of CSI-RS, CSI-IM and/or SSB (reference signals) and aperiodic reporting on L1 according to all entries in the associatedReportConfigInfoList for that trigger state.

CSI-AperiodicTriggerStateList information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-APERIODICTRIGGERSTATELIST-START

CSI-AperiodicTriggerStateList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrOfCSI-AperiodicTriggers)) OF CSI-AperiodicTriggerState

CSI-AperiodicTriggerState ::= SEQUENCE {

associatedReportConfigInfoList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofReportConfigPerAperiodicTrigger)) OF CSI-AssociatedReportConfigInfo,

}

CSI-AssociatedReportConfigInfo ::= SEQUENCE {

reportConfigId CSI-ReportConfigId,

resourcesForChannel CHOICE {

nzp-CSI-RS SEQUENCE {

resourceSet INTEGER (1..maxNrofNZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetsPerConfig),

qcl-info SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofAP-CSI-RS-ResourcesPerSet)) OF TCI-StateId

OPTIONAL — Cond Aperiodic

},

csi-SSB-ResourceSet INTEGER (1..maxNrofCSI-SSB-ResourceSetsPerConfig)

},

csi-IM-ResourcesForInterference INTEGER(1..maxNrofCSI-IM-ResourceSetsPerConfig)

OPTIONAL, — Cond CSI-IM-ForInterference

nzp-CSI-RS-ResourcesForInterference INTEGER (1..maxNrofNZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetsPerConfig)

OPTIONAL, — Cond NZP-CSI-RS-ForInterference

}

— TAG-CSI-APERIODICTRIGGERSTATELIST-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-AssociatedReportConfigInfo field descriptions

csi-IM-ResourcesForInterference

CSI-IM-ResourceSet for interference measurement. Entry number in csi-IM-ResourceSetList in the CSI-ResourceConfig indicated by csi-IM-ResourcesForInterference in the CSI-ReportConfig indicated by reportConfigId above (value 1 corresponds to the first entry, value 2 to the second entry, and so on). The indicated CSI-IM-ResourceSet should have exactly the same number of resources like the NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet indicated in resourceSet within nzp-CSI-RS.

csi-SSB-ResourceSet

CSI-SSB-ResourceSet for channel measurements. Entry number in csi-SSB-ResourceSetList in the CSI-ResourceConfig indicated by resourcesForChannelMeasurement in the CSI-ReportConfig indicated by reportConfigId above (value 1 corresponds to the first entry, value 2 to the second entry, and so on).

nzp-CSI-RS-ResourcesForInterference

NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet for interference measurement. Entry number in nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetList in the CSI-ResourceConfig indicated by nzp-CSI-RS-ResourcesForInterference in the CSI-ReportConfig indicated by reportConfigId above (value 1 corresponds to the first entry, value 2 to the second entry, and so on).

qcl-info

List of references to TCI-States for providing the QCL source and QCL type for each NZP-CSI-RS-Resource listed in nzp-CSI-RS-Resources of the NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet indicated by resourceSet within nzp-CSI-RS. Each TCI-StateId refers to the TCI-State which has this value for tci-StateId and is defined in tci-StatesToAddModList in the PDSCH-Config included in the BWP-Downlink corresponding to the serving cell and to the DL BWP to which the resourcesForChannelMeasurement (in the CSI-ReportConfig indicated by reportConfigId above) belong to. First entry in qcl-info corresponds to first entry in nzp-CSI-RS-Resources of that NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet, second entry in qcl-info corresponds to second entry in nzp-CSI-RS-Resources, and so on (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.5.1)

reportConfigId

The reportConfigId of one of the CSI-ReportConfigToAddMod configured in CSI-MeasConfig

resourceSet

NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet for channel measurements. Entry number in nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetList in the CSI-ResourceConfig indicated by resourcesForChannelMeasurement in the CSI-ReportConfig indicated by reportConfigId above (value 1 corresponds to the first entry, value 2 to thesecond entry, and so on).

Conditional Presence

Explanation

Aperiodic

The field is mandatory present if the NZP-CSI-RS-Resources in the associated resourceSet have the resourceType aperiodic. The field is absent otherwise.

CSI-IM-ForInterference

This field is mandatory present if the CSI-ReportConfig identified by reportConfigId is configured with csi-IM-ResourcesForInterference; otherwise it is absent.

NZP-CSI-RS-ForInterference

This field is mandatory present if the CSI-ReportConfig identified by reportConfigId is configured with nzp-CSI-RS-ResourcesForInterference; otherwise it is absent.

CSI-FrequencyOccupation

The IE CSI-FrequencyOccupation is used to configure the frequency domain occupation of a channel state information measurement resource (e.g. NZP-CSI-RS-Resource, CSI-IM-Resource).

CSI-FrequencyOccupation information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-FREQUENCYOCCUPATION-START

CSI-FrequencyOccupation ::= SEQUENCE {

startingRB INTEGER (0..maxNrofPhysicalResourceBlocks-1),

nrofRBs INTEGER (24..maxNrofPhysicalResourceBlocksPlus1),

}

— TAG-CSI-FREQUENCYOCCUPATION-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-FrequencyOccupation field descriptions

nrofRBs

Number of PRBs across which this CSI resource spans. Only multiples of 4 are allowed. The smallest configurable number is the minimum of 24 and the width of the associated BWP. If the configured value is larger than the width of the corresponding BWP, the UE shall assume that the actual CSI-RS bandwidth is equal to the width of the BWP.

startingRB

PRB where this CSI resource starts in relation to common resource block #0 (CRB#0) on the common resource block grid. Only multiples of 4 are allowed (0, 4, …)

CSI-IM-Resource

The IE CSI-IM-Resource is used to configure one CSI Interference Management (IM) resource.

CSI-IM-Resource information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-IM-RESOURCE-START

CSI-IM-Resource ::= SEQUENCE {

csi-IM-ResourceId CSI-IM-ResourceId,

csi-IM-ResourceElementPattern CHOICE {

pattern0 SEQUENCE {

subcarrierLocation-p0 ENUMERATED { s0, s2, s4, s6, s8, s10 },

symbolLocation-p0 INTEGER (0..12)

},

pattern1 SEQUENCE {

subcarrierLocation-p1 ENUMERATED { s0, s4, s8 },

symbolLocation-p1 INTEGER (0..13)

}

} OPTIONAL, — Need M

freqBand CSI-FrequencyOccupation OPTIONAL, — Need M

periodicityAndOffset CSI-ResourcePeriodicityAndOffset OPTIONAL, — Cond PeriodicOrSemiPersistent

}

— TAG-CSI-IM-RESOURCE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-IM-Resource field descriptions

csi-IM-ResourceElementPattern

The resource element pattern (Pattern0 (2,2) or Pattern1 (4,1)) with corresponding parameters (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.4)

freqBand

Frequency-occupancy of CSI-IM (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.4)

periodicityAndOffset

Periodicity and slot offset for periodic/semi-persistent CSI-IM. Network always configures the UE with a value for this field for periodic and semi-persistent CSI-IM-Resources (as indicated in CSI-ResourceConfig). A change of configuration between periodic or semi-persistent and aperiodic for a CSI-IM-Resource is not supported without a release and add.

subcarrierLocation-p0

OFDM subcarrier occupancy of the CSI-IM resource for Pattern0 (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.4)

subcarrierLocation-p1

OFDM subcarrier occupancy of the CSI-IM resource for Pattern1 (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.4)

symbolLocation-p0

OFDM symbol location of the CSI-IM resource for Pattern0 (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.4)

symbolLocation-p1

OFDM symbol location of the CSI-IM resource for Pattern1 (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.4)

Conditional Presence

Explanation

PeriodicOrSemiPersistent

The field is optionally present, Need M, for periodic and semi-persistent CSI-IM-Resources (as indicated in CSI-ResourceConfig). The field is absent otherwise.

CSI-IM-ResourceId

The IE CSI-IM-ResourceId is used to identify one CSI-IM-Resource.

CSI-IM-ResourceId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-IM-RESOURCEID-START

CSI-IM-ResourceId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofCSI-IM-Resources-1)

— TAG-CSI-IM-RESOURCEID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-IM-ResourceSet

The IE CSI-IM-ResourceSet is used to configure a set of one or more CSI Interference Management (IM) resources (their IDs) and set-specific parameters.

CSI-IM-ResourceSet information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-IM-RESOURCESET-START

CSI-IM-ResourceSet ::= SEQUENCE {

csi-IM-ResourceSetId CSI-IM-ResourceSetId,

csi-IM-Resources SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofCSI-IM-ResourcesPerSet)) OF CSI-IM-ResourceId,

}

— TAG-CSI-IM-RESOURCESET-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-IM-ResourceSet field descriptions

csi-IM-Resources

CSI-IM-Resources associated with this CSI-IM-ResourceSet (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2).

CSI-IM-ResourceSetId

The IE CSI-IM-ResourceSetId is used to identify CSI-IM-ResourceSets.

CSI-IM-ResourceSetId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-IM-RESOURCESETID-START

CSI-IM-ResourceSetId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofCSI-IM-ResourceSets-1)

— TAG-CSI-IM-RESOURCESETID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-MeasConfig

The IE CSI-MeasConfig is used to configure CSI-RS (reference signals) belonging to the serving cell in which CSI-MeasConfig is included, channel state information reports to be transmitted on PUCCH on the serving cell in which CSI-MeasConfig is included and channel state information reports on PUSCH triggered by DCI received on the serving cell in which CSI-MeasConfig is included. See also TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.

CSI-MeasConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-MEASCONFIG-START

CSI-MeasConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofNZP-CSI-RS-Resources)) OF NZP-CSI-RS-Resource OPTIONAL, — Need N

nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofNZP-CSI-RS-Resources)) OF NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId OPTIONAL, — Need N

nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofNZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSets)) OF NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet

OPTIONAL, — Need N

nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofNZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSets)) OF NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId

OPTIONAL, — Need N

csi-IM-ResourceToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCSI-IM-Resources)) OF CSI-IM-Resource OPTIONAL, — Need N

csi-IM-ResourceToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCSI-IM-Resources)) OF CSI-IM-ResourceId OPTIONAL, — Need N

csi-IM-ResourceSetToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCSI-IM-ResourceSets)) OF CSI-IM-ResourceSet OPTIONAL, — Need N

csi-IM-ResourceSetToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCSI-IM-ResourceSets)) OF CSI-IM-ResourceSetId OPTIONAL, — Need N

csi-SSB-ResourceSetToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCSI-SSB-ResourceSets)) OF CSI-SSB-ResourceSet OPTIONAL, — Need N

csi-SSB-ResourceSetToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCSI-SSB-ResourceSets)) OF CSI-SSB-ResourceSetId OPTIONAL, — Need N

csi-ResourceConfigToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCSI-ResourceConfigurations)) OF CSI-ResourceConfig

OPTIONAL, — Need N

csi-ResourceConfigToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCSI-ResourceConfigurations)) OF CSI-ResourceConfigId

OPTIONAL, — Need N

csi-ReportConfigToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCSI-ReportConfigurations)) OF CSI-ReportConfig OPTIONAL, — Need N

csi-ReportConfigToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCSI-ReportConfigurations)) OF CSI-ReportConfigId

OPTIONAL, — Need N

reportTriggerSize INTEGER (0..6) OPTIONAL, — Need M

aperiodicTriggerStateList SetupRelease { CSI-AperiodicTriggerStateList } OPTIONAL, — Need M

semiPersistentOnPUSCH-TriggerStateList SetupRelease { CSI-SemiPersistentOnPUSCH-TriggerStateList } OPTIONAL, — Need M

}

— TAG-CSI-MEASCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-MeasConfig field descriptions

aperiodicTriggerStateList

Contains trigger states for dynamically selecting one or more aperiodic and semi-persistent reporting configurations and/or triggering one or more aperiodic CSI-RS resource sets for channel and/or interference measurement.

csi-IM-ResourceSetToAddModList

Pool of CSI-IM-ResourceSet which can be referred to from CSI-ResourceConfig or from MAC CEs.

csi-IM-ResourceToAddModList

Pool of CSI-IM-Resource which can be referred to from CSI-IM-ResourceSet.

csi-ReportConfigToAddModList

Configured CSI report settings as specified in TS 38.214 [19] clause 5.2.1.1.

csi-ResourceConfigToAddModList

Configured CSI resource settings as specified in TS 38.214 [19] clause 5.2.1.2.

csi-SSB-ResourceSetToAddModList

Pool of CSI-SSB-ResourceSet which can be referred to from CSI-ResourceConfig.

nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetToAddModList

Pool of NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet which can be referred to from CSI-ResourceConfig or from MAC CEs.

nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceToAddModList

Pool of NZP-CSI-RS-Resource which can be referred to from NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet.

reportTriggerSize

Size of CSI request field in DCI (bits) (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.5.1).

CSI-ReportConfig

The IE CSI-ReportConfig is used to configure a periodic or semi-persistent report sent on PUCCH on the cell in which the CSI-ReportConfig is included, or to configure a semi-persistent or aperiodic report sent on PUSCH triggered by DCI received on the cell in which the CSI-ReportConfig is included (in this case, the cell on which the report is sent is determined by the received DCI). See TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.

CSI-ReportConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-REPORTCONFIG-START

CSI-ReportConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

reportConfigId CSI-ReportConfigId,

carrier ServCellIndex OPTIONAL, — Need S

resourcesForChannelMeasurement CSI-ResourceConfigId,

csi-IM-ResourcesForInterference CSI-ResourceConfigId OPTIONAL, — Need R

nzp-CSI-RS-ResourcesForInterference CSI-ResourceConfigId OPTIONAL, — Need R

reportConfigType CHOICE {

periodic SEQUENCE {

reportSlotConfig CSI-ReportPeriodicityAndOffset,

pucch-CSI-ResourceList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofBWPs)) OF PUCCH-CSI-Resource

},

semiPersistentOnPUCCH SEQUENCE {

reportSlotConfig CSI-ReportPeriodicityAndOffset,

pucch-CSI-ResourceList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofBWPs)) OF PUCCH-CSI-Resource

},

semiPersistentOnPUSCH SEQUENCE {

reportSlotConfig ENUMERATED {sl5, sl10, sl20, sl40, sl80, sl160, sl320},

reportSlotOffsetList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1.. maxNrofUL-Allocations)) OF INTEGER(0..32),

p0alpha P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId

},

aperiodic SEQUENCE {

reportSlotOffsetList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofUL-Allocations)) OF INTEGER(0..32)

}

},

reportQuantity CHOICE {

none NULL,

cri-RI-PMI-CQI NULL,

cri-RI-i1 NULL,

cri-RI-i1-CQI SEQUENCE {

pdsch-BundleSizeForCSI ENUMERATED {n2, n4} OPTIONAL — Need S

},

cri-RI-CQI NULL,

cri-RSRP NULL,

ssb-Index-RSRP NULL,

cri-RI-LI-PMI-CQI NULL

},

reportFreqConfiguration SEQUENCE {

cqi-FormatIndicator ENUMERATED { widebandCQI, subbandCQI } OPTIONAL, — Need R

pmi-FormatIndicator ENUMERATED { widebandPMI, subbandPMI } OPTIONAL, — Need R

csi-ReportingBand CHOICE {

subbands3 BIT STRING(SIZE(3)),

subbands4 BIT STRING(SIZE(4)),

subbands5 BIT STRING(SIZE(5)),

subbands6 BIT STRING(SIZE(6)),

subbands7 BIT STRING(SIZE(7)),

subbands8 BIT STRING(SIZE(8)),

subbands9 BIT STRING(SIZE(9)),

subbands10 BIT STRING(SIZE(10)),

subbands11 BIT STRING(SIZE(11)),

subbands12 BIT STRING(SIZE(12)),

subbands13 BIT STRING(SIZE(13)),

subbands14 BIT STRING(SIZE(14)),

subbands15 BIT STRING(SIZE(15)),

subbands16 BIT STRING(SIZE(16)),

subbands17 BIT STRING(SIZE(17)),

subbands18 BIT STRING(SIZE(18)),

…,

subbands19-v1530 BIT STRING(SIZE(19))

} OPTIONAL — Need S

} OPTIONAL, — Need R

timeRestrictionForChannelMeasurements ENUMERATED {configured, notConfigured},

timeRestrictionForInterferenceMeasurements ENUMERATED {configured, notConfigured},

codebookConfig CodebookConfig OPTIONAL, — Need R

dummy ENUMERATED {n1, n2} OPTIONAL, — Need R

groupBasedBeamReporting CHOICE {

enabled NULL,

disabled SEQUENCE {

nrofReportedRS ENUMERATED {n1, n2, n3, n4} OPTIONAL — Need S

}

},

cqi-Table ENUMERATED {table1, table2, table3, spare1} OPTIONAL, — Need R

subbandSize ENUMERATED {value1, value2},

non-PMI-PortIndication SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofNZP-CSI-RS-ResourcesPerConfig)) OF PortIndexFor8Ranks OPTIONAL, — Need R

…,

[[

semiPersistentOnPUSCH-v1530 SEQUENCE {

reportSlotConfig-v1530 ENUMERATED {sl4, sl8, sl16}

} OPTIONAL — Need R

]]

}

CSI-ReportPeriodicityAndOffset ::= CHOICE {

slots4 INTEGER(0..3),

slots5 INTEGER(0..4),

slots8 INTEGER(0..7),

slots10 INTEGER(0..9),

slots16 INTEGER(0..15),

slots20 INTEGER(0..19),

slots40 INTEGER(0..39),

slots80 INTEGER(0..79),

slots160 INTEGER(0..159),

slots320 INTEGER(0..319)

}

PUCCH-CSI-Resource ::= SEQUENCE {

uplinkBandwidthPartId BWP-Id,

pucch-Resource PUCCH-ResourceId

}

PortIndexFor8Ranks ::= CHOICE {

portIndex8 SEQUENCE{

rank1-8 PortIndex8 OPTIONAL, — Need R

rank2-8 SEQUENCE(SIZE(2)) OF PortIndex8 OPTIONAL, — Need R

rank3-8 SEQUENCE(SIZE(3)) OF PortIndex8 OPTIONAL, — Need R

rank4-8 SEQUENCE(SIZE(4)) OF PortIndex8 OPTIONAL, — Need R

rank5-8 SEQUENCE(SIZE(5)) OF PortIndex8 OPTIONAL, — Need R

rank6-8 SEQUENCE(SIZE(6)) OF PortIndex8 OPTIONAL, — Need R

rank7-8 SEQUENCE(SIZE(7)) OF PortIndex8 OPTIONAL, — Need R

rank8-8 SEQUENCE(SIZE(8)) OF PortIndex8 OPTIONAL — Need R

},

portIndex4 SEQUENCE{

rank1-4 PortIndex4 OPTIONAL, — Need R

rank2-4 SEQUENCE(SIZE(2)) OF PortIndex4 OPTIONAL, — Need R

rank3-4 SEQUENCE(SIZE(3)) OF PortIndex4 OPTIONAL, — Need R

rank4-4 SEQUENCE(SIZE(4)) OF PortIndex4 OPTIONAL — Need R

},

portIndex2 SEQUENCE{

rank1-2 PortIndex2 OPTIONAL, — Need R

rank2-2 SEQUENCE(SIZE(2)) OF PortIndex2 OPTIONAL — Need R

},

portIndex1 NULL

}

PortIndex8::= INTEGER (0..7)

PortIndex4::= INTEGER (0..3)

PortIndex2::= INTEGER (0..1)

— TAG-CSI-REPORTCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-ReportConfig field descriptions

carrier

Indicates in which serving cell the CSI-ResourceConfig indicated below are to be found. If the field is absent, the resources are on the same serving cell as this report configuration.

codebookConfig

Codebook configuration for Type-1 or Type-2 including codebook subset restriction.

cqi-FormatIndicator

Indicates whether the UE shall report a single (wideband) or multiple (subband) CQI (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.4).

cqi-Table

Which CQI table to use for CQI calculation (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.1).

csi-IM-ResourcesForInterference

CSI IM resources for interference measurement. csi-ResourceConfigId of a CSI-ResourceConfig included in the configuration of the serving cell indicated with the field "carrier" above. The CSI-ResourceConfig indicated here contains only CSI-IM resources. The bwp-Id in that CSI-ResourceConfig is the same value as the bwp-Id in the CSI-ResourceConfig indicated by resourcesForChannelMeasurement.

csi-ReportingBand

Indicates a contiguous or non-contiguous subset of subbands in the bandwidth part which CSI shall be reported for. Each bit in the bit-string represents one subband. The right-most bit in the bit string represents the lowest subband in the BWP. The choice determines the number of subbands (subbands3 for 3 subbands, subbands4 for 4 subbands, and so on) (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.4). This field is absent if there are less than 24 PRBs (no sub band) and present otherwise (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.4).

dummy

This field is not used in the specification. If received it shall be ignored by the UE.

groupBasedBeamReporting

Turning on/off group beam based reporting (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.4).

non-PMI-PortIndication

Port indication for RI/CQI calculation. For each CSI-RS resource in the linked ResourceConfig for channel measurement, a port indication for each rank R, indicating which R ports to use. Applicable only for non-PMI feedback (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.4.2).

The first entry in non-PMI-PortIndication corresponds to the NZP-CSI-RS-Resource indicated by the first entry in nzp-CSI-RS-Resources in the NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet indicated in the first entry of nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetList of the CSI-ResourceConfig whose CSI-ResourceConfigId is indicated in a CSI-MeasId together with the above CSI-ReportConfigId; the second entry in non-PMI-PortIndication corresponds to the NZP-CSI-RS-Resource indicated by the second entry in nzp-CSI-RS-Resources in the NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet indicated in the first entry of nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetList of the same CSI-ResourceConfig, and so on until the NZP-CSI-RS-Resource indicated by the last entry in nzp-CSI-RS-Resources in the in the NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet indicated in the first entry of nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetList of the same CSI-ResourceConfig. Then the next entry corresponds to the NZP-CSI-RS-Resource indicated by the first entry in nzp-CSI-RS-Resources in the NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet indicated in the second entry of nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetList of the same CSI-ResourceConfig and so on.

nrofReportedRS

The number (N) of measured RS resources to be reported per report setting in a non-group-based report. N <= N_max, where N_max is either 2 or 4 depending on UE capability.

(see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.4) When the field is absent the UE applies the value 1.

nzp-CSI-RS-ResourcesForInterference

NZP CSI RS resources for interference measurement. csi-ResourceConfigId of a CSI-ResourceConfig included in the configuration of the serving cell indicated with the field "carrier" above. The CSI-ResourceConfig indicated here contains only NZP-CSI-RS resources. The bwp-Id in that CSI-ResourceConfig is the same value as the bwp-Id in the CSI-ResourceConfig indicated by resourcesForChannelMeasurement.

p0alpha

Index of the p0-alpha set determining the power control for this CSI report transmission (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.1.2).

pdsch-BundleSizeForCSI

PRB bundling size to assume for CQI calculation when reportQuantity is CRI/RI/i1/CQI. If the field is absent, the UE assumes that no PRB bundling is applied (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.4.2).

pmi-FormatIndicator

Indicates whether the UE shall report a single (wideband) or multiple (subband) PMI. (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.4).

pucch-CSI-ResourceList

Indicates which PUCCH resource to use for reporting on PUCCH.

reportConfigType

Time domain behavior of reporting configuration.

reportFreqConfiguration

Reporting configuration in the frequency domain. (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.4).

reportQuantity

The CSI related quantities to report. see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.

reportSlotConfig

Periodicity and slot offset (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.4). If the field reportSlotConfig-v1530 is present, the UE shall ignore the value provided in reportSlotConfig (without suffix).

reportSlotOffsetList

Timing offset Y for semi persistent reporting using PUSCH. This field lists the allowed offset values. This list must have the same number of entries as the pusch-TimeDomainAllocationList in PUSCH-Config. A particular value is indicated in DCI. The network indicates in the DCI field of the UL grant, which of the configured report slot offsets the UE shall apply. The DCI value 0 corresponds to the first report slot offset in this list, the DCI value 1 corresponds to the second report slot offset in this list, and so on. The first report is transmitted in slot n+Y, second report in n+Y+P, where P is the configured periodicity.

Timing offset Y for aperiodic reporting using PUSCH. This field lists the allowed offset values. This list must have the same number of entries as the pusch-TimeDomainAllocationList in PUSCH-Config. A particular value is indicated in DCI. The network indicates in the DCI field of the UL grant, which of the configured report slot offsets the UE shall apply. The DCI value 0 corresponds to the first report slot offset in this list, the DCI value 1 corresponds to the second report slot offset in this list, and so on (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.2.1).

resourcesForChannelMeasurement

Resources for channel measurement. csi-ResourceConfigId of a CSI-ResourceConfig included in the configuration of the serving cell indicated with the field "carrier" above. The CSI-ResourceConfig indicated here contains only NZP-CSI-RS resources and/or SSB resources. This CSI-ReportConfig is associated with the DL BWP indicated by bwp-Id in that CSI-ResourceConfig.

subbandSize

Indicates one out of two possible BWP-dependent values for the subband size as indicated in TS 38.214 [19], table 5.2.1.4-2 . If csi-ReportingBand is absent, the UE shall ignore this field.

timeRestrictionForChannelMeasurements

Time domain measurement restriction for the channel (signal) measurements (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.1).

timeRestrictionForInterferenceMeasurements

Time domain measurement restriction for interference measurements (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.1).

PortIndexFor8Ranks field descriptions

portIndex8

Port-Index configuration for up to rank 8. If present, the network configures port indexes for at least one of the ranks.

portIndex4

Port-Index configuration for up to rank 4. If present, the network configures port indexes for at least one of the ranks.

portIndex2

Port-Index configuration for up to rank 2. If present, the network configures port indexes for at least one of the ranks.

portIndex1

Port-Index configuration for rank 1.

PUCCH-CSI-Resource field descriptions

pucch-Resource

PUCCH resource for the associated uplink BWP. Only PUCCH-Resource of format 2, 3 and 4 is supported. The actual PUCCH-Resource is configured in PUCCH-Config and referred to by its ID.

CSI-ReportConfigId

The IE CSI-ReportConfigId is used to identify one CSI-ReportConfig.

CSI-ReportConfigId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-REPORTCONFIGID-START

CSI-ReportConfigId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofCSI-ReportConfigurations-1)

— TAG-CSI-REPORTCONFIGID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-ResourceConfig

The IE CSI-ResourceConfig defines a group of one or more NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet, CSI-IM-ResourceSet and/or CSI-SSB-ResourceSet.

CSI-ResourceConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-RESOURCECONFIG-START

CSI-ResourceConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

csi-ResourceConfigId CSI-ResourceConfigId,

csi-RS-ResourceSetList CHOICE {

nzp-CSI-RS-SSB SEQUENCE {

nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofNZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetsPerConfig)) OF NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId

OPTIONAL, — Need R

csi-SSB-ResourceSetList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCSI-SSB-ResourceSetsPerConfig)) OF CSI-SSB-ResourceSetId

OPTIONAL — Need R

},

csi-IM-ResourceSetList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCSI-IM-ResourceSetsPerConfig)) OF CSI-IM-ResourceSetId

},

bwp-Id BWP-Id,

resourceType ENUMERATED { aperiodic, semiPersistent, periodic },

}

— TAG-CSI-RESOURCECONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-ResourceConfig field descriptions

bwp-Id

The DL BWP which the CSI-RS associated with this CSI-ResourceConfig are located in (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.2.

csi-IM-ResourceSetList

List of references to CSI-IM resources used for CSI measurement and reporting in a CSI-RS resource set. Contains up to maxNrofCSI-IM-ResourceSetsPerConfig resource sets if resourceType is ‘aperiodic’ and 1 otherwise (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.2).

csi-ResourceConfigId

Used in CSI-ReportConfig to refer to an instance of CSI-ResourceConfig.

csi-SSB-ResourceSetList

List of references to SSB resources used for beam measurement and reporting in a CSI-RS resource set (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.2).

nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetList

List of references to NZP CSI-RS resources used for CSI measurement and reporting in a CSI-RS resource set. Contains up to maxNrofNZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetsPerConfig resource sets if resourceType is ‘aperiodic’ and 1 otherwise (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.2).

resourceType

Time domain behavior of resource configuration (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.2). It does not apply to resources provided in the csi-SSB-ResourceSetList.

CSI-ResourceConfigId

The IE CSI-ResourceConfigId is used to identify a CSI-ResourceConfig.

CSI-ResourceConfigId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-RESOURCECONFIGID-START

CSI-ResourceConfigId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofCSI-ResourceConfigurations-1)

— TAG-CSI-RESOURCECONFIGID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-ResourcePeriodicityAndOffset

The IE CSI-ResourcePeriodicityAndOffset is used to configure a periodicity and a corresponding offset for periodic and semi-persistent CSI resources, and for periodic and semi-persistent reporting on PUCCH. both, the periodicity and the offset are given in number of slots. The periodicity value slots4 corresponds to 4 slots, value slots5 corresponds to 5 slots, and so on.

CSI-ResourcePeriodicityAndOffset information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-RESOURCEPERIODICITYANDOFFSET-START

CSI-ResourcePeriodicityAndOffset ::= CHOICE {

slots4 INTEGER (0..3),

slots5 INTEGER (0..4),

slots8 INTEGER (0..7),

slots10 INTEGER (0..9),

slots16 INTEGER (0..15),

slots20 INTEGER (0..19),

slots32 INTEGER (0..31),

slots40 INTEGER (0..39),

slots64 INTEGER (0..63),

slots80 INTEGER (0..79),

slots160 INTEGER (0..159),

slots320 INTEGER (0..319),

slots640 INTEGER (0..639)

}

— TAG-CSI-RESOURCEPERIODICITYANDOFFSET-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-RS-ResourceConfigMobility

The IE CSI-RS-ResourceConfigMobility is used to configure CSI-RS based RRM measurements.

CSI-RS-ResourceConfigMobility information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-RS-RESOURCECONFIGMOBILITY-START

CSI-RS-ResourceConfigMobility ::= SEQUENCE {

subcarrierSpacing SubcarrierSpacing,

csi-RS-CellList-Mobility SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCSI-RS-CellsRRM)) OF CSI-RS-CellMobility,

…,

[[

refServCellIndex ServCellIndex OPTIONAL — Need S

]]

}

CSI-RS-CellMobility ::= SEQUENCE {

cellId PhysCellId,

csi-rs-MeasurementBW SEQUENCE {

nrofPRBs ENUMERATED { size24, size48, size96, size192, size264},

startPRB INTEGER(0..2169)

},

density ENUMERATED {d1,d3} OPTIONAL, — Need R

csi-rs-ResourceList-Mobility SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCSI-RS-ResourcesRRM)) OF CSI-RS-Resource-Mobility

}

CSI-RS-Resource-Mobility ::= SEQUENCE {

csi-RS-Index CSI-RS-Index,

slotConfig CHOICE {

ms4 INTEGER (0..31),

ms5 INTEGER (0..39),

ms10 INTEGER (0..79),

ms20 INTEGER (0..159),

ms40 INTEGER (0..319)

},

associatedSSB SEQUENCE {

ssb-Index SSB-Index,

isQuasiColocated BOOLEAN

} OPTIONAL, — Need R

frequencyDomainAllocation CHOICE {

row1 BIT STRING (SIZE (4)),

row2 BIT STRING (SIZE (12))

},

firstOFDMSymbolInTimeDomain INTEGER (0..13),

sequenceGenerationConfig INTEGER (0..1023),

}

CSI-RS-Index ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofCSI-RS-ResourcesRRM-1)

— TAG-CSI-RS-RESOURCECONFIGMOBILITY-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-RS-CellMobility field descriptions

csi-rs-ResourceList-Mobility

List of CSI-RS resources for mobility. The maximum number of CSI-RS resources that can be configured per measObjectNR depends on the configuration of associatedSSB (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.6.1.3).

density

Frequency domain density for the 1-port CSI-RS for L3 mobility. See TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.

nrofPRBs

Allowed size of the measurement BW in PRBs. See TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.

startPRB

Starting PRB index of the measurement bandwidth. See TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.

CSI-RS-ResourceConfigMobility field descriptions

csi-RS-CellList-Mobility

List of cells for CSI-RS based RRM measurements.

refServCellIndex

Indicates the serving cell providing the timing reference for CSI-RS resources without associatedSSB. The field may be present only if there is at least one CSI-RS resource configured without associatedSSB. If this field is absent, the UE shall use the timing of the PCell for measurements on the CSI-RS resources without associatedSSB. The CSI-RS resources and the serving cell indicated by refServCellIndex for timing reference should be located in the same band.

subcarrierSpacing

Subcarrier spacing of CSI-RS. Only the values 15, 30 kHz or 60 kHz (FR1), and 60 or 120 kHz (FR2) are applicable.

CSI-RS-Resource-Mobility field descriptions

associatedSSB

If this field is present, the UE may base the timing of the CSI-RS resource indicated in CSI-RS-Resource-Mobility on the timing of the cell indicated by the cellId in the CSI-RS-CellMobility. In this case, the UE is not required to monitor that CSI-RS resource if the UE cannot detect the SS/PBCH block indicated by this associatedSSB and cellId. If this field is absent, the UE shall base the timing of the CSI-RS resource indicated in CSI-RS-Resource-Mobility on the timing of the serving cell indicated by refServCellIndex. In this case, the UE is required to measure the CSI-RS resource even if SS/PBCH block(s) with cellId in the CSI-RS-CellMobility are not detected.

CSI-RS resources with and without associatedSSB may be configured in accordance with the rules in TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.6.1.3.

csi-RS-Index

CSI-RS resource index associated to the CSI-RS resource to be measured (and used for reporting).

firstOFDMSymbolInTimeDomain

Time domain allocation within a physical resource block. The field indicates the first OFDM symbol in the PRB used for CSI-RS, see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.5.3. Value 2 is supported only when dmrs-TypeA-Position equals pos3.

frequencyDomainAllocation

Frequency domain allocation within a physical resource block in accordance with TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.5.3 including table 7.4.1.5.2-1. The number of bits that may be set to one depend on the chosen row in that table.

isQuasiColocated

Indicates that the CSI-RS resource is quasi co-located with the associated SS/PBCH block, see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.6.1.3.

sequenceGenerationConfig

Scrambling ID for CSI-RS (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.5.2).

slotConfig

Indicates the CSI-RS periodicity (in milliseconds) and for each periodicity the offset (in number of slots). When subcarrierSpacingCSI-RS is set to kHz15, the maximum offset values for periodicities ms4/ms5/ms10/ms20/ms40 are 3/4/9/19/39 slots. When subcarrierSpacingCSI-RS is set to kHz30, the maximum offset values for periodicities ms4/ms5/ms10/ms20/ms40 are 7/9/19/39/79 slots. When subcarrierSpacingCSI-RS is set to kHz60, the maximum offset values for periodicities ms4/ms5/ms10/ms20/ms40 are 15/19/39/79/159 slots. When subcarrierSpacingCSI-RS is set kHz120, the maximum offset values for periodicities ms4/ms5/ms10/ms20/ms40 are 31/39/79/159/319 slots.

CSI-RS-ResourceMapping

The IE CSI-RS-ResourceMapping is used to configure the resource element mapping of a CSI-RS resource in time- and frequency domain.

CSI-RS-ResourceMapping information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-RS-RESOURCEMAPPING-START

CSI-RS-ResourceMapping ::= SEQUENCE {

frequencyDomainAllocation CHOICE {

row1 BIT STRING (SIZE (4)),

row2 BIT STRING (SIZE (12)),

row4 BIT STRING (SIZE (3)),

other BIT STRING (SIZE (6))

},

nrofPorts ENUMERATED {p1,p2,p4,p8,p12,p16,p24,p32},

firstOFDMSymbolInTimeDomain INTEGER (0..13),

firstOFDMSymbolInTimeDomain2 INTEGER (2..12) OPTIONAL, — Need R

cdm-Type ENUMERATED {noCDM, fd-CDM2, cdm4-FD2-TD2, cdm8-FD2-TD4},

density CHOICE {

dot5 ENUMERATED {evenPRBs, oddPRBs},

one NULL,

three NULL,

spare NULL

},

freqBand CSI-FrequencyOccupation,

}

— TAG-CSI-RS-RESOURCEMAPPING-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-RS-ResourceMapping field descriptions

cdm-Type

CDM type (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.3.1).

density

Density of CSI-RS resource measured in RE/port/PRB (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.5.3).

Values 0.5 (dot5), 1 (one) and 3 (three) are allowed for X=1, values 0.5 (dot5) and 1 (one) are allowed for X=2, 16, 24 and 32, value 1 (one) is allowed for X=4, 8, 12.

For density = 1/2, includes 1-bit indication for RB level comb offset indicating whether odd or even RBs are occupied by CSI-RS.

firstOFDMSymbolInTimeDomain2

Time domain allocation within a physical resource block. See TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.5.3.

firstOFDMSymbolInTimeDomain

Time domain allocation within a physical resource block. The field indicates the first OFDM symbol in the PRB used for CSI-RS. See TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.5.3. Value 2 is supported only when dmrs-TypeA-Position equals pos3.

freqBand

Wideband or partial band CSI-RS, (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.3.1).

frequencyDomainAllocation

Frequency domain allocation within a physical resource block in accordance with TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.5.3. The applicable row number in table 7.4.1.5.3-1 is determined by the frequencyDomainAllocation for rows 1, 2 and 4, and for other rows by matching the values in the column Ports, Density and CDMtype in table 7.4.1.5.3-1 with the values of nrofPorts, cdm-Type and density below and, when more than one row has the 3 values matching, by selecting the row where the column (k bar, l bar) in table 7.4.1.5.3-1 has indexes for k ranging from 0 to 2*n-1 where n is the number of bits set to 1 in frequencyDomainAllocation.

nrofPorts

Number of ports (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.3.1).

CSI-SemiPersistentOnPUSCH-TriggerStateList

The CSI-SemiPersistentOnPUSCH-TriggerStateList IE is used to configure the UE with list of trigger states for semi-persistent reporting of channel state information on L1. See also TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.

CSI-SemiPersistentOnPUSCH-TriggerStateList information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-SEMIPERSISTENTONPUSCHTRIGGERSTATELIST-START

CSI-SemiPersistentOnPUSCH-TriggerStateList ::=

SEQUENCE(SIZE (1..maxNrOfSemiPersistentPUSCH-Triggers)) OF CSI-SemiPersistentOnPUSCH-TriggerState

CSI-SemiPersistentOnPUSCH-TriggerState ::= SEQUENCE {

associatedReportConfigInfo CSI-ReportConfigId,

}

— TAG-CSI-SEMIPERSISTENTONPUSCHTRIGGERSTATELIST-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-SSB-ResourceSet

The IE CSI-SSB-ResourceSet is used to configure one SS/PBCH block resource set which refers to SS/PBCH as indicated in ServingCellConfigCommon.

CSI-SSB-ResourceSet information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-SSB-RESOURCESET-START

CSI-SSB-ResourceSet ::= SEQUENCE {

csi-SSB-ResourceSetId CSI-SSB-ResourceSetId,

csi-SSB-ResourceList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofCSI-SSB-ResourcePerSet)) OF SSB-Index,

}

— TAG-CSI-SSB-RESOURCESET-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CSI-SSB-ResourceSetId

The IE CSI-SSB-ResourceSetId is used to identify one SS/PBCH block resource set.

CSI-SSB-ResourceId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-CSI-SSB-RESOURCESETID-START

CSI-SSB-ResourceSetId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofCSI-SSB-ResourceSets-1)

— TAG-CSI-SSB-RESOURCESETID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

DedicatedNAS-Message

The IE DedicatedNAS-Message is used to transfer UE specific NAS layer information between the 5GC CN and the UE. The RRC layer is transparent for this information.

DedicatedNAS-Message information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-DEDICATED-NAS-MESSAGE-START

DedicatedNAS-Message ::= OCTET STRING

— TAG-DEDICATED-NAS-MESSAGE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

DMRS-DownlinkConfig

The IE DMRS-DownlinkConfig is used to configure downlink demodulation reference signals for PDSCH.

DMRS-DownlinkConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-DMRS-DOWNLINKCONFIG-START

DMRS-DownlinkConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

dmrs-Type ENUMERATED {type2} OPTIONAL, — Need S

dmrs-AdditionalPosition ENUMERATED {pos0, pos1, pos3} OPTIONAL, — Need S

maxLength ENUMERATED {len2} OPTIONAL, — Need S

scramblingID0 INTEGER (0..65535) OPTIONAL, — Need S

scramblingID1 INTEGER (0..65535) OPTIONAL, — Need S

phaseTrackingRS SetupRelease { PTRS-DownlinkConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

}

— TAG-DMRS-DOWNLINKCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

DMRS-DownlinkConfig field descriptions

dmrs-AdditionalPosition

Position for additional DM-RS in DL, see Tables 7.4.1.1.2-3 and 7.4.1.1.2-4 in TS 38.211 [16]. If the field is absent, the UE applies the value pos2. See also clause 7.4.1.1.2 for additional constraints on how the network may set this field depending on the setting of other fields.

dmrs-Type

Selection of the DMRS type to be used for DL (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.1.1). If the field is absent, the UE uses DMRS type 1.

maxLength

The maximum number of OFDM symbols for DL front loaded DMRS. len1 corresponds to value 1. len2 corresponds to value 2. If the field is absent, the UE applies value len1. If set to len2, the UE determines the actual number of DM-RS symbols by the associated DCI. (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.1.2).

phaseTrackingRS

Configures downlink PTRS. If the field is not configured, the UE assumes that downlink PTRS are absent. See TS 38.214 [19] clause 5.1.6.3.

scramblingID0

DL DMRS scrambling initialization (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.1.1). When the field is absent the UE applies the value physCellId configured for this serving cell.

scramblingID1

DL DMRS scrambling initialization (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.1.1). When the field is absent the UE applies the value physCellId configured for this serving cell.

DMRS-UplinkConfig

The IE DMRS-UplinkConfig is used to configure uplink demodulation reference signals for PUSCH.

DMRS-UplinkConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-DMRS-UPLINKCONFIG-START

DMRS-UplinkConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

dmrs-Type ENUMERATED {type2} OPTIONAL, — Need S

dmrs-AdditionalPosition ENUMERATED {pos0, pos1, pos3} OPTIONAL, — Need S

phaseTrackingRS SetupRelease { PTRS-UplinkConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

maxLength ENUMERATED {len2} OPTIONAL, — Need S

transformPrecodingDisabled SEQUENCE {

scramblingID0 INTEGER (0..65535) OPTIONAL, — Need S

scramblingID1 INTEGER (0..65535) OPTIONAL, — Need S

} OPTIONAL, — Need R

transformPrecodingEnabled SEQUENCE {

nPUSCH-Identity INTEGER(0..1007) OPTIONAL, — Need S

sequenceGroupHopping ENUMERATED {disabled} OPTIONAL, — Need S

sequenceHopping ENUMERATED {enabled} OPTIONAL, — Need S

} OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

— TAG-DMRS-UPLINKCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

DMRS-UplinkConfig field descriptions

dmrs-AdditionalPosition

Position for additional DM-RS in UL (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.4.1.1.3). If the field is absent, the UE applies the value pos2. See also clause 6.4.1.1.3 for additional constraints on how the network may set this field depending on the setting of other fields.

dmrs-Type

Selection of the DMRS type to be used for UL (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.4.1.1.3) If the field is absent, the UE uses DMRS type 1.

maxLength

The maximum number of OFDM symbols for UL front loaded DMRS. len1 corresponds to value 1. len2 corresponds to value 2. If the field is absent, the UE applies value len1. If set to len2, the UE determines the actual number of DM-RS symbols by the associated DCI. (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.4.1.1.3).

nPUSCH-Identity

Parameter: N_ID^(PUSCH) for DFT-s-OFDM DMRS. If the value is absent or released, the UE uses the value Physical cell ID (physCellId). See TS 38.211 [16].

phaseTrackingRS

Configures uplink PTRS (see TS 38.211 [16]).

scramblingID0

UL DMRS scrambling initialization for CP-OFDM (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.4.1.1.1.1). When the field is absent the UE applies the value Physical cell ID (physCellId).

scramblingID1

UL DMRS scrambling initialization for CP-OFDM. (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.4.1.1.1.1). When the field is absent the UE applies the value Physical cell ID (physCellId).

sequenceGroupHopping

For DMRS transmission with transform precoder the NW may configure group hopping by the cell-specific parameter groupHoppingEnabledTransformPrecoding in PUSCH-ConfigCommon. In this case, the NW may include this UE specific field to disable group hopping for PUSCH transmission except for Msg3, i.e., to override the configuration in PUSCH-ConfigCommon (see TS 38.211 [16]). If the field is absent, the UE uses the same hopping mode as for Msg3.

sequenceHopping

Determines if sequence hopping is enabled for DMRS transmission with transform precoder for PUSCH transmission other than Msg3 (sequence hopping is always disabled for Msg3). If the field is absent, the UE uses the same hopping mode as for msg3. The network does not configure simultaneous group hopping and sequence hopping. See TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.4.1.1.1.2.

transformPrecodingDisabled

DMRS related parameters for Cyclic Prefix OFDM.

transformPrecodingEnabled

DMRS related parameters for DFT-s-OFDM (Transform Precoding).

– DownlinkConfigCommon

The IE DownlinkConfigCommon provides common downlink parameters of a cell.

DownlinkConfigCommon information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-DOWNLINKCONFIGCOMMON-START

DownlinkConfigCommon ::= SEQUENCE {

frequencyInfoDL FrequencyInfoDL OPTIONAL, — Cond InterFreqHOAndServCellAdd

initialDownlinkBWP BWP-DownlinkCommon OPTIONAL, — Cond ServCellAdd

}

— TAG-DOWNLINKCONFIGCOMMON-STOP

— ASN1STOP

DownlinkConfigCommon field descriptions

frequencyInfoDL

Basic parameters of a downlink carrier and transmission thereon.

initialDownlinkBWP

The initial downlink BWP configuration for a serving cell.The network configures the locationAndBandwidth so that the initial downlink BWP contains the entire CORESET#0 of this serving cell in the frequency domain.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

InterFreqHOAndServCellAdd

This field is mandatory present for inter-frequency handover, and upon serving cell (PSCell/SCell) addition. Otherwise, the field is optionally present, Need M.

ServCellAdd

This field is mandatory present upon serving cell addition (for PSCell and SCell) and upon handover from E-UTRA to NR. It is optionally present, Need M otherwise.

DownlinkConfigCommonSIB

The IE DownlinkConfigCommonSIB provides common downlink parameters of a cell.

DownlinkConfigCommonSIB information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-DOWNLINKCONFIGCOMMONSIB-START

DownlinkConfigCommonSIB ::= SEQUENCE {

frequencyInfoDL FrequencyInfoDL-SIB,

initialDownlinkBWP BWP-DownlinkCommon,

bcch-Config BCCH-Config,

pcch-Config PCCH-Config,

}

BCCH-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

modificationPeriodCoeff ENUMERATED {n2, n4, n8, n16},

}

PCCH-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

defaultPagingCycle PagingCycle,

nAndPagingFrameOffset CHOICE {

oneT NULL,

halfT INTEGER (0..1),

quarterT INTEGER (0..3),

oneEighthT INTEGER (0..7),

oneSixteenthT INTEGER (0..15)

},

ns ENUMERATED {four, two, one},

firstPDCCH-MonitoringOccasionOfPO CHOICE {

sCS15KHZoneT SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..139),

sCS30KHZoneT-SCS15KHZhalfT SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..279),

sCS60KHZoneT-SCS30KHZhalfT-SCS15KHZquarterT SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..559),

sCS120KHZoneT-SCS60KHZhalfT-SCS30KHZquarterT-SCS15KHZoneEighthT SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..1119),

sCS120KHZhalfT-SCS60KHZquarterT-SCS30KHZoneEighthT-SCS15KHZoneSixteenthT

SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..2239),

sCS120KHZquarterT-SCS60KHZoneEighthT-SCS30KHZoneSixteenthT SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..4479),

sCS120KHZoneEighthT-SCS60KHZoneSixteenthT SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..8959),

sCS120KHZoneSixteenthT SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..17919)

} OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

— TAG-DOWNLINKCONFIGCOMMONSIB-STOP

— ASN1STOP

DownlinkConfigCommonSIB field descriptions

frequencyInfoDL-SIB

Basic parameters of a downlink carrier and transmission thereon.

initialDownlinkBWP

The initial downlink BWP configuration for a PCell. The network configures the locationAndBandwidth so that the initial downlink BWP contains the entire CORESET#0 of this serving cell in the frequency domain. The UE applies the locationAndBandwidth upon reception of this field (e.g. to determine the frequency position of signals described in relation to this locationAndBandwidth) but it keeps CORESET#0 until after reception of RRCSetup/RRCResume/RRCReestablishment.

bcch-Config

The modification period related configuration.

pcch-Config

The paging related configuration.

BCCH-Config field descriptions

modificationPeriodCoeff

Actual modification period, expressed in number of radio frames m = modificationPeriodCoeff * defaultPagingCycle, see clause 5.2.2.2.2. n2 corresponds to value 2, n4 corresponds to value 4, and so on.

PCCH-Config field descriptions

defaultPagingCycle

Default paging cycle, used to derive ‘T’ in TS 38.304 [20]. Value rf32 corresponds to 32 radio frames, value rf64 corresponds to 64 radio frames and so on.

firstPDCCH-MonitoringOccasionOfPO

Points out the first PDCCH monitoring occasion for paging of each PO of the PF, see TS 38.304 [20].

nAndPagingFrameOffset

Used to derive the number of total paging frames in T (corresponding to parameter N in TS 38.304 [20]) and paging frame offset (corresponding to parameter PF_offset in TS 38.304 [20]). A value of oneSixteenthT corresponds to T / 16, a value of oneEighthT corresponds to T / 8, and so on.

If pagingSearchSpace is set to zero and if SS/PBCH block and CORESET multiplexing pattern is 2 or 3 (as specified in TS 38.213 [13]):

– for ssb-periodicityServingCell of 5 or 10 ms, N can be set to one of {oneT, halfT, quarterT, oneEighthT, oneSixteenthT}

– for ssb-periodicityServingCell of 20 ms, N can be set to one of {halfT, quarterT, oneEighthT, oneSixteenthT}

– for ssb-periodicityServingCell of 40 ms, N can be set to one of {quarterT, oneEighthT, oneSixteenthT}

– for ssb-periodicityServingCell of 80 ms, N can be set to one of {oneEighthT, oneSixteenthT}

– for ssb-periodicityServingCell of 160 ms, N can be set to oneSixteenthT

If pagingSearchSpace is set to zero and if SS/PBCH block and CORESET multiplexing pattern is 1 (as specified in TS 38.213 [13]), N can be set to one of {halfT, quarterT, oneEighthT, oneSixteenthT}

If pagingSearchSpace is not set to zero, N can be configured to one of {oneT, halfT, quarterT, oneEighthT, oneSixteenthT}

ns

Number of paging occasions per paging frame.

DownlinkPreemption

The IE DownlinkPreemption is used to configure the UE to monitor PDCCH for the INT-RNTI (interruption).

DownlinkPreemption information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-DOWNLINKPREEMPTION-START

DownlinkPreemption ::= SEQUENCE {

int-RNTI RNTI-Value,

timeFrequencySet ENUMERATED {set0, set1},

dci-PayloadSize INTEGER (0..maxINT-DCI-PayloadSize),

int-ConfigurationPerServingCell SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofServingCells)) OF INT-ConfigurationPerServingCell,

}

INT-ConfigurationPerServingCell ::= SEQUENCE {

servingCellId ServCellIndex,

positionInDCI INTEGER (0..maxINT-DCI-PayloadSize-1)

}

— TAG-DOWNLINKPREEMPTION-STOP

— ASN1STOP

DownlinkPreemption field descriptions

dci-PayloadSize

Total length of the DCI payload scrambled with INT-RNTI (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.2).

int-ConfigurationPerServingCell

Indicates (per serving cell) the position of the 14 bit INT values inside the DCI payload (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.2).

int-RNTI

RNTI used for indication pre-emption in DL (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 10).

timeFrequencySet

Set selection for DL-preemption indication (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.2) The set determines how the UE interprets the DL preemption DCI payload.

INT-ConfigurationPerServingCell field descriptions

positionInDCI

Starting position (in number of bit) of the 14 bit INT value applicable for this serving cell (servingCellId) within the DCI payload (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.2). Must be multiples of 14 (bit).

DRB-Identity

The IE DRB-Identity is used to identify a DRB used by a UE.

DRB-Identity information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-DRB-IDENTITY-START

DRB-Identity ::= INTEGER (1..32)

— TAG-DRB-IDENTITY-STOP

— ASN1STOP

DRX-Config

The IE DRX-Config is used to configure DRX related parameters.

DRX-Config information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-DRX-CONFIG-START

DRX-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

drx-onDurationTimer CHOICE {

subMilliSeconds INTEGER (1..31),

milliSeconds ENUMERATED {

ms1, ms2, ms3, ms4, ms5, ms6, ms8, ms10, ms20, ms30, ms40, ms50, ms60,

ms80, ms100, ms200, ms300, ms400, ms500, ms600, ms800, ms1000, ms1200,

ms1600, spare8, spare7, spare6, spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1 }

},

drx-InactivityTimer ENUMERATED {

ms0, ms1, ms2, ms3, ms4, ms5, ms6, ms8, ms10, ms20, ms30, ms40, ms50, ms60, ms80,

ms100, ms200, ms300, ms500, ms750, ms1280, ms1920, ms2560, spare9, spare8,

spare7, spare6, spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1},

drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerDL INTEGER (0..56),

drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerUL INTEGER (0..56),

drx-RetransmissionTimerDL ENUMERATED {

sl0, sl1, sl2, sl4, sl6, sl8, sl16, sl24, sl33, sl40, sl64, sl80, sl96, sl112, sl128,

sl160, sl320, spare15, spare14, spare13, spare12, spare11, spare10, spare9,

spare8, spare7, spare6, spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1},

drx-RetransmissionTimerUL ENUMERATED {

sl0, sl1, sl2, sl4, sl6, sl8, sl16, sl24, sl33, sl40, sl64, sl80, sl96, sl112, sl128,

sl160, sl320, spare15, spare14, spare13, spare12, spare11, spare10, spare9,

spare8, spare7, spare6, spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1 },

drx-LongCycleStartOffset CHOICE {

ms10 INTEGER(0..9),

ms20 INTEGER(0..19),

ms32 INTEGER(0..31),

ms40 INTEGER(0..39),

ms60 INTEGER(0..59),

ms64 INTEGER(0..63),

ms70 INTEGER(0..69),

ms80 INTEGER(0..79),

ms128 INTEGER(0..127),

ms160 INTEGER(0..159),

ms256 INTEGER(0..255),

ms320 INTEGER(0..319),

ms512 INTEGER(0..511),

ms640 INTEGER(0..639),

ms1024 INTEGER(0..1023),

ms1280 INTEGER(0..1279),

ms2048 INTEGER(0..2047),

ms2560 INTEGER(0..2559),

ms5120 INTEGER(0..5119),

ms10240 INTEGER(0..10239)

},

shortDRX SEQUENCE {

drx-ShortCycle ENUMERATED {

ms2, ms3, ms4, ms5, ms6, ms7, ms8, ms10, ms14, ms16, ms20, ms30, ms32,

ms35, ms40, ms64, ms80, ms128, ms160, ms256, ms320, ms512, ms640, spare9,

spare8, spare7, spare6, spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1 },

drx-ShortCycleTimer INTEGER (1..16)

} OPTIONAL, — Need R

drx-SlotOffset INTEGER (0..31)

}

— TAG-DRX-CONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

DRX-Config field descriptions

drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerDL

Value in number of symbols of the BWP where the transport block was received.

drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerUL

Value in number of symbols of the BWP where the transport block was transmitted.

drx-InactivityTimer

Value in multiple integers of 1 ms. ms0 corresponds to 0, ms1 corresponds to 1 ms, ms2 corresponds to 2 ms, and so on.

drx-LongCycleStartOffset

drx-LongCycle in ms and drx-StartOffset in multiples of 1 ms. If drx-ShortCycle is configured, the value of drx-LongCycle shall be a multiple of the drx-ShortCycle value.

drx-onDurationTimer

Value in multiples of 1/32 ms (subMilliSeconds) or in ms (milliSecond). For the latter, value ms1 corresponds to 1 ms, value ms2 corresponds to 2 ms, and so on.

drx-RetransmissionTimerDL

Value in number of slot lengths of the BWP where the transport block was received. value sl0 corresponds to 0 slots, sl1 corresponds to 1 slot, sl2 corresponds to 2 slots, and so on.

drx-RetransmissionTimerUL

Value in number of slot lengths of the BWP where the transport block was transmitted. sl0 corresponds to 0 slots, sl1 corresponds to 1 slot, sl2 corresponds to 2 slots, and so on.

drx-ShortCycleTimer

Value in multiples of drx-ShortCycle. A value of 1 corresponds to drx-ShortCycle, a value of 2 corresponds to 2 * drx-ShortCycle and so on.

drx-ShortCycle

Value in ms. ms1 corresponds to 1 ms, ms2 corresponds to 2 ms, and so on.

drx-SlotOffset

Value in 1/32 ms. Value 0 corresponds to 0 ms, value 1 corresponds to 1/32 ms, value 2 corresponds to 2/32 ms, and so on.

FilterCoefficient

The IE FilterCoefficient specifies the measurement filtering coefficient. Value fc0 corresponds to k = 0, fc1 corresponds to k = 1, and so on.

FilterCoefficient information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-FILTERCOEFFICIENT-START

FilterCoefficient ::= ENUMERATED { fc0, fc1, fc2, fc3, fc4, fc5, fc6, fc7, fc8, fc9, fc11, fc13, fc15, fc17, fc19, spare1, …}

— TAG-FILTERCOEFFICIENT-STOP

— ASN1STOP

FreqBandIndicatorNR

The IE FreqBandIndicatorNR is used to convey an NR frequency band number as defined in TS 38.101-1 [15] and TS 38.101-2 [39].

FreqBandIndicatorNR information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-FREQBANDINDICATORNR-START

FreqBandIndicatorNR ::= INTEGER (1..1024)

— TAG-FREQBANDINDICATORNR-STOP

— ASN1STOP

FrequencyInfoDL

The IE FrequencyInfoDL provides basic parameters of a downlink carrier and transmission thereon.

FrequencyInfoDL information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-FREQUENCYINFODL-START

FrequencyInfoDL ::= SEQUENCE {

absoluteFrequencySSB ARFCN-ValueNR OPTIONAL, — Cond SpCellAdd

frequencyBandList MultiFrequencyBandListNR,

absoluteFrequencyPointA ARFCN-ValueNR,

scs-SpecificCarrierList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxSCSs)) OF SCS-SpecificCarrier,

}

— TAG-FREQUENCYINFODL-STOP

— ASN1STOP

FrequencyInfoDL field descriptions

absoluteFrequencyPointA

Absolute frequency position of the reference resource block (Common RB 0). Its lowest subcarrier is also known as Point A (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 4.4.4.2). Note that the lower edge of the actual carrier is not defined by this field but rather in the scs-SpecificCarrierList.

absoluteFrequencySSB

Frequency of the SSB to be used for this serving cell. SSB related parameters (e.g. SSB index) provided for a serving cell refer to this SSB frequency unless mentioned otherwise. The cell-defining SSB of the PCell is always on the sync raster. Frequencies are considered to be on the sync raster if they are also identifiable with a GSCN value (see TS 38.101-1 [15]). If the field is absent, the SSB related parameters should be absent, e.g. ssb-PositionsInBurst, ssb-periodicityServingCell and subcarrierSpacing in ServingCellConfigCommon IE. If the field is absent, the UE obtains timing reference from the SpCell. This is only supported in case the SCell is in the same frequency band as the SpCell.

frequencyBandList

List containing only one frequency band to which this carrier(s) belongs. Multiple values are not supported.

scs-SpecificCarrierList

A set of carriers for different subcarrier spacings (numerologies). Defined in relation to Point A. The network configures a scs-SpecificCarrier at least for each numerology (SCS) that is used e.g. in a BWP (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 5.3).

Conditional Presence

Explanation

SpCellAdd

The field is mandatory present if this FrequencyInfoDL is for SpCell. Otherwise the field is optionally present, Need S.

– FrequencyInfoDL-SIB

The IE FrequencyInfoDL-SIB provides basic parameters of a downlink carrier and transmission thereon.

FrequencyInfoDL-SIB information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-FREQUENCYINFODL-SIB-START

FrequencyInfoDL-SIB ::= SEQUENCE {

frequencyBandList MultiFrequencyBandListNR-SIB,

offsetToPointA INTEGER (0..2199),

scs-SpecificCarrierList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxSCSs)) OF SCS-SpecificCarrier

}

— TAG-FREQUENCYINFODL-SIB-STOP

— ASN1STOP

FrequencyInfoDL-SIB field descriptions

offsetToPointA

Represents the offset to Point A as defined in TS 38.211 [16], clause 4.4.4.2.

frequencyBandList

List of one or multiple frequency bands to which this carrier(s) belongs.

scs-SpecificCarrierList

A set of carriers for different subcarrier spacings (numerologies). Defined in relation to Point A (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 5.3). The network configures this for all SCSs that are used in DL BWPs in this serving cell.

FrequencyInfoUL

The IE FrequencyInfoUL provides basic parameters of an uplink carrier and transmission thereon.

FrequencyInfoUL information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-FREQUENCYINFOUL-START

FrequencyInfoUL ::= SEQUENCE {

frequencyBandList MultiFrequencyBandListNR OPTIONAL, — Cond FDD-OrSUL

absoluteFrequencyPointA ARFCN-ValueNR OPTIONAL, — Cond FDD-OrSUL

scs-SpecificCarrierList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxSCSs)) OF SCS-SpecificCarrier,

additionalSpectrumEmission AdditionalSpectrumEmission OPTIONAL, — Need S

p-Max P-Max OPTIONAL, — Need S

frequencyShift7p5khz ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL, — Cond FDD-TDD-OrSUL-Optional

}

— TAG-FREQUENCYINFOUL-STOP

— ASN1STOP

FrequencyInfoUL field descriptions

absoluteFrequencyPointA

Absolute frequency of the reference resource block (Common RB 0). Its lowest subcarrier is also known as Point A. Note that the lower edge of the actual carrier is not defined by this field but rather in the scs-SpecificCarrierList (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 4.4.4.2).

additionalSpectrumEmission

The additional spectrum emission requirements to be applied by the UE on this uplink. If the field is absent, the UE uses value 0 for the additionalSpectrumEmission (see TS 38.101-1 [15], table 6.2.3.1-1A, and TS 38.101-2 [39], table 6.2.3.1-2).

frequencyBandList

List containing only one frequency band to which this carrier(s) belongs. Multiple values are not supported.

frequencyShift7p5khz

Enable the NR UL transmission with a 7.5 kHz shift to the LTE raster. If the field is absent, the frequency shift is disabled.

p-Max

Maximum transmit power allowed in this serving cell. The maximum transmit power that the UE may use on this serving cell may be additionally limited by p-NR-FR1 (configured for the cell group) and by p-UE-FR1 (configured total for all serving cells operating on FR1). If absent, the UE applies the maximum power according to TS 38.101-1 [15] in case of an FR1 cell or TS 38.101-2 [39] in case of an FR2 cell. In this release of the specification, if p-Max is present on a carrier frequency in FR2, the UE shall ignore the field and applies the maximum power according to TS 38.101-2 [39]. Value in dBm.

scs-SpecificCarrierList

A set of carriers for different subcarrier spacings (numerologies). Defined in relation to Point A. The network configures a scs-SpecificCarrier at least for each numerology (SCS) that is used e.g. in a BWP (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 5.3).

Conditional Presence

Explanation

FDD-OrSUL

The field is mandatory present if this FrequencyInfoUL is for the paired UL for a DL (defined in a FrequencyInfoDL) or if this FrequencyInfoUL is for a supplementary uplink (SUL). It is absent, Need R, otherwise (if this FrequencyInfoUL is for an unpaired UL (TDD).

FDD-TDD-OrSUL-Optional

The field is optionally present, Need R, if this FrequencyInfoUL is for the paired UL for a DL (defined in a FrequencyInfoDL), or if this FrequencyInfoUL is for an unpaired UL (TDD) in certain bands (as defined in clause 5.4.2.1 of TS 38.101-1 and in clause 5.4.2.1 of TS 38.104 [12]), or if this FrequencyInfoUL is for a supplementary uplink (SUL). It is absent, Need R, otherwise.

– FrequencyInfoUL-SIB

The IE FrequencyInfoUL-SIB provides basic parameters of an uplink carrier and transmission thereon.

FrequencyInfoUL-SIB information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-FREQUENCYINFOUL-SIB-START

FrequencyInfoUL-SIB ::= SEQUENCE {

frequencyBandList MultiFrequencyBandListNR-SIB OPTIONAL, — Cond FDD-OrSUL

absoluteFrequencyPointA ARFCN-ValueNR OPTIONAL, — Cond FDD-OrSUL

scs-SpecificCarrierList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxSCSs)) OF SCS-SpecificCarrier,

p-Max P-Max OPTIONAL, — Need S

frequencyShift7p5khz ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL, — Cond FDD-TDD-OrSUL-Optional

}

— TAG-FREQUENCYINFOUL-SIB-STOP

— ASN1STOP

FrequencyInfoUL-SIB field descriptions

absoluteFrequencyPointA

Absolute frequency of the reference resource block (Common RB 0). Its lowest subcarrier is also known as Point A. Note that the lower edge of the actual carrier is not defined by this field but rather in the scs-SpecificCarrierList (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 4.4.4.2).

frequencyBandList

Provides the frequency band indicator and a list of additionalPmax and additionalSpectrumEmission values as defined in TS 38.101-1 [15], table 6.2.3.1-1, and TS 38.101-2 [39], table 6.2.3.1-2. The UE shall apply the first listed band which it supports in the frequencyBandList field.

frequencyShift7p5khz

Enable the NR UL transmission with a 7.5 kHz shift to the LTE raster. If the field is absent, the frequency shift is disabled.

p-Max

Value in dBm applicable for the cell. If absent the UE applies the maximum power according to TS 38.101-1 [15] in case of an FR1 cell or TS 38.101-2 [39] in case of an FR2 cell. In this release of the specification, if p-Max is present on a carrier frequency in FR2, the UE shall ignore the field and applies the maximum power according to TS 38.101-2 [39].

scs-SpecificCarrierList

A set of carriers for different subcarrier spacings (numerologies). Defined in relation to Point A (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 5.3). The network configures this for all SCSs that are used in UL BWPs configured in this serving cell.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

FDD-OrSUL

The field is mandatory present if this FrequencyInfoUL-SIB is for the paired UL for a DL (defined in a FrequencyInfoDL-SIB) or if this FrequencyInfoUL-SIB is for a supplementary uplink (SUL). It is absent otherwise (if this FrequencyInfoUL-SIB is for an unpaired UL (TDD).

FDD-TDD-OrSUL-Optional

The field is optionally present, Need R, if this FrequencyInfoUL-SIB is for the paired UL for a DL (defined in a FrequencyInfoDL-SIB), or if this FrequencyInfoUL-SIB is for an unpaired UL (TDD) in certain bands (as defined in clause 5.4.2.1 of TS 38.101-1 and in clause 5.4.2.1 of TS 38.104 [12]), or if this FrequencyInfoUL-SIB is for a supplementary uplink (SUL). It is absent otherwise.

Hysteresis

The IE Hysteresis is a parameter used within the entry and leave condition of an event triggered reporting condition. The actual value is field value * 0.5 dB.

Hysteresis information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-HYSTERESIS-START

Hysteresis ::= INTEGER (0..30)

— TAG-HYSTERESIS-STOP

— ASN1STOP

I-RNTI-Value

The IE I-RNTI-Value is used to identify the suspended UE context of a UE in RRC_INACTIVE.

I-RNTI-Value information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-I-RNTI-VALUE-START

I-RNTI-Value ::= BIT STRING (SIZE(40))

— TAG-I-RNTI-VALUE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

LocationMeasurementInfo

The IE LocationMeasurementInfo defines the information sent by the UE to the network to assist with the configuration of measurement gaps for location related measurements.

LocationMeasurementInfo information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-LOCATIONMEASUREMENTINFO-START

LocationMeasurementInfo ::= CHOICE {

eutra-RSTD EUTRA-RSTD-InfoList,

…,

eutra-FineTimingDetection NULL

}

EUTRA-RSTD-InfoList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxInterRAT-RSTD-Freq)) OF EUTRA-RSTD-Info

EUTRA-RSTD-Info ::= SEQUENCE {

carrierFreq ARFCN-ValueEUTRA,

measPRS-Offset INTEGER (0..39),

}

— TAG-LOCATIONMEASUREMENTINFO-STOP

— ASN1STOP

LocationMeasurementInfo field descriptions

carrierFreq

The EARFCN value of the carrier received from upper layers for which the UE needs to perform the inter-RAT RSTD measurements.

measPRS-Offset

Indicates the requested gap offset for performing RSTD measurements towards E-UTRA. It is the smallest subframe offset from the beginning of subframe 0 of SFN=0 of the serving cell of the requested gap for measuring PRS positioning occasions in the carrier frequency carrierFreq for which the UE needs to perform the inter-RAT RSTD measurements. The PRS positioning occasion information is received from upper layers. The value of measPRS-Offset is obtained by mapping the starting subframe of the PRS positioning occasion in the measured cell onto the corresponding subframe in the serving cell and is calculated as the serving cell’s number of subframes from SFN=0 mod 40.

The UE shall take into account any additional time required by the UE to start PRS measurements on the other carrier when it does this mapping for determining the measPRS-Offset.

NOTE: Figure 6.2.2-1 in TS 36.331[10] illustrates the measPRS-Offset field.

LogicalChannelConfig

The IE LogicalChannelConfig is used to configure the logical channel parameters.

LogicalChannelConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-LOGICALCHANNELCONFIG-START

LogicalChannelConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

ul-SpecificParameters SEQUENCE {

priority INTEGER (1..16),

prioritisedBitRate ENUMERATED {kBps0, kBps8, kBps16, kBps32, kBps64, kBps128, kBps256, kBps512,

kBps1024, kBps2048, kBps4096, kBps8192, kBps16384, kBps32768, kBps65536, infinity},

bucketSizeDuration ENUMERATED {ms5, ms10, ms20, ms50, ms100, ms150, ms300, ms500, ms1000,

spare7, spare6, spare5, spare4, spare3,spare2, spare1},

allowedServingCells SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofServingCells-1)) OF ServCellIndex

OPTIONAL, — PDCP-CADuplication

allowedSCS-List SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxSCSs)) OF SubcarrierSpacing OPTIONAL, — Need R

maxPUSCH-Duration ENUMERATED {ms0p02, ms0p04, ms0p0625, ms0p125, ms0p25, ms0p5, spare2, spare1}

OPTIONAL, — Need R

configuredGrantType1Allowed ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL, — Need R

logicalChannelGroup INTEGER (0..maxLCG-ID) OPTIONAL, — Need R

schedulingRequestID SchedulingRequestId OPTIONAL, — Need R

logicalChannelSR-Mask BOOLEAN,

logicalChannelSR-DelayTimerApplied BOOLEAN,

…,

bitRateQueryProhibitTimer ENUMERATED { s0, s0dot4, s0dot8, s1dot6, s3, s6, s12,s30} OPTIONAL — Need R

} OPTIONAL, — Cond UL

}

— TAG-LOGICALCHANNELCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

LogicalChannelConfig field descriptions

allowedSCS-List

If present, UL MAC SDUs from this logical channel can only be mapped to the indicated numerology. Otherwise, UL MAC SDUs from this logical channel can be mapped to any configured numerology. Only the values 15/30/60 kHz (for FR1) and 60/120 kHz (for FR2) are applicable. Corresponds to ‘allowedSCS-List’ as specified in TS 38.321 [3].

allowedServingCells

If present, UL MAC SDUs from this logical channel can only be mapped to the serving cells indicated in this list. Otherwise, UL MAC SDUs from this logical channel can be mapped to any configured serving cell of this cell group. Corresponds to ‘allowedServingCells’ in TS 38.321 [3].

bitRateQueryProhibitTimer

The timer is used for bit rate recommendation query in TS 38.321 [3], in seconds. Value s0 means 0 s, s0dot4 means 0.4 s and so on.

bucketSizeDuration

Value in ms. ms5 corresponds to 5 ms, value ms10 corresponds to 10 ms, and so on.

configuredGrantType1Allowed

If present, or if the capability lcp-Restriction as specified in TS 38.306 [26] is not supported, UL MAC SDUs from this logical channel can be transmitted on a configured grant type 1. Otherwise, UL MAC SDUs from this logical channel cannot be transmitted on a configured grant type 1. Corresponds to ‘configuredGrantType1Allowed’ in TS 38.321 [3].

logicalChannelGroup

ID of the logical channel group, as specified in TS 38.321 [3], which the logical channel belongs to.

logicalChannelSR-Mask

Controls SR triggering when a configured uplink grant of type1 or type2 is configured. true indicates that SR masking is configured for this logical channel as specified in TS 38.321 [3].

logicalChannelSR-DelayTimerApplied

Indicates whether to apply the delay timer for SR transmission for this logical channel. Set to false if logicalChannelSR-DelayTimer is not included in BSR-Config.

maxPUSCH-Duration

If present, UL MAC SDUs from this logical channel can only be transmitted using uplink grants that result in a PUSCH duration shorter than or equal to the duration indicated by this field. Otherwise, UL MAC SDUs from this logical channel can be transmitted using an uplink grant resulting in any PUSCH duration. Corresponds to "maxPUSCH-Duration" in TS 38.321 [3]. The PUSCH duration is calculated based on the same length of all symbols, and the shortest length applies if the symbol lengths are different.

priority

Logical channel priority, as specified in TS 38.321 [3].

prioritisedBitRate

Value in kiloBytes/s. Value kBps0 corresponds to 0 kiloBytes/s, value kBps8 corresponds to 8 kiloBytes/s, value kBps16 corresponds to 16 kiloBytes/s, and so on. For SRBs, the value can only be set to infinity.

schedulingRequestId

If present, it indicates the scheduling request configuration applicable for this logical channel, as specified in TS 38.321 [3].

Conditional Presence

Explanation

PDCP-CADuplication

The field is mandatory present if the DRB/SRB associated with this logical channel is configured with PDCP CA duplication in UL (i.e. the PDCP entity is associated with multiple RLC entities belonging to the same cell group). Otherwise the field is optionally present, need R.

UL

The field is mandatory present for a logical channel with uplink if it serves DRB. It is optionally present, Need R, for a logical channel with uplink if it serves an SRB. Otherwise it is absent.

LogicalChannelIdentity

The IE LogicalChannelIdentity is used to identify one logical channel (LogicalChannelConfig) and the corresponding RLC bearer (RLC-BearerConfig).

LogicalChannelIdentity information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-LOGICALCHANNELIDENTITY-START

LogicalChannelIdentity ::= INTEGER (1..maxLC-ID)

— TAG-LOGICALCHANNELIDENTITY-STOP

— ASN1STOP

MAC-CellGroupConfig

The IE MAC-CellGroupConfig is used to configure MAC parameters for a cell group, including DRX.

MAC-CellGroupConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MAC-CELLGROUPCONFIG-START

MAC-CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drx-Config SetupRelease { DRX-Config } OPTIONAL, — Need M

schedulingRequestConfig SchedulingRequestConfig OPTIONAL, — Need M

bsr-Config BSR-Config OPTIONAL, — Need M

tag-Config TAG-Config OPTIONAL, — Need M

phr-Config SetupRelease { PHR-Config } OPTIONAL, — Need M

skipUplinkTxDynamic BOOLEAN,

…,

[[

csi-Mask BOOLEAN OPTIONAL, — Need M

dataInactivityTimer SetupRelease { DataInactivityTimer } OPTIONAL — Cond MCG-Only

]]

}

DataInactivityTimer ::= ENUMERATED {s1, s2, s3, s5, s7, s10, s15, s20, s40, s50, s60, s80, s100, s120, s150, s180}

— TAG-MAC-CELLGROUPCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

MAC-CellGroupConfig field descriptions

csi-Mask

If set to true, the UE limits CSI reports to the on-duration period of the DRX cycle, see TS 38.321 [3].

dataInactivityTimer

Releases the RRC connection upon data inactivity as specified in clause 5.3.8.5 and in TS 38.321 [3]. Value s1 corresponds to 1 second, value s2 corresponds to 2 seconds, and so on.

drx-Config

Used to configure DRX as specified in TS 38.321 [3].

skipUplinkTxDynamic

If set to true, the UE skips UL transmissions as described in TS 38.321 [3].

Conditional Presence

Explanation

MCG-Only

This field is optionally present, Need M, for the MAC-CellGroupConfig of the MCG. It is absent otherwise.

MeasConfig

The IE MeasConfig specifies measurements to be performed by the UE, and covers intra-frequency, inter-frequency and inter-RAT mobility as well as configuration of measurement gaps.

MeasConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASCONFIG-START

MeasConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

measObjectToRemoveList MeasObjectToRemoveList OPTIONAL, — Need N

measObjectToAddModList MeasObjectToAddModList OPTIONAL, — Need N

reportConfigToRemoveList ReportConfigToRemoveList OPTIONAL, — Need N

reportConfigToAddModList ReportConfigToAddModList OPTIONAL, — Need N

measIdToRemoveList MeasIdToRemoveList OPTIONAL, — Need N

measIdToAddModList MeasIdToAddModList OPTIONAL, — Need N

s-MeasureConfig CHOICE {

ssb-RSRP RSRP-Range,

csi-RSRP RSRP-Range

} OPTIONAL, — Need M

quantityConfig QuantityConfig OPTIONAL, — Need M

measGapConfig MeasGapConfig OPTIONAL, — Need M

measGapSharingConfig MeasGapSharingConfig OPTIONAL, — Need M

}

MeasObjectToRemoveList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofObjectId)) OF MeasObjectId

MeasIdToRemoveList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofMeasId)) OF MeasId

ReportConfigToRemoveList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxReportConfigId)) OF ReportConfigId

— TAG-MEASCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

MeasConfig field descriptions

measGapConfig

Used to setup and release measurement gaps in NR.

measIdToAddModList

List of measurement identities to add and/or modify.

measIdToRemoveList

List of measurement identities to remove.

measObjectToAddModList

List of measurement objects to add and/or modify.

measObjectToRemoveList

List of measurement objects to remove.

reportConfigToAddModList

List of measurement reporting configurations to add and/or modify.

reportConfigToRemoveList

List of measurement reporting configurations to remove.

s-MeasureConfig

Threshold for NR SpCell RSRP measurement controlling when the UE is required to perform measurements on non-serving cells. Choice of ssb-RSRP corresponds to cell RSRP based on SS/PBCH block and choice of csi-RSRP corresponds to cell RSRP of CSI-RS.

measGapSharingConfig

Specifies the measurement gap sharing scheme and controls setup/ release of measurement gap sharing.

MeasGapConfig

The IE MeasGapConfig specifies the measurement gap configuration and controls setup/release of measurement gaps.

MeasGapConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASGAPCONFIG-START

MeasGapConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

gapFR2 SetupRelease { GapConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

…,

[[

gapFR1 SetupRelease { GapConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

gapUE SetupRelease { GapConfig } OPTIONAL — Need M

]]

}

GapConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

gapOffset INTEGER (0..159),

mgl ENUMERATED {ms1dot5, ms3, ms3dot5, ms4, ms5dot5, ms6},

mgrp ENUMERATED {ms20, ms40, ms80, ms160},

mgta ENUMERATED {ms0, ms0dot25, ms0dot5},

…,

[[

refServCellIndicator ENUMERATED {pCell, pSCell, mcg-FR2} OPTIONAL — Cond NEDCorNRDC

]]

}

— TAG-MEASGAPCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

MeasGapConfig field descriptions

gapFR1

Indicates measurement gap configuration that applies to FR1 only. In (NG)EN-DC, gapFR1 cannot be set up by NR RRC (i.e. only LTE RRC can configure FR1 measurement gap). In NE-DC, gapFR1 can only be set up by NR RRC (i.e. LTE RRC cannot configure FR1 gap). In NR-DC, gapFR1 can only be set up in the measConfig associated with MCG. gapFR1 can not be configured together with gapUE. The applicability of the FR1 measurement gap is according to Table 9.1.2-2 and Table 9.1.2-3 in TS 38.133 [14].

gapFR2

Indicates measurement gap configuration applies to FR2 only. In (NG)EN-DC or NE-DC, gapFR2 can only be set up by NR RRC (i.e. LTE RRC cannot configure FR2 gap). In NR-DC, gapFR2 can only be set up in the measConfig associated with MCG. gapFR2 cannot be configured together with gapUE. The applicability of the FR2 measurement gap is according to Table 9.1.2-2 and Table 9.1.2-3 in TS 38.133 [14].

gapUE

Indicates measurement gap configuration that applies to all frequencies (FR1 and FR2). In (NG)EN-DC, gapUE cannot be set up by NR RRC (i.e. only LTE RRC can configure per UE measurement gap). In NE-DC, gapUE can only be set up by NR RRC (i.e. LTE RRC cannot configure per UE gap). In NR-DC, gapUE can only be set up in the measConfig associated with MCG. If gapUE is configured, then neither gapFR1 nor gapFR2 can be configured. The applicability of the per UE measurement gap is according to Table 9.1.2-2 and Table 9.1.2-3 in TS 38.133 [14].

gapOffset

Value gapOffset is the gap offset of the gap pattern with MGRP indicated in the field mgrp. The value range is from 0 to mgrp-1.

mgl

Value mgl is the measurement gap length in ms of the measurement gap. The measurement gap length is according to in Table 9.1.2-1 in TS 38.133 [14]. Value ms1dot5 corresponds to 1.5 ms, ms3 corresponds to 3 ms and so on.

mgrp

Value mgrp is measurement gap repetition period in (ms) of the measurement gap. The measurement gap repetition period is according to Table 9.1.2-1 in TS 38.133 [14].

mgta

Value mgta is the measurement gap timing advance in ms. The applicability of the measurement gap timing advance is according to clause 9.1.2 of TS 38.133 [14]. Value ms0 corresponds to 0 ms, ms0dot25 corresponds to 0.25 ms and ms0dot5 corresponds to 0.5 ms. For FR2, the network only configures 0 ms and 0.25 ms.

refServCellIndicator

Indicates the serving cell whose SFN and subframe are used for gap calculation for this gap pattern. Value pCell corresponds to the PCell, pSCell corresponds to the PSCell, and mcg-FR2 corresponds to a serving cell on FR2 frequency in MCG.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

NEDCorNRDC

This field is mandatory present when configuring gap pattern to UE in NE-DC or NR-DC. In case the gap pattern to UE in NE-DC and NR-DC is already configured, then the field is absent, need M. Otherwise, it is absent.

MeasGapSharingConfig

The IE MeasGapSharingConfig specifies the measurement gap sharing scheme and controls setup/ release of measurement gap sharing.

MeasGapSharingConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASGAPSHARINGCONFIG-START

MeasGapSharingConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

gapSharingFR2 SetupRelease { MeasGapSharingScheme } OPTIONAL, — Need M

…,

[[

gapSharingFR1 SetupRelease { MeasGapSharingScheme } OPTIONAL, –Need M

gapSharingUE SetupRelease { MeasGapSharingScheme } OPTIONAL –Need M

]]

}

MeasGapSharingScheme::= ENUMERATED {scheme00, scheme01, scheme10, scheme11}

— TAG-MEASGAPSHARINGCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

MeasGapSharingConfig field descriptions

gapSharingFR1

Indicates the measurement gap sharing scheme that applies to the gap set for FR1 only. In (NG)EN-DC, gapSharingFR1 cannot be set up by NR RRC (i.e. only LTE RRC can configure FR1 gap sharing). In NE-DC, gapSharingFR1 can only be set up by NR RRC (i.e. LTE RRC cannot configure FR1 gap sharing). In NR-DC, gapSharingFR1 can only be set up in the measConfig associated with MCG. gapSharingFR1 can not be configured together with gapSharingUE. For the applicability of the different gap sharing schemes, see TS 38.133 [14]. Value scheme00 corresponds to scheme "00", value scheme01 corresponds to scheme "01", and so on.

gapSharingFR2

Indicates the measurement gap sharing scheme that applies to the gap set for FR2 only. In (NG)EN-DC or NE-DC, gapSharingFR2 can only be set up by NR RRC (i.e. LTE RRC cannot configure FR2 gap sharing). In NR-DC, gapSharingFR2 can only be set up by MCG in the measConfig associated with MCG. gapSharingFR2 cannot be configured together with gapSharingUE. For applicability of the different gap sharing schemes, see TS 38.133 [14]. Value scheme00 corresponds to scheme "00", value scheme01 corresponds to scheme "01", and so on.

gapSharingUE

Indicates the measurement gap sharing scheme that applies to the gap set per UE. In (NG)EN-DC, gapSharingUE cannot be set up by NR RRC (i.e. only LTE RRC can configure per UE gap sharing). In NE-DC, gapSharingUE can only be set up by NR RRC (i.e. LTE RRC cannot configure per UE gap sharing). In NR-DC, gapSharingUE can only be set up in the measConfig associated with MCG. If gapSharingUE is configured, then neither gapSharingFR1 nor gapSharingFR2 can be configured. For the applicability of the different gap sharing schemes, see TS 38.133 [14]. Value scheme00 corresponds to scheme "00", value scheme01 corresponds to scheme "01", and so on.

MeasId

The IE MeasId is used to identify a measurement configuration, i.e., linking of a measurement object and a reporting configuration.

MeasId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASID-START

MeasId ::= INTEGER (1..maxNrofMeasId)

— TAG-MEASID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

MeasIdToAddModList

The IE MeasIdToAddModList concerns a list of measurement identities to add or modify, with for each entry the measId, the associated measObjectId and the associated reportConfigId.

MeasIdToAddModList information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASIDTOADDMODLIST-START

MeasIdToAddModList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofMeasId)) OF MeasIdToAddMod

MeasIdToAddMod ::= SEQUENCE {

measId MeasId,

measObjectId MeasObjectId,

reportConfigId ReportConfigId

}

— TAG-MEASIDTOADDMODLIST-STOP

— ASN1STOP

– MeasObjectEUTRA

The IE MeasObjectEUTRA specifies information applicable for E‑UTRA cells.

MeasObjectEUTRA information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASOBJECTEUTRA-START

MeasObjectEUTRA::= SEQUENCE {

carrierFreq ARFCN-ValueEUTRA,

allowedMeasBandwidth EUTRA-AllowedMeasBandwidth,

cellsToRemoveListEUTRAN EUTRA-CellIndexList OPTIONAL, — Need N

cellsToAddModListEUTRAN SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellMeasEUTRA)) OF EUTRA-Cell OPTIONAL, — Need N

blackCellsToRemoveListEUTRAN EUTRA-CellIndexList OPTIONAL, — Need N

blackCellsToAddModListEUTRAN SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellMeasEUTRA)) OF EUTRA-BlackCell OPTIONAL, — Need N

eutra-PresenceAntennaPort1 EUTRA-PresenceAntennaPort1,

eutra-Q-OffsetRange EUTRA-Q-OffsetRange OPTIONAL, — Need R

widebandRSRQ-Meas BOOLEAN,

}

EUTRA-CellIndexList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellMeasEUTRA)) OF EUTRA-CellIndex

EUTRA-CellIndex ::= INTEGER (1..maxCellMeasEUTRA)

EUTRA-Cell ::= SEQUENCE {

cellIndexEUTRA EUTRA-CellIndex,

physCellId EUTRA-PhysCellId,

cellIndividualOffset EUTRA-Q-OffsetRange

}

EUTRA-BlackCell ::= SEQUENCE {

cellIndexEUTRA EUTRA-CellIndex,

physCellIdRange EUTRA-PhysCellIdRange

}

— TAG-MEASOBJECTEUTRA-STOP

— ASN1STOP

EUTRAN-BlackCell field descriptions

cellIndexEUTRA

Entry index in the cell list.

physicalCellIdRange

Physical cell identity or a range of physical cell identities.

EUTRAN-Cell field descriptions

physicalCellId

Physical cell identity of a cell in the cell list.

cellIndividualOffset

Cell individual offset applicable to a specific cell. Value dB-24 corresponds to -24 dB, dB-22 corresponds to -22 dB and so on.

MeasObjectEUTRA field descriptions

allowedMeasBandwidth

The maximum allowed measurement bandwidth on a carrier frequency as defined by the parameter Transmission Bandwidth Configuration "NRB" TS 36.104 [33].

blackCellsToAddModListEUTRAN

List of cells to add/ modify in the black list of cells.

blackCellsToRemoveListEUTRAN

List of cells to remove from the black list of cells.

carrierFreq

Identifies E‑UTRA carrier frequency for which this configuration is valid. Network does not configure more than one MeasObjectEUTRA for the same physical frequency, regardless of the E-ARFCN used to indicate this.

cellsToAddModListEUTRAN

List of cells to add/ modify in the cell list.

cellsToRemoveListEUTRAN

List of cells to remove from the cell list.

eutra-PresenceAntennaPort1

When set to true, the UE may assume that at least two cell-specific antenna ports are used in all neighbouring cells.

eutra-Q-OffsetRange

Used to indicate a cell, or frequency specific offset to be applied when evaluating triggering conditions for measurement reporting. The value is in dB. Value dB-24 corresponds to -24 dB, value dB-22 corresponds to -22 dB and so on.

widebandRSRQ-Meas

If set to true, the UE shall, when performing RSRQ measurements, use a wider bandwidth in accordance with TS 36.133 [40]. The network may set the field to true if the measurement bandwidth indicated by allowedMeasBandwidth is 50 resource blocks or larger; otherwise the network sets this field to false.

– MeasObjectId

The IE MeasObjectId used to identify a measurement object configuration.

MeasObjectId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASOBJECTID-START

MeasObjectId ::= INTEGER (1..maxNrofObjectId)

— TAG-MEASOBJECTID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

– MeasObjectNR

The IE MeasObjectNR specifies information applicable for SS/PBCH block(s) intra/inter-frequency measurements and/or CSI-RS intra/inter-frequency measurements.

MeasObjectNR information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASOBJECTNR-START

MeasObjectNR ::= SEQUENCE {

ssbFrequency ARFCN-ValueNR OPTIONAL, — Cond SSBorAssociatedSSB

ssbSubcarrierSpacing SubcarrierSpacing OPTIONAL, — Cond SSBorAssociatedSSB

smtc1 SSB-MTC OPTIONAL, — Cond SSBorAssociatedSSB

smtc2 SSB-MTC2 OPTIONAL, — Cond IntraFreqConnected

refFreqCSI-RS ARFCN-ValueNR OPTIONAL, — Cond CSI-RS

referenceSignalConfig ReferenceSignalConfig,

absThreshSS-BlocksConsolidation ThresholdNR OPTIONAL, — Need R

absThreshCSI-RS-Consolidation ThresholdNR OPTIONAL, — Need R

nrofSS-BlocksToAverage INTEGER (2..maxNrofSS-BlocksToAverage) OPTIONAL, — Need R

nrofCSI-RS-ResourcesToAverage INTEGER (2..maxNrofCSI-RS-ResourcesToAverage) OPTIONAL, — Need R

quantityConfigIndex INTEGER (1..maxNrofQuantityConfig),

offsetMO Q-OffsetRangeList,

cellsToRemoveList PCI-List OPTIONAL, — Need N

cellsToAddModList CellsToAddModList OPTIONAL, — Need N

blackCellsToRemoveList PCI-RangeIndexList OPTIONAL, — Need N

blackCellsToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofPCI-Ranges)) OF PCI-RangeElement OPTIONAL, — Need N

whiteCellsToRemoveList PCI-RangeIndexList OPTIONAL, — Need N

whiteCellsToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofPCI-Ranges)) OF PCI-RangeElement OPTIONAL, — Need N

…,

[[

freqBandIndicatorNR FreqBandIndicatorNR OPTIONAL, — Need R

measCycleSCell ENUMERATED {sf160, sf256, sf320, sf512, sf640, sf1024, sf1280} OPTIONAL — Need R

]]

}

ReferenceSignalConfig::= SEQUENCE {

ssb-ConfigMobility SSB-ConfigMobility OPTIONAL, — Need M

csi-rs-ResourceConfigMobility SetupRelease { CSI-RS-ResourceConfigMobility } OPTIONAL — Need M

}

SSB-ConfigMobility::= SEQUENCE {

ssb-ToMeasure SetupRelease { SSB-ToMeasure } OPTIONAL, — Need M

deriveSSB-IndexFromCell BOOLEAN,

ss-RSSI-Measurement SS-RSSI-Measurement OPTIONAL, — Need M

}

Q-OffsetRangeList ::= SEQUENCE {

rsrpOffsetSSB Q-OffsetRange DEFAULT dB0,

rsrqOffsetSSB Q-OffsetRange DEFAULT dB0,

sinrOffsetSSB Q-OffsetRange DEFAULT dB0,

rsrpOffsetCSI-RS Q-OffsetRange DEFAULT dB0,

rsrqOffsetCSI-RS Q-OffsetRange DEFAULT dB0,

sinrOffsetCSI-RS Q-OffsetRange DEFAULT dB0

}

ThresholdNR ::= SEQUENCE{

thresholdRSRP RSRP-Range OPTIONAL, — Need R

thresholdRSRQ RSRQ-Range OPTIONAL, — Need R

thresholdSINR SINR-Range OPTIONAL — Need R

}

CellsToAddModList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCellMeas)) OF CellsToAddMod

CellsToAddMod ::= SEQUENCE {

physCellId PhysCellId,

cellIndividualOffset Q-OffsetRangeList

}

— TAG-MEASOBJECTNR-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CellsToAddMod field descriptions

cellIndividualOffset

Cell individual offsets applicable to a specific cell.

physCellId

Physical cell identity of a cell in the cell list.

MeasObjectNR field descriptions

absThreshCSI-RS-Consolidation

Absolute threshold for the consolidation of measurement results per CSI-RS resource(s) from L1 filter(s). The field is used for the derivation of cell measurement results as described in 5.5.3.3 and the reporting of beam measurement information per CSI-RS resource as described in 5.5.5.2.

absThreshSS-BlocksConsolidation

Absolute threshold for the consolidation of measurement results per SS/PBCH block(s) from L1 filter(s). The field is used for the derivation of cell measurement results as described in 5.5.3.3 and the reporting of beam measurement information per SS/PBCH block index as described in 5.5.5.2.

blackCellsToAddModList

List of cells to add/modify in the black list of cells. It applies only to SSB resources.

blackCellsToRemoveList

List of cells to remove from the black list of cells.

cellsToAddModList

List of cells to add/modify in the cell list.

cellsToRemoveList

List of cells to remove from the cell list.

freqBandIndicatorNR

The frequency band in which the SSB and/or CSI-RS indicated in this MeasObjectNR are located and according to which the UE shall perform the RRM measurements. This field is always provided when the network configures measurements with this MeasObjectNR.

measCycleSCell

The parameter is used only when an SCell is configured on the frequency indicated by the measObjectNR and is in deactivated state, see TS 38.133 [14]. gNB configures the parameter whenever an SCell is configured on the frequency indicated by the measObjectNR, but the field may also be signalled when an SCell is not configured. Value sf160 corresponds to 160 sub-frames, value sf256 corresponds to 256 sub-frames and so on.

nrofCSInrofCSI-RS-ResourcesToAverage

Indicates the maximum number of measurement results per beam based on CSI-RS resources to be averaged. The same value applies for each detected cell associated with this MeasObjectNR.

nrofSS-BlocksToAverage

Indicates the maximum number of measurement results per beam based on SS/PBCH blocks to be averaged. The same value applies for each detected cell associated with this MeasObject.

offsetMO

Offset values applicable to all measured cells with reference signal(s) indicated in this MeasObjectNR.

quantityConfigIndex

Indicates the n-th element of quantityConfigNR-List provided in MeasConfig.

referenceSignalConfig

RS configuration for SS/PBCH block and CSI-RS.

refFreqCSI-RS

Point A which is used for mapping of CSI-RS to physical resources according to TS 38.211 [16] clause 7.4.1.5.3.

smtc1

Primary measurement timing configuration. (see clause 5.5.2.10).

smtc2

Secondary measurement timing configuration for SS corresponding to this MeasObjectNR with PCI listed in pci-List. For these SS, the periodicity is indicated by periodicity in smtc2 and the timing offset is equal to the offset indicated in periodicityAndOffset modulo periodicity. periodicity in smtc2 can only be set to a value strictly shorter than the periodicity indicated by periodicityAndOffset in smtc1 (e.g. if periodicityAndOffset indicates sf10, periodicity can only be set of sf5, if periodicityAndOffset indicates sf5, smtc2 cannot be configured).

ssbFrequency
Indicates the frequency of the SS associated to this MeasObjectNR.

ssbSubcarrierSpacing

Subcarrier spacing of SSB. Only the values 15 kHz or 30 kHz (FR1), and 120 kHz or 240 kHz (FR2) are applicable.

whiteCellsToAddModList

List of cells to add/modify in the white list of cells. It applies only to SSB resources.

whiteCellsToRemoveList

List of cells to remove from the white list of cells.

ReferenceSignalConfig field descriptions

csi-rs-ResourceConfigMobility

CSI-RS resources to be used for CSI-RS based RRM measurements.

ssb-ConfigMobility

SSB configuration for mobility (nominal SSBs, timing configuration).

SSB-ConfigMobility field descriptions

deriveSSB-IndexFromCell

If this field is set to true, UE assumes SFN and frame boundary alignment across cells on the same frequency carrier as specified in TS 38.133 [14]. Hence, if the UE is configured with a serving cell for which (absoluteFrequencySSB, subcarrierSpacing) in ServingCellConfigCommon is equal to (ssbFrequency, ssbSubcarrierSpacing) in this MeasObjectNR, this field indicates whether the UE can utilize the timing of this serving cell to derive the index of SS block transmitted by neighbour cell. Otherwise, this field indicates whether the UE may use the timing of any detected cell on that target frequency to derive the SSB index of all neighbour cells on that frequency.

ssb-ToMeasure

The set of SS blocks to be measured within the SMTC measurement duration. The first/leftmost bit corresponds to SS/PBCH block index 0, the second bit corresponds to SS/PBCH block index 1, and so on. Value 0 in the bitmap indicates that the corresponding SS/PBCH block is not to be measured while value 1 indicates that the corresponding SS/PBCH block is to be measured (see TS 38.215 [9]). When the field is not configured the UE measures on all SS blocks. Regardless of the value of this field, SS/PBCH blocks outside of the applicable smtc are not to be measured. See TS 38.215 [9] clause 5.1.1.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

CSI-RS

This field is mandatory present if csi-rs-ResourceConfigMobility is configured, otherwise, it is absent.

SSBorAssociatedSSB

This field is mandatory present if ssb-ConfigMobility is configured or associatedSSB is configured in at least one cell. Otherwise, it is absent, Need R.

IntraFreqConnected

This field is optionally present, Need R if the UE is configured with a serving cell for which (absoluteFrequencySSB, subcarrierSpacing) in ServingCellConfigCommon is equal to (ssbFrequency, ssbSubcarrierSpacing) in this MeasObjectNR, otherwise, it is absent.

MeasObjectToAddModList

The IE MeasObjectToAddModList concerns a list of measurement objects to add or modify.

MeasObjectToAddModList information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASOBJECTTOADDMODLIST-START

MeasObjectToAddModList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofObjectId)) OF MeasObjectToAddMod

MeasObjectToAddMod ::= SEQUENCE {

measObjectId MeasObjectId,

measObject CHOICE {

measObjectNR MeasObjectNR,

…,

measObjectEUTRA MeasObjectEUTRA

}

}

— TAG-MEASOBJECTTOADDMODLIST-STOP

— ASN1STOP

– MeasResultCellListSFTD-NR

The IE MeasResultCellListSFTD-NR consists of SFN and radio frame boundary difference between the PCell and an NR cell as specified in TS 38.215 [9] and TS 38.133 [14].

MeasResultCellListSFTD-NR information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASRESULTCELLLISTSFTD-NR-START

MeasResultCellListSFTD-NR ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellSFTD)) OF MeasResultCellSFTD-NR

MeasResultCellSFTD-NR ::= SEQUENCE {

physCellId PhysCellId,

sfn-OffsetResult INTEGER (0..1023),

frameBoundaryOffsetResult INTEGER (-30720..30719),

rsrp-Result RSRP-Range OPTIONAL

}

— TAG-MEASRESULTCELLLISTSFTD-NR-STOP

— ASN1STOP

MeasResultCellSFTD-NR field descriptions

sfn-OffsetResult

Indicates the SFN difference between the PCell and the NR cell as an integer value according to TS 38.215 [9].

frameBoundaryOffsetResult

Indicates the frame boundary difference between the PCell and the NR cell as an integer value according to TS 38.215 [9].

– MeasResultCellListSFTD-EUTRA

The IE MeasResultCellListSFTD-EUTRA consists of SFN and radio frame boundary difference between the PCell and an E-UTRA PSCell.

MeasResultCellListSFTD-EUTRA information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASRESULTCELLLISTSFTD-EUTRA-START

MeasResultCellListSFTD-EUTRA ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellSFTD)) OF MeasResultSFTD-EUTRA

MeasResultSFTD-EUTRA ::= SEQUENCE {

eutra-PhysCellId EUTRA-PhysCellId,

sfn-OffsetResult INTEGER (0..1023),

frameBoundaryOffsetResult INTEGER (-30720..30719),

rsrp-Result RSRP-Range OPTIONAL

}

— TAG-MEASRESULTCELLLISTSFTD-EUTRA-STOP

— ASN1STOP

MeasResultSFTD-EUTRA field descriptions

eutra-PhysCellId

Identifies the physical cell identity of the E-UTRA cell for which the reporting is being performed.

sfn-OffsetResult

Indicates the SFN difference between the PCell and the E-UTRA cell as an integer value according to TS 38.215 [9].

frameBoundaryOffsetResult

Indicates the frame boundary difference between the PCell and the E-UTRA cell as an integer value according to TS 38.215 [9].

MeasResults

The IE MeasResults covers measured results for intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-RAT mobility.

MeasResults information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASRESULTS-START

MeasResults ::= SEQUENCE {

measId MeasId,

measResultServingMOList MeasResultServMOList,

measResultNeighCells CHOICE {

measResultListNR MeasResultListNR,

…,

measResultListEUTRA MeasResultListEUTRA

} OPTIONAL,

…,

[[

measResultServFreqListEUTRA-SCG MeasResultServFreqListEUTRA-SCG OPTIONAL,

measResultServFreqListNR-SCG MeasResultServFreqListNR-SCG OPTIONAL,

measResultSFTD-EUTRA MeasResultSFTD-EUTRA OPTIONAL,

measResultSFTD-NR MeasResultCellSFTD-NR OPTIONAL

]],

[[

measResultCellListSFTD-NR MeasResultCellListSFTD-NR OPTIONAL

]]

}

MeasResultServMOList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofServingCells)) OF MeasResultServMO

MeasResultServMO ::= SEQUENCE {

servCellId ServCellIndex,

measResultServingCell MeasResultNR,

measResultBestNeighCell MeasResultNR OPTIONAL,

}

MeasResultListNR ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellReport)) OF MeasResultNR

MeasResultNR ::= SEQUENCE {

physCellId PhysCellId OPTIONAL,

measResult SEQUENCE {

cellResults SEQUENCE{

resultsSSB-Cell MeasQuantityResults OPTIONAL,

resultsCSI-RS-Cell MeasQuantityResults OPTIONAL

},

rsIndexResults SEQUENCE{

resultsSSB-Indexes ResultsPerSSB-IndexList OPTIONAL,

resultsCSI-RS-Indexes ResultsPerCSI-RS-IndexList OPTIONAL

} OPTIONAL

},

…,

[[

cgi-Info CGI-InfoNR OPTIONAL

]]

}

MeasResultListEUTRA ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellReport)) OF MeasResultEUTRA

MeasResultEUTRA ::= SEQUENCE {

eutra-PhysCellId PhysCellId,

measResult MeasQuantityResultsEUTRA,

cgi-Info CGI-InfoEUTRA OPTIONAL,

}

MultiBandInfoListEUTRA ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxMultiBands)) OF FreqBandIndicatorEUTRA

MeasQuantityResults ::= SEQUENCE {

rsrp RSRP-Range OPTIONAL,

rsrq RSRQ-Range OPTIONAL,

sinr SINR-Range OPTIONAL

}

MeasQuantityResultsEUTRA ::= SEQUENCE {

rsrp RSRP-RangeEUTRA OPTIONAL,

rsrq RSRQ-RangeEUTRA OPTIONAL,

sinr SINR-RangeEUTRA OPTIONAL

}

ResultsPerSSB-IndexList::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofIndexesToReport2)) OF ResultsPerSSB-Index

ResultsPerSSB-Index ::= SEQUENCE {

ssb-Index SSB-Index,

ssb-Results MeasQuantityResults OPTIONAL

}

ResultsPerCSI-RS-IndexList::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofIndexesToReport2)) OF ResultsPerCSI-RS-Index

ResultsPerCSI-RS-Index ::= SEQUENCE {

csi-RS-Index CSI-RS-Index,

csi-RS-Results MeasQuantityResults OPTIONAL

}

MeasResultServFreqListEUTRA-SCG ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofServingCellsEUTRA)) OF MeasResult2EUTRA

MeasResultServFreqListNR-SCG ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofServingCells)) OF MeasResult2NR

— TAG-MEASRESULTS-STOP

— ASN1STOP

MeasResultEUTRA field descriptions

eutra-PhysCellId

Identifies the physical cell identity of the E-UTRA cell for which the reporting is being performed. The UE reports a value in the range 0..503, other values are reserved.

MeasResultNR field descriptions

cellResults

Cell level measurement results.

physCellId

The physical cell identity of the NR cell for which the reporting is being performed.

resultsSSB-Cell

Cell level measurement results based on SS/PBCH related measurements.

resultsSSB-Indexes

Beam level measurement results based on SS/PBCH related measurements.

resultsCSI-RS-Cell

Cell level measurement results based on CSI-RS related measurements.

resultsCSI-RS-Indexes

Beam level measurement results based on CSI-RS related measurements.

rsIndexResults

Beam level measurement results.

MeasResults field descriptions

measId

Identifies the measurement identity for which the reporting is being performed.

measResultCellListSFTD-NR

SFTD measurement results between the PCell and the NR neighbour cell(s) in NR standalone.

measResultEUTRA

Measured results of an E-UTRA cell.

measResultListEUTRA

List of measured results for the maximum number of reported best cells for an E-UTRA measurement identity.

measResultListNR

List of measured results for the maximum number of reported best cells for an NR measurement identity.

measResultNR

Measured results of an NR cell.

measResultServFreqListEUTRA-SCG

Measured results of the E-UTRA SCG serving frequencies: the measurement result of PSCell and each SCell, if any, and of the best neighbouring cell on each E-UTRA SCG serving frequency.

measResultServFreqListNR-SCG

Measured results of the NR SCG serving frequencies: the measurement result of PSCell and each SCell, if any, and of the best neighbouring cell on each NR SCG serving frequency.

measResultServingMOList

Measured results of measured cells with reference signals indicated in the serving cell measurement objects including measurement results of SpCell, configured SCell(s) and best neighbouring cell within measured cells with reference signals indicated in on each serving cell measurement object.

measResultSFTD-EUTRA

SFTD measurement results between the PCell and the E-UTRA PScell in NE-DC.

measResultSFTD-NR

SFTD measurement results between the PCell and the NR PScell in NR-DC.

– MeasResult2EUTRA

The IE MeasResult2EUTRA contains measurements on E-UTRA frequencies.

MeasResult2EUTRA information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASRESULT2EUTRA-START

MeasResult2EUTRA ::= SEQUENCE {

carrierFreq ARFCN-ValueEUTRA,

measResultServingCell MeasResultEUTRA OPTIONAL,

measResultBestNeighCell MeasResultEUTRA OPTIONAL,

}

— TAG-MEASRESULT2EUTRA-STOP

— ASN1STOP

– MeasResult2NR

The IE MeasResult2NR contains measurements on NR frequencies.

MeasResult2NR information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASRESULT2NR-START

MeasResult2NR ::= SEQUENCE {

ssbFrequency ARFCN-ValueNR OPTIONAL,

refFreqCSI-RS ARFCN-ValueNR OPTIONAL,

measResultServingCell MeasResultNR OPTIONAL,

measResultNeighCellListNR MeasResultListNR OPTIONAL,

}

— TAG-MEASRESULT2NR-STOP

— ASN1STOP

– MeasResultSCG-Failure

The IE MeasResultSCG-Failure is used to provide information regarding failures detected by the UE in (NG)EN-DC and NR-DC.

MeasResultSCG-Failure information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASRESULTSCG-FAILURE-START

MeasResultSCG-Failure ::= SEQUENCE {

measResultPerMOList MeasResultList2NR,

}

MeasResultList2NR ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxFreq)) OF MeasResult2NR

— TAG-MEASRESULTSCG-FAILURE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

MeasTriggerQuantityEUTRA

The IE MeasTriggerQuantityEUTRA is used to configure the trigger quantity and reporting range for E-UTRA measurements. The RSRP, RSRQ and SINR ranges correspond to RSRP-Range, RSRQ-Range and RS-SINR-Range in TS 36.331 [10], respectively.

MeasTriggerQuantityEUTRA information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MEASTRIGGERQUANTITYEUTRA-START

MeasTriggerQuantityEUTRA::= CHOICE {

rsrp RSRP-RangeEUTRA,

rsrq RSRQ-RangeEUTRA,

sinr SINR-RangeEUTRA

}

RSRP-RangeEUTRA ::= INTEGER (0..97)

RSRQ-RangeEUTRA ::= INTEGER (0..34)

SINR-RangeEUTRA ::= INTEGER (0..127)

— TAG-MEASTRIGGERQUANTITYEUTRA-STOP

— ASN1STOP

MobilityStateParameters

The IE MobilityStateParameters contains parameters to determine UE mobility state.

MobilityStateParameters information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MOBILITYSTATEPARAMETERS-START

MobilityStateParameters ::= SEQUENCE{

t-Evaluation ENUMERATED {

s30, s60, s120, s180, s240, spare3, spare2, spare1},

t-HystNormal ENUMERATED {

s30, s60, s120, s180, s240, spare3, spare2, spare1},

n-CellChangeMedium INTEGER (1..16),

n-CellChangeHigh INTEGER (1..16)

}

— TAG-MOBILITYSTATEPARAMETERS-STOP

— ASN1STOP

MobilityStateParameters field descriptions

n-CellChangeHigh

The number of cell changes to enter high mobility state. Corresponds to NCR_H in TS 38.304 [20].

n-CellChangeMedium

The number of cell changes to enter medium mobility state. Corresponds to NCR_M in TS 38.304 [20].

t-Evaluation

The duration for evaluating criteria to enter mobility states. Corresponds to TCRmax in TS 38.304 [20]. Value in seconds, s30 corresponds to 30 s and so on.

t-HystNormal

The additional duration for evaluating criteria to enter normal mobility state. Corresponds to TCRmaxHyst in TS 38.304 [20]. Value in seconds, value s30 corresponds to 30 seconds and so on.

MultiFrequencyBandListNR

The IE MultiFrequencyBandListNR is used to configure a list of one or multiple NR frequency bands.

MultiFrequencyBandListNR information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MULTIFREQUENCYBANDLISTNR-START

MultiFrequencyBandListNR ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofMultiBands)) OF FreqBandIndicatorNR

— TAG-MULTIFREQUENCYBANDLISTNR-STOP

— ASN1STOP

MultiFrequencyBandListNR-SIB

The IE MultiFrequencyBandListNR-SIB indicates the list of frequency bands, for which cell (re-)selection parameters are common, and a list of additionalPmax and additionalSpectrumEmission.

MultiFrequencyBandListNR-SIB information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-MULTIFREQUENCYBANDLISTNR-SIB-START

MultiFrequencyBandListNR-SIB ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1.. maxNrofMultiBands)) OF NR-MultiBandInfo

NR-MultiBandInfo ::= SEQUENCE {

freqBandIndicatorNR FreqBandIndicatorNR OPTIONAL, — Cond OptULNotSIB2

nr-NS-PmaxList NR-NS-PmaxList OPTIONAL — Need S

}

— TAG-MULTIFREQUENCYBANDLISTNR-SIB-STOP

— ASN1STOP

NR-MultiBandInfo field descriptions

freqBandIndicatorNR

Provides an NR frequency band number as defined in TS 38.101-1 [15] and TS 38.101-2 [39], table 5.2-1.

nr-NS-PmaxList

Provides a list of additionalPmax and additionalSpectrumEmission values. If the field is absent the UE uses value 0 for the additionalSpectrumEmission (see TS 38.101-1 [15] table 6.2.3.1-1A , and TS 38.101-2 [39], table 6.2.3.1-2).

Conditional Presence

Explanation

OptULNotSIB2

The field is absent for SIB2 and is mandatory present in SIB4 and frequencyInfoDL-SIB. Otherwise, if the field is absent in frequencyInfoUL-SIB in UplinkConfigCommonSIB, the UE will use the frequency band indicated in frequencyInfoDL-SIB in DownlinkConfigCommonSIB.

NextHopChainingCount

The IE NextHopChainingCount is used to update the KgNB key and corresponds to parameter NCC: See TS 33.501 [11].

NextHopChainingCount information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-NEXTHOPCHAININGCOUNT-START

NextHopChainingCount ::= INTEGER (0..7)

— TAG-NEXTHOPCHAININGCOUNT-STOP

— ASN1STOP

NG-5G-S-TMSI

The IE NG-5G-S-TMSI contains a 5G S-Temporary Mobile Subscription Identifier (5G-S-TMSI), a temporary UE identity provided by the 5GC which uniquely identifies the UE within the tracking area, see TS 23.003 [21].

NG-5G-S-TMSI information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-NG-5G-S-TMSI-START

NG-5G-S-TMSI ::= BIT STRING (SIZE (48))

— TAG-NG-5G-S-TMSI-STOP

— ASN1STOP

NR-NS-PmaxList

The IE NR-NS-PmaxList is used to configure a list of additionalPmax and additionalSpectrumEmission, as defined in TS 38.101-1 [15], table 6.2.3.1-1A, and TS 38.101-2 [39], table 6.2.3.1-2, for a given frequency band.

NR-NS-PmaxList information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-NR-NS-PMAXLIST-START

NR-NS-PmaxList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNR-NS-Pmax)) OF NR-NS-PmaxValue

NR-NS-PmaxValue ::= SEQUENCE {

additionalPmax P-Max OPTIONAL, — Need N

additionalSpectrumEmission AdditionalSpectrumEmission

}

— TAG-NR-NS-PMAXLIST-STOP

— ASN1STOP

NZP-CSI-RS-Resource

The IE NZP-CSI-RS-Resource is used to configure Non-Zero-Power (NZP) CSI-RS transmitted in the cell where the IE is included, which the UE may be configured to measure on (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.3.1). A change of configuration between periodic, semi-persistent or aperiodic for an NZP-CSI-RS-Resource is not supported without a release and add.

NZP-CSI-RS-Resource information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-NZP-CSI-RS-RESOURCE-START

NZP-CSI-RS-Resource ::= SEQUENCE {

nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceId NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId,

resourceMapping CSI-RS-ResourceMapping,

powerControlOffset INTEGER (-8..15),

powerControlOffsetSS ENUMERATED{db-3, db0, db3, db6} OPTIONAL, — Need R

scramblingID ScramblingId,

periodicityAndOffset CSI-ResourcePeriodicityAndOffset OPTIONAL, — Cond PeriodicOrSemiPersistent

qcl-InfoPeriodicCSI-RS TCI-StateId OPTIONAL, — Cond Periodic

}

— TAG-NZP-CSI-RS-RESOURCE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

NZP-CSI-RS-Resource field descriptions

periodicityAndOffset

Periodicity and slot offset sl1 corresponds to a periodicity of 1 slot, sl2 to a periodicity of two slots, and so on. The corresponding offset is also given in number of slots (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.3.1). Network always configures the UE with a value for this field for periodic and semi-persistent NZP-CSI-RS-Resource (as indicated in CSI-ResourceConfig).

powerControlOffset

Power offset of PDSCH RE to NZP CSI-RS RE. Value in dB (see TS 38.214 [19], clauses 5.2.2.3.1 and 4.1).

powerControlOffsetSS

Power offset of NZP CSI-RS RE to SSS RE. Value in dB (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.3.1).

qcl-InfoPeriodicCSI-RS

For a target periodic CSI-RS, contains a reference to one TCI-State in TCI-States for providing the QCL source and QCL type. For periodic CSI-RS, the source can be SSB or another periodic-CSI-RS. Refers to the TCI-State which has this value for tci-StateId and is defined in tci-StatesToAddModList in the PDSCH-Config included in the BWP-Downlink corresponding to the serving cell and to the DL BWP to which the resource belongs to (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.3.1).

resourceMapping

OFDM symbol location(s) in a slot and subcarrier occupancy in a PRB of the CSI-RS resource.

scramblingID

Scrambling ID (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.3.1).

Conditional Presence

Explanation

Periodic

The field is optionally present, Need M, for periodic NZP-CSI-RS-Resources (as indicated in CSI-ResourceConfig). The field is absent otherwise.

PeriodicOrSemiPersistent

The field is optionally present, Need M, for periodic and semi-persistent NZP-CSI-RS-Resources (as indicated in CSI-ResourceConfig). The field is absent otherwise.

NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId

The IE NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId is used to identify one NZP-CSI-RS-Resource.

NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-NZP-CSI-RS-RESOURCEID-START

NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofNZP-CSI-RS-Resources-1)

— TAG-NZP-CSI-RS-RESOURCEID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet

The IE NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet is a set of Non-Zero-Power (NZP) CSI-RS resources (their IDs) and set-specific parameters.

NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-NZP-CSI-RS-RESOURCESET-START

NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet ::= SEQUENCE {

nzp-CSI-ResourceSetId NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId,

nzp-CSI-RS-Resources SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofNZP-CSI-RS-ResourcesPerSet)) OF NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId,

repetition ENUMERATED { on, off } OPTIONAL, — Need S

aperiodicTriggeringOffset INTEGER(0..6) OPTIONAL, — Need S

trs-Info ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

— TAG-NZP-CSI-RS-RESOURCESET-STOP

— ASN1STOP

NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet field descriptions

aperiodicTriggeringOffset

Offset X between the slot containing the DCI that triggers a set of aperiodic NZP CSI-RS resources and the slot in which the CSI-RS resource set is transmitted. The value 0 corresponds to 0 slots, value 1 corresponds to 1 slot, value 2 corresponds to 2 slots, value 3 corresponds to 3 slots, value 4 corresponds to 4 slots, value 5 corresponds to 16 slots, value 6 corresponds to 24 slots. When the field is absent the UE applies the value 0.

nzp-CSI-RS-Resources

NZP-CSI-RS-Resources associated with this NZP-CSI-RS resource set (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2). For CSI, there are at most 8 NZP CSI RS resources per resource set.

repetition

Indicates whether repetition is on/off. If the field is set to off or if the field is absent, the UE may not assume that the NZP-CSI-RS resources within the resource set are transmitted with the same downlink spatial domain transmission filter (see TS 38.214 [19], clauses 5.2.2.3.1 and 5.1.6.1.2). It can only be configured for CSI-RS resource sets which are associated with CSI-ReportConfig with report of L1 RSRP or "no report".

trs-Info

Indicates that the antenna port for all NZP-CSI-RS resources in the CSI-RS resource set is same. If the field is absent or released the UE applies the value false (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.2.3.1).

NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId

The IE NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId is used to identify one NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet.

NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-NZP-CSI-RS-RESOURCESETID-START

NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofNZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSets-1)

— TAG-NZP-CSI-RS-RESOURCESETID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

P-Max

The IE P-Max is used to limit the UE’s uplink transmission power on a carrier frequency, in TS 38.101-1 [15] and is used to calculate the parameter Pcompensation defined in TS 38.304 [20].

P-Max information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-P-MAX-START

P-Max ::= INTEGER (-30..33)

— TAG-P-MAX-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PCI-List

The IE PCI-List concerns a list of physical cell identities, which may be used for different purposes.

PCI-List information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PCI-LIST-START

PCI-List ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofCellMeas)) OF PhysCellId

— TAG-PCI-LIST-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PCI-Range

The IE PCI-Range is used to encode either a single or a range of physical cell identities. The range is encoded by using a start value and by indicating the number of consecutive physical cell identities (including start) in the range. For fields comprising multiple occurrences of PCI-Range, the Network may configure overlapping ranges of physical cell identities.

PCI-Range information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PCI-RANGE-START

PCI-Range ::= SEQUENCE {

start PhysCellId,

range ENUMERATED {n4, n8, n12, n16, n24, n32, n48, n64, n84,

n96, n128, n168, n252, n504, n1008,spare1} OPTIONAL — Need S

}

— TAG-PCI-RANGE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PCI-Range field descriptions

range

Indicates the number of physical cell identities in the range (including start). Value n4 corresponds with 4, value n8 corresponds with 8 and so on. The UE shall apply value 1 in case the field is absent, in which case only the physical cell identity value indicated by start applies.

start

Indicates the lowest physical cell identity in the range.

PCI-RangeElement

The IE PCI-RangeElement is used to define a PCI-Range as part of a list (e.g. AddMod list).

PCI-RangeElement information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PCI-RANGEELEMENT-START

PCI-RangeElement ::= SEQUENCE {

pci-RangeIndex PCI-RangeIndex,

pci-Range PCI-Range

}

— TAG-PCI-RANGEELEMENT-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PCI-RangeElement field descriptions

pci-Range

Physical cell identity or a range of physical cell identities.

PCI-RangeIndex

The IE PCI-RangeIndex identifies a physical cell id range, which may be used for different purposes.

PCI-RangeIndex information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PCI-RANGEINDEX-START

PCI-RangeIndex ::= INTEGER (1..maxNrofPCI-Ranges)

— TAG-PCI-RANGEINDEX-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PCI-RangeIndexList

The IE PCI-RangeIndexList concerns a list of indexes of physical cell id ranges, which may be used for different purposes.

PCI-RangeIndexList information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PCI-RANGEINDEXLIST-START

PCI-RangeIndexList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofPCI-Ranges)) OF PCI-RangeIndex

— TAG-PCI-RANGEINDEXLIST-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PDCCH-Config

The IE PDCCH-Config is used to configure UE specific PDCCH parameters such as control resource sets (CORESET), search spaces and additional parameters for acquiring the PDCCH. If this IE is used for the scheduled cell in case of cross carrier scheduling, the fields other than searchSpacesToAddModList and searchSpacesToReleaseList are absent.

PDCCH-Config information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PDCCH-CONFIG-START

PDCCH-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

controlResourceSetToAddModList SEQUENCE(SIZE (1..3)) OF ControlResourceSet OPTIONAL, — Need N

controlResourceSetToReleaseList SEQUENCE(SIZE (1..3)) OF ControlResourceSetId OPTIONAL, — Need N

searchSpacesToAddModList SEQUENCE(SIZE (1..10)) OF SearchSpace OPTIONAL, — Need N

searchSpacesToReleaseList SEQUENCE(SIZE (1..10)) OF SearchSpaceId OPTIONAL, — Need N

downlinkPreemption SetupRelease { DownlinkPreemption } OPTIONAL, — Need M

tpc-PUSCH SetupRelease { PUSCH-TPC-CommandConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

tpc-PUCCH SetupRelease { PUCCH-TPC-CommandConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

tpc-SRS SetupRelease { SRS-TPC-CommandConfig} OPTIONAL, — Need M

}

— TAG-PDCCH-CONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PDCCH-Config field descriptions

controlResourceSetToAddModList

List of UE specifically configured Control Resource Sets (CORESETs) to be used by the UE. The network configures at most as many CORESETs per DL BWP as specified in TS 38.213 [13], clause 10.1. In case network reconfigures control resource set with the same ControlResourceSetId as used for commonControlResourceSet configured via PDCCH-ConfigCommon, the configuration from PDCCH-Config always takes precedence and should not be updated by the UE based on servingCellConfigCommon.

controlResourceSetToReleaseList

List of UE specifically configured Control Resource Sets (CORESETs) to be released by the UE. This field only applies to CORESETs configured by controlResourceSetToAddModList and does not release the field commonControlResourceSet configured by PDCCH-ConfigCommon.

downlinkPreemption

Configuration of downlink preemption indications to be monitored in this cell (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.2).

searchSpacesToAddModList

List of UE specifically configured Search Spaces. The network configures at most 10 Search Spaces per BWP per cell (including UE-specific and common Search Spaces).

tpc-PUCCH

Enable and configure reception of group TPC commands for PUCCH.

tpc-PUSCH

Enable and configure reception of group TPC commands for PUSCH.

tpc-SRS

Enable and configure reception of group TPC commands for SRS.

PDCCH-ConfigCommon

The IE PDCCH-ConfigCommon is used to configure cell specific PDCCH parameters provided in SIB as well as in dedicated signalling.

PDCCH-ConfigCommon information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PDCCH-CONFIGCOMMON-START

PDCCH-ConfigCommon ::= SEQUENCE {

controlResourceSetZero ControlResourceSetZero OPTIONAL, — Cond InitialBWP-Only

commonControlResourceSet ControlResourceSet OPTIONAL, — Need R

searchSpaceZero SearchSpaceZero OPTIONAL, — Cond InitialBWP-Only

commonSearchSpaceList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..4)) OF SearchSpace OPTIONAL, — Need R

searchSpaceSIB1 SearchSpaceId OPTIONAL, — Need S

searchSpaceOtherSystemInformation SearchSpaceId OPTIONAL, — Need S

pagingSearchSpace SearchSpaceId OPTIONAL, — Need S

ra-SearchSpace SearchSpaceId OPTIONAL, — Need S

…,

[[

firstPDCCH-MonitoringOccasionOfPO CHOICE {

sCS15KHZoneT SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..139),

sCS30KHZoneT-SCS15KHZhalfT SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..279),

sCS60KHZoneT-SCS30KHZhalfT-SCS15KHZquarterT SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..559),

sCS120KHZoneT-SCS60KHZhalfT-SCS30KHZquarterT-SCS15KHZoneEighthT SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..1119),

sCS120KHZhalfT-SCS60KHZquarterT-SCS30KHZoneEighthT-SCS15KHZoneSixteenthT SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..2239),

sCS120KHZquarterT-SCS60KHZoneEighthT-SCS30KHZoneSixteenthT SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..4479),

sCS120KHZoneEighthT-SCS60KHZoneSixteenthT SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..8959),

sCS120KHZoneSixteenthT SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPO-perPF)) OF INTEGER (0..17919)

} OPTIONAL — Cond OtherBWP

]]

}

— TAG-PDCCH-CONFIGCOMMON-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PDCCH-ConfigCommon field descriptions

commonControlResourceSet

An additional common control resource set which may be configured and used for any common or UE-specific search space. If the network configures this field, it uses a ControlResourceSetId other than 0 for this ControlResourceSet. The network configures the commonControlResourceSet in SIB1 so that it is contained in the bandwidth of CORESET#0.

commonSearchSpaceList

A list of additional common search spaces. If the network configures this field, it uses the SearchSpaceIds other than 0. If the field is included, it replaces any previous list, i.e. all the entries of the list are replaced and each of the SearchSpace entries is considered to be newly created and the conditions and Need codes for setup of the entry apply.

controlResourceSetZero

Parameters of the common CORESET#0 which can be used in any common or UE-specific search spaces. The values are interpreted like the corresponding bits in MIB pdcch-ConfigSIB1. Even though this field is only configured in the initial BWP (BWP#0) controlResourceSetZero can be used in search spaces configured in other DL BWP(s) than the initial DL BWP if the conditions defined in TS 38.213 [13], clause 10 are satisfied.

firstPDCCH-MonitoringOccasionOfPO

Indicates the first PDCCH monitoring occasion of each PO of the PF on this BWP, see TS 38.304 [20].

pagingSearchSpace

ID of the Search space for paging (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 10.1). If the field is absent, the UE does not receive paging in this BWP (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 10).

ra-SearchSpace

ID of the Search space for random access procedure (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 10.1). If the field is absent, the UE does not receive RAR in this BWP. This field is mandatory present in the DL BWP(s) if the conditions described in TS 38.321 [3], subclause 5.15 are met.

searchSpaceOtherSystemInformation

ID of the Search space for other system information, i.e., SIB2 and beyond (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 10.1) If the field is absent, the UE does not receive other system information in this BWP.

searchSpaceSIB1

ID of the search space for SIB1 message. In the initial DL BWP of the UE′s PCell, the network sets this field to 0. If the field is absent, the UE does not receive SIB1 in this BWP. (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 10)

searchSpaceZero

Parameters of the common SearchSpace#0. The values are interpreted like the corresponding bits in MIB pdcch-ConfigSIB1. Even though this field is only configured in the initial BWP (BWP#0), searchSpaceZero can be used in search spaces configured in other DL BWP(s) than the initial DL BWP if the conditions described in TS 38.213 [13], clause 10, are satisfied.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

InitialBWP-Only

If SIB1 is broadcast the field is mandatory present in the PDCCH-ConfigCommon of the initial BWP (BWP#0) in ServingCellConfigCommon; it is absent in other BWPs and when sent in system information. If SIB1 is not broadcast and there is an SSB associated to the cell, the field is optionally present, Need M, in the PDCCH-ConfigCommon of the initial BWP (BWP#0) in ServingCellConfigCommon (still with the same setting for all UEs). In other cases, the field is absent.

OtherBWP

This field is optionally present, Need R, if this BWP is not the initial DL BWP and pagingSearchSpace is configured in this BWP. Otherwise this field is absent.

PDCCH-ConfigSIB1

The IE PDCCH-ConfigSIB1 is used to configure CORESET#0 and search space#0.

PDCCH-ConfigSIB1 information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PDCCH-CONFIGSIB1-START

PDCCH-ConfigSIB1 ::= SEQUENCE {

controlResourceSetZero ControlResourceSetZero,

searchSpaceZero SearchSpaceZero

}

— TAG-PDCCH-CONFIGSIB1-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PDCCH-ConfigSIB1 field descriptions

controlResourceSetZero

Determines a common ControlResourceSet (CORESET) with ID #0, see TS 38.213 [13], clause 13.

searchSpaceZero

Determines a common search space with ID #0, see TS 38.213 [13], clause 13.

PDCCH-ServingCellConfig

The IE PDCCH-ServingCellConfig is used to configure UE specific PDCCH parameters applicable across all bandwidth parts of a serving cell.

PDCCH-ServingCellConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PDCCH-SERVINGCELLCONFIG-START

PDCCH-ServingCellConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

slotFormatIndicator SetupRelease { SlotFormatIndicator } OPTIONAL, — Need M

}

— TAG-PDCCH-SERVINGCELLCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PDCCH-ServingCellConfig field descriptions

slotFormatIndicator

Configuration of Slot-Format-Indicators to be monitored in the correspondingly configured PDCCHs of this serving cell.

PDCP-Config

The IE PDCP-Config is used to set the configurable PDCP parameters for signalling and data radio bearers.

PDCP-Config information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PDCP-CONFIG-START

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

drb SEQUENCE {

discardTimer ENUMERATED {ms10, ms20, ms30, ms40, ms50, ms60, ms75, ms100, ms150, ms200,

ms250, ms300, ms500, ms750, ms1500, infinity} OPTIONAL, — Cond Setup

pdcp-SN-SizeUL ENUMERATED {len12bits, len18bits} OPTIONAL, — Cond Setup2

pdcp-SN-SizeDL ENUMERATED {len12bits, len18bits} OPTIONAL, — Cond Setup2

headerCompression CHOICE {

notUsed NULL,

rohc SEQUENCE {

maxCID INTEGER (1..16383) DEFAULT 15,

profiles SEQUENCE {

profile0x0001 BOOLEAN,

profile0x0002 BOOLEAN,

profile0x0003 BOOLEAN,

profile0x0004 BOOLEAN,

profile0x0006 BOOLEAN,

profile0x0101 BOOLEAN,

profile0x0102 BOOLEAN,

profile0x0103 BOOLEAN,

profile0x0104 BOOLEAN

},

drb-ContinueROHC ENUMERATED { true } OPTIONAL — Need N

},

uplinkOnlyROHC SEQUENCE {

maxCID INTEGER (1..16383) DEFAULT 15,

profiles SEQUENCE {

profile0x0006 BOOLEAN

},

drb-ContinueROHC ENUMERATED { true } OPTIONAL — Need N

},

},

integrityProtection ENUMERATED { enabled } OPTIONAL, — Cond ConnectedTo5GC1

statusReportRequired ENUMERATED { true } OPTIONAL, — Cond Rlc-AM

outOfOrderDelivery ENUMERATED { true } OPTIONAL — Need R

} OPTIONAL, — Cond DRB

moreThanOneRLC SEQUENCE {

primaryPath SEQUENCE {

cellGroup CellGroupId OPTIONAL, — Need R

logicalChannel LogicalChannelIdentity OPTIONAL — Need R

},

ul-DataSplitThreshold UL-DataSplitThreshold OPTIONAL, — Cond SplitBearer

pdcp-Duplication BOOLEAN OPTIONAL — Need R

} OPTIONAL, — Cond MoreThanOneRLC

t-Reordering ENUMERATED {

ms0, ms1, ms2, ms4, ms5, ms8, ms10, ms15, ms20, ms30, ms40,

ms50, ms60, ms80, ms100, ms120, ms140, ms160, ms180, ms200, ms220,

ms240, ms260, ms280, ms300, ms500, ms750, ms1000, ms1250,

ms1500, ms1750, ms2000, ms2250, ms2500, ms2750,

ms3000, spare28, spare27, spare26, spare25, spare24,

spare23, spare22, spare21, spare20,

spare19, spare18, spare17, spare16, spare15, spare14,

spare13, spare12, spare11, spare10, spare09,

spare08, spare07, spare06, spare05, spare04, spare03,

spare02, spare01 } OPTIONAL, — Need S

…,

[[

cipheringDisabled ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL — Cond ConnectedTo5GC

]]

}

UL-DataSplitThreshold ::= ENUMERATED {

b0, b100, b200, b400, b800, b1600, b3200, b6400, b12800, b25600, b51200, b102400, b204800,

b409600, b819200, b1228800, b1638400, b2457600, b3276800, b4096000, b4915200, b5734400,

b6553600, infinity, spare8, spare7, spare6, spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1}

— TAG-PDCP-CONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PDCP-Config field descriptions

cipheringDisabled

If included, ciphering is disabled for this DRB regardless of which ciphering algorithm is configured for the SRB/DRBs. The field may only be included if the UE is connected to 5GC. Otherwise the field is absent. The network configures all DRBs with the same PDU-session ID with same value for this field. The value for this field cannot be changed after the DRB is set up.

discardTimer

Value in ms of discardTimer specified in TS 38.323 [5]. Value ms10 corresponds to 10 ms, value ms20 corresponds to 20 ms and so on.

drb-ContinueROHC

Indicates whether the PDCP entity continues or resets the ROHC header compression protocol during PDCP re-establishment, as specified in TS 38.323 [5]. This field is configured only in case of resuming an RRC connection or reconfiguration with sync, where the PDCP termination point is not changed and the fullConfig is not indicated.

headerCompression

If rohc is configured, the UE shall apply the configured ROHC profile(s) in both uplink and downlink. If uplinkOnlyROHC is configured, the UE shall apply the configured ROHC profile(s) in uplink (there is no header compression in downlink). ROHC can be configured for any bearer type. The network reconfigures headerCompression only upon reconfiguration involving PDCP re-establishment, and without any drb-ContinueROHC. Network configures headerCompression to notUsed when outOfOrderDelivery is configured.

integrityProtection

Indicates whether or not integrity protection is configured for this radio bearer. The network configures all DRBs with the same PDU-session ID with same value for this field. The value for this field cannot be changed after the DRB is set up.

maxCID

Indicates the value of the MAX_CID parameter as specified in TS 38.323 [5].

The total value of MAX_CIDs across all bearers for the UE should be less than or equal to the value of maxNumberROHC-ContextSessions parameter as indicated by the UE.

moreThanOneRLC

This field configures UL data transmission when more than one RLC entity is associated with the PDCP entity.

outOfOrderDelivery

Indicates whether or not outOfOrderDelivery specified in TS 38.323 [5] is configured. This field should be either always present or always absent, after the radio bearer is established.

pdcp-Duplication

Indicates whether or not uplink duplication status at the time of receiving this IE is configured and activated as specified in TS 38.323 [5]. The presence of this field indicates that duplication is configured. PDCP duplication is not configured for CA packet duplication of LTE RLC bearer. The value of this field, when the field is present, indicates the state of the duplication at the time of receiving this IE. If set to true, duplication is activated. The value of this field is always true, when configured for a SRB.

pdcp-SN-SizeDL

PDCP sequence number size for downlink, 12 or 18 bits, as specified in TS 38.323 [5]. For SRBs only the value len12bits is applicable.

pdcp-SN-SizeUL

PDCP sequence number size for uplink, 12 or 18 bits, as specified in TS 38.323 [5]. For SRBs only the value len12bits is applicable.

primaryPath

Indicates the cell group ID and LCID of the primary RLC entity as specified in TS 38.323 [5], clause 5.2.1 for UL data transmission when more than one RLC entity is associated with the PDCP entity. In this version of the specification, only cell group ID corresponding to MCG is supported for SRBs. The NW indicates cellGroup for split bearers using logical channels in different cell groups. The NW indicates logicalChannel for CA based PDCP duplication, i.e., if both logical channels terminate in the same cell group.

statusReportRequired

For AM DRBs, indicates whether the DRB is configured to send a PDCP status report in the uplink, as specified in TS 38.323 [5].

t-Reordering

Value in ms of t-Reordering specified in TS 38.323 [5]. Value ms0 corresponds to 0 ms, value ms20 corresponds to 20 ms, value ms40 corresponds to 40 ms, and so on. When the field is absent the UE applies the value infinity.

ul-DataSplitThreshold

Parameter specified in TS 38.323 [5]. Value b0 corresponds to 0 bytes, value b100 corresponds to 100 bytes, value b200 corresponds to 200 bytes, and so on. The network sets this field to infinity for UEs not supporting splitDRB-withUL-Both-MCG-SCG. If the field is absent when the split bearer is configured for the radio bearer first time, then the default value infinity is applied.

Conditional presence

Explanation

DRB

This field is mandatory present when the corresponding DRB is being set up, absent for SRBs. Otherwise this field is optionally present, need M.

MoreThanOneRLC

This field is mandatory present upon RRC reconfiguration with setup of a PDCP entity for a radio bearer with more than one associated logical channel and upon RRC reconfiguration with the association of an additional logical channel to the PDCP entity.

Upon RRC reconfiguration when a PDCP entity is associated with multiple logical channels, this field is optionally present need M. Otherwise, this field is absent. Need R.

Rlc-AM

For RLC AM, the field is optionally present, need R. Otherwise, the field is absent.

Setup

The field is mandatory present in case of radio bearer setup. Otherwise the field is optionally present, need M.

SplitBearer

The field is absent for SRBs. Otherwise, the field is optional present, need M, in case of radio bearer with more than one associated RLC mapped to different cell groups.

ConnectedTo5GC

The field is optionally present, need R, if the UE is connected to 5GC. Otherwise the field is absent.

ConnectedTo5GC1

The field is optionally present, need R, if the UE is connected to NR/5GC. Otherwise the field is absent.

Setup2

This field is mandatory present in case for radio bearer setup for RLC-AM and RLC-UM. Otherwise, this field is absent, Need M.

PDSCH-Config

The PDSCH-Config IE is used to configure the UE specific PDSCH parameters.

PDSCH-Config information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PDSCH-CONFIG-START

PDSCH-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

dataScramblingIdentityPDSCH INTEGER (0..1023) OPTIONAL, — Need S

dmrs-DownlinkForPDSCH-MappingTypeA SetupRelease { DMRS-DownlinkConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

dmrs-DownlinkForPDSCH-MappingTypeB SetupRelease { DMRS-DownlinkConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

tci-StatesToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofTCI-States)) OF TCI-State OPTIONAL, — Need N

tci-StatesToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofTCI-States)) OF TCI-StateId OPTIONAL, — Need N

vrb-ToPRB-Interleaver ENUMERATED {n2, n4} OPTIONAL, — Need S

resourceAllocation ENUMERATED { resourceAllocationType0, resourceAllocationType1, dynamicSwitch},

pdsch-TimeDomainAllocationList SetupRelease { PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList } OPTIONAL, — Need M

pdsch-AggregationFactor ENUMERATED { n2, n4, n8 } OPTIONAL, — Need S

rateMatchPatternToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofRateMatchPatterns)) OF RateMatchPattern OPTIONAL, — Need N

rateMatchPatternToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofRateMatchPatterns)) OF RateMatchPatternId OPTIONAL, — Need N

rateMatchPatternGroup1 RateMatchPatternGroup OPTIONAL, — Need R

rateMatchPatternGroup2 RateMatchPatternGroup OPTIONAL, — Need R

rbg-Size ENUMERATED {config1, config2},

mcs-Table ENUMERATED {qam256, qam64LowSE} OPTIONAL, — Need S

maxNrofCodeWordsScheduledByDCI ENUMERATED {n1, n2} OPTIONAL, — Need R

prb-BundlingType CHOICE {

staticBundling SEQUENCE {

bundleSize ENUMERATED { n4, wideband } OPTIONAL — Need S

},

dynamicBundling SEQUENCE {

bundleSizeSet1 ENUMERATED { n4, wideband, n2-wideband, n4-wideband } OPTIONAL, — Need S

bundleSizeSet2 ENUMERATED { n4, wideband } OPTIONAL — Need S

}

},

zp-CSI-RS-ResourceToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofZP-CSI-RS-Resources)) OF ZP-CSI-RS-Resource

OPTIONAL, — Need N

zp-CSI-RS-ResourceToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofZP-CSI-RS-Resources)) OF ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId

OPTIONAL, — Need N

aperiodic-ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetsToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSets)) OF ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet

OPTIONAL, — Need N

aperiodic-ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetsToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSets)) OF ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId

OPTIONAL, — Need N

sp-ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetsToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSets)) OF ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet

OPTIONAL, — Need N

sp-ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetsToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSets)) OF ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId

OPTIONAL, — Need N

p-ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet SetupRelease { ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet }

OPTIONAL, — Need M

}

RateMatchPatternGroup ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofRateMatchPatternsPerGroup)) OF CHOICE {

cellLevel RateMatchPatternId,

bwpLevel RateMatchPatternId

}

— TAG-PDSCH-CONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PDSCH-Config field descriptions

aperiodic-ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetsToAddModList

AddMod/Release lists for configuring aperiodically triggered zero-power CSI-RS resource sets. Each set contains a ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId and the IDs of one or more ZP-CSI-RS-Resources (the actual resources are defined in the zp-CSI-RS-ResourceToAddModList). The network configures the UE with at most 3 aperiodic ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSets and it uses only the ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId 1 to 3. The network triggers a set by indicating its ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId in the DCI payload. The DCI codepoint ’01’ triggers the resource set with ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId 1, the DCI codepoint ’10’ triggers the resource set with ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId 2, and the DCI codepoint ’11’ triggers the resource set with ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId 3 (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.2)

dataScramblingIdentityPDSCH

Identifier used to initialize data scrambling (c_init) for PDSCH. If the field is absent, the UE applies the physical cell ID. (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.3.1.1).

dmrs-DownlinkForPDSCH-MappingTypeA

DMRS configuration for PDSCH transmissions using PDSCH mapping type A (chosen dynamically via PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocation). Only the fields dmrs-Type, dmrs-AdditionalPosition and maxLength may be set differently for mapping type A and B.

dmrs-DownlinkForPDSCH-MappingTypeB

DMRS configuration for PDSCH transmissions using PDSCH mapping type B (chosen dynamically via PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocation). Only the fields dmrs-Type, dmrs-AdditionalPosition and maxLength may be set differently for mapping type A and B.

maxNrofCodeWordsScheduledByDCI

Maximum number of code words that a single DCI may schedule. This changes the number of MCS/RV/NDI bits in the DCI message from 1 to 2.

mcs-Table

Indicates which MCS table the UE shall use for PDSCH. (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.3.1). If the field is absent the UE applies the value 64QAM.

pdsch-AggregationFactor

Number of repetitions for data (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.2.1). When the field is absent the UE applies the value 1.

pdsch-TimeDomainAllocationList

List of time-domain configurations for timing of DL assignment to DL data (see table 5.1.2.1.1-1 in TS 38.214 [19]).

prb-BundlingType

Indicates the PRB bundle type and bundle size(s) (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.2.3). If dynamic is chosen, the actual bundleSizeSet1 or bundleSizeSet2 to use is indicated via DCI. Constraints on bundleSize(Set) setting depending on vrb-ToPRB-Interleaver and rbg-Size settings are described in TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.2.3. If a bundleSize(Set) value is absent, the UE applies the value n2.

p-ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet

A set of periodically occurring ZP-CSI-RS-Resources (the actual resources are defined in the zp-CSI-RS-ResourceToAddModList). The network uses the ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId=0 for this set.

rateMatchPatternGroup1

The IDs of a first group of RateMatchPatterns defined in PDSCH-Config->rateMatchPatternToAddModList (BWP level) or in ServingCellConfig ->rateMatchPatternToAddModList (cell level). These patterns can be activated dynamically by DCI (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.1).

rateMatchPatternGroup2

The IDs of a second group of RateMatchPatterns defined in PDSCH-Config->rateMatchPatternToAddModList (BWP level) or in ServingCellConfig ->rateMatchPatternToAddModList (cell level). These patterns can be activated dynamically by DCI (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.1).

rateMatchPatternToAddModList

Resources patterns which the UE should rate match PDSCH around. The UE rate matches around the union of all resources indicated in the rate match patterns (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.1).

rbg-Size

Selection between config 1 and config 2 for RBG size for PDSCH. The UE ignores this field if resourceAllocation is set to resourceAllocationType1 (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.2.2.1).

resourceAllocation

Configuration of resource allocation type 0 and resource allocation type 1 for non-fallback DCI (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.2.2).

sp-ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetsToAddModList

AddMod/Release lists for configuring semi-persistent zero-power CSI-RS resource sets. Each set contains a ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId and the IDs of one or more ZP-CSI-RS-Resources (the actual resources are defined in the zp-CSI-RS-ResourceToAddModList) (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.2).

tci-StatesToAddModList

A list of Transmission Configuration Indicator (TCI) states indicating a transmission configuration which includes QCL-relationships between the DL RSs in one RS set and the PDSCH DMRS ports (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.5).

vrb-ToPRB-Interleaver

Interleaving unit configurable between 2 and 4 PRBs (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.3.1.6). When the field is absent, the UE performs non-interleaved VRB-to-PRB mapping.

zp-CSI-RS-ResourceToAddModList

A list of Zero-Power (ZP) CSI-RS resources used for PDSCH rate-matching. Each resource in this list may be referred to from only one type of resource set, i.e., aperiodic, semi-persistent or periodic (see TS 38.214 [19]).

PDSCH-ConfigCommon

The IE PDSCH-ConfigCommon is used to configure cell specific PDSCH parameters.

PDSCH-ConfigCommon information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PDSCH-CONFIGCOMMON-START

PDSCH-ConfigCommon ::= SEQUENCE {

pdsch-TimeDomainAllocationList PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

— TAG-PDSCH-CONFIGCOMMON-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PDSCH-ConfigCommon field descriptions

pdsch-TimeDomainAllocationList

List of time-domain configurations for timing of DL assignment to DL data (see table 5.1.2.1.1-1 in TS 38.214 [19]).

PDSCH-ServingCellConfig

The IE PDSCH-ServingCellConfig is used to configure UE specific PDSCH parameters that are common across the UE’s BWPs of one serving cell.

PDSCH-ServingCellConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PDSCH-SERVINGCELLCONFIG-START

PDSCH-ServingCellConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

codeBlockGroupTransmission SetupRelease { PDSCH-CodeBlockGroupTransmission } OPTIONAL, — Need M

xOverhead ENUMERATED { xOh6, xOh12, xOh18 } OPTIONAL, — Need S

nrofHARQ-ProcessesForPDSCH ENUMERATED {n2, n4, n6, n10, n12, n16} OPTIONAL, — Need S

pucch-Cell ServCellIndex OPTIONAL, — Cond SCellAddOnly

…,

[[

maxMIMO-Layers INTEGER (1..8) OPTIONAL, — Need M

processingType2Enabled BOOLEAN OPTIONAL — Need M

]]

}

PDSCH-CodeBlockGroupTransmission ::= SEQUENCE {

maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock ENUMERATED {n2, n4, n6, n8},

codeBlockGroupFlushIndicator BOOLEAN,

}

— TAG-PDSCH-SERVINGCELLCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PDSCH-CodeBlockGroupTransmission field descriptions

codeBlockGroupFlushIndicator

Indicates whether CBGFI for CBG based (re)transmission in DL is enabled (true). (see TS 38.212 [17], clause 7.3.1.2.2).

maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock

Maximum number of code-block-groups (CBGs) per TB. In case of multiple CW, the maximum CBG is 4 (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.1.1).

PDSCH-ServingCellConfig field descriptions

codeBlockGroupTransmission

Enables and configures code-block-group (CBG) based transmission (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.1.1). Network does not configure for a UE both spatial bundling of HARQ ACKs and codeBlockGroupTransmission within the same cell group.

maxMIMO-Layers

Indicates the maximum number of MIMO layers to be used for PDSCH in all BWPs of this serving cell. (see TS 38.212 [17], clause 5.4.2.1).

nrofHARQ-ProcessesForPDSCH

The number of HARQ processes to be used on the PDSCH of a serving cell. Value n2 corresponds to 2 HARQ processes, value n4 to 4 HARQ processes, and so on. If the field is absent, the UE uses 8 HARQ processes (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1).

processingType2Enabled

Enables configuration of advanced processing time capability 2 for PDSCH (see 38.214 [19], clause 5.3).

pucch-Cell

The ID of the serving cell (of the same cell group) to use for PUCCH. If the field is absent, the UE sends the HARQ feedback on the PUCCH of the SpCell of this cell group, or on this serving cell if it is a PUCCH SCell.

xOverhead

Accounts for overhead from CSI-RS, CORESET, etc. If the field is absent, the UE applies value xOh0 (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.3.2).

Conditional Presence

Explanation

SCellAddOnly

It is optionally present, Need S, for (non-PUCCH) SCells when adding a new SCell. The field is absent, Need M, when reconfiguring SCells. The field is also absent for the SpCells as well as for a PUCCH SCell.

PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList

The IE PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocation is used to configure a time domain relation between PDCCH and PDSCH. The PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList contains one or more of such PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocations. The network indicates in the DL assignment which of the configured time domain allocations the UE shall apply for that DL assignment. The UE determines the bit width of the DCI field based on the number of entries in the PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList. Value 0 in the DCI field refers to the first element in this list, value 1 in the DCI field refers to the second element in this list, and so on.

PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PDSCH-TIMEDOMAINRESOURCEALLOCATIONLIST-START

PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofDL-Allocations)) OF PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocation

PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocation ::= SEQUENCE {

k0 INTEGER(0..32) OPTIONAL, — Need S

mappingType ENUMERATED {typeA, typeB},

startSymbolAndLength INTEGER (0..127)

}

— TAG-PDSCH-TIMEDOMAINRESOURCEALLOCATIONLIST-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PDSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocation field descriptions

k0

Slot offset between DCI and its scheduled PDSCH (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.2.1) When the field is absent the UE applies the value 0.

mappingType

PDSCH mapping type. (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.3).

startSymbolAndLength

An index giving valid combinations of start symbol and length (jointly encoded) as start and length indicator (SLIV). The network configures the field so that the allocation does not cross the slot boundary (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.2.1).

PHR-Config

The IE PHR-Config is used to configure parameters for power headroom reporting.

PHR-Config information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PHR-CONFIG-START

PHR-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

phr-PeriodicTimer ENUMERATED {sf10, sf20, sf50, sf100, sf200,sf500, sf1000, infinity},

phr-ProhibitTimer ENUMERATED {sf0, sf10, sf20, sf50, sf100,sf200, sf500, sf1000},

phr-Tx-PowerFactorChange ENUMERATED {dB1, dB3, dB6, infinity},

multiplePHR BOOLEAN,

dummy BOOLEAN,

phr-Type2OtherCell BOOLEAN,

phr-ModeOtherCG ENUMERATED {real, virtual},

}

— TAG-PHR-CONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PHR-Config field descriptions

dummy

This field is not used in this version of the specification and the UE ignores the received value.

multiplePHR

Indicates if power headroom shall be reported using the Single Entry PHR MAC control element or Multiple Entry PHR MAC control element defined in TS 38.321 [3]. True means to use Multiple Entry PHR MAC control element and False means to use the Single Entry PHR MAC control element defined in TS 38.321 [3]. The network configures this field to true for MR-DC and UL CA for NR, and to false in all other cases.

phr-ModeOtherCG

Indicates the mode (i.e. real or virtual) used for the PHR of the activated cells that are part of the other Cell Group (i.e. MCG or SCG), when DC is configured. If the UE is configured with only one cell group (no DC), it ignores the field.

phr-PeriodicTimer

Value in number of subframes for PHR reporting as specified in TS 38.321 [3]. Value sf10 corresponds to 10 subframes, value sf20 corresponds to 20 subframes, and so on.

phr-ProhibitTimer

Value in number of subframes for PHR reporting as specified in TS 38.321 [3]. Value sf0 corresponds to 0 subframe, value sf10 corresponds to 10 subframes, value sf20 corresponds to 20 subframes, and so on.

phr-Tx-PowerFactorChange

Value in dB for PHR reporting as specified in TS 38.321 [3]. Value dB1 corresponds to 1 dB, dB3 corresponds to 3 dB and so on. The same value applies for each serving cell (although the associated functionality is performed independently for each cell).

phr-Type2OtherCell

If set to true, the UE shall report a PHR type 2 for the SpCell of the other MAC entity. See TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.4.6. Network sets this field to false if the UE is not configured with an E-UTRA MAC entity.

PhysCellId

The PhysCellId identifies the physical cell identity (PCI).

PhysCellId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PHYSCELLID-START

PhysCellId ::= INTEGER (0..1007)

— TAG-PHYSCELLID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PhysicalCellGroupConfig

The IE PhysicalCellGroupConfig is used to configure cell-group specific L1 parameters.

PhysicalCellGroupConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PHYSICALCELLGROUPCONFIG-START

PhysicalCellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

harq-ACK-SpatialBundlingPUCCH ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL, — Need S

harq-ACK-SpatialBundlingPUSCH ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL, — Need S

p-NR-FR1 P-Max OPTIONAL, — Need R

pdsch-HARQ-ACK-Codebook ENUMERATED {semiStatic, dynamic},

tpc-SRS-RNTI RNTI-Value OPTIONAL, — Need R

tpc-PUCCH-RNTI RNTI-Value OPTIONAL, — Need R

tpc-PUSCH-RNTI RNTI-Value OPTIONAL, — Need R

sp-CSI-RNTI RNTI-Value OPTIONAL, — Need R

cs-RNTI SetupRelease { RNTI-Value } OPTIONAL, — Need M

…,

[[

mcs-C-RNTI RNTI-Value OPTIONAL, — Need R

p-UE-FR1 P-Max OPTIONAL — Cond MCG-Only

]],

[[

xScale ENUMERATED {dB0, dB6, spare2, spare1} OPTIONAL — Cond SCG-Only

]],

[[

pdcch-BlindDetection SetupRelease { PDCCH-BlindDetection } OPTIONAL — Need M

]]

}

PDCCH-BlindDetection ::= INTEGER (1..15)

— TAG-PHYSICALCELLGROUPCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PhysicalCellGroupConfig field descriptions

cs-RNTI

RNTI value for downlink SPS (see SPS-Config) and uplink configured grant (see ConfiguredGrantConfig).

harq-ACK-SpatialBundlingPUCCH

Enables spatial bundling of HARQ ACKs. It is configured per cell group (i.e. for all the cells within the cell group) for PUCCH reporting of HARQ-ACK. It is only applicable when more than 4 layers are possible to schedule. When the field is absent, the spatial bundling is disabled (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.1.2.1). Network does not configure for a UE both spatial bundling of HARQ ACKs and codeBlockGroupTransmission within the same cell group.

harq-ACK-SpatialBundlingPUSCH

Enables spatial bundling of HARQ ACKs. It is configured per cell group (i.e. for all the cells within the cell group) for PUSCH reporting of HARQ-ACK. It is only applicable when more than 4 layers are possible to schedule. When the field is absent, the spatial bundling is disabled (see TS 38.213 [13], clauses 9.1.2.2 and 9.1.3.2). Network does not configure for a UE both spatial bundling of HARQ ACKs and codeBlockGroupTransmission within the same cell group.

mcs-C-RNTI

RNTI to indicate use of qam64LowSE for grant-based transmissions. When the mcsC-RNTI is configured, RNTI scrambling of DCI CRC is used to choose the corresponding MCS table.

pdcch-BlindDetection

Indicates the reference number of cells for PDCCH blind detection for the CG. Network configures the field for each CG when the UE is in NR DC and sets the value in accordance with the constraints specified in TS 38.213 [13]. The network configures pdcch-BlindDetection only if the UE is in NR-DC.

p-NR-FR1

The maximum total transmit power to be used by the UE in this NR cell group across all serving cells in frequency range 1 (FR1). The maximum transmit power that the UE may use may be additionally limited by p-Max (configured in FrequencyInfoUL) and by p-UE-FR1 (configured total for all serving cells operating on FR1).

p-UE-FR1

The maximum total transmit power to be used by the UE across all serving cells in frequency range 1 (FR1) across all cell groups. The maximum transmit power that the UE may use may be additionally limited by p-Max (configured in FrequencyInfoUL) and by p-NR-FR1 (configured for the cell group).

pdsch-HARQ-ACK-Codebook

The PDSCH HARQ-ACK codebook is either semi-static or dynamic. This is applicable to both CA and none CA operation (see TS 38.213 [13], clauses 9.1.2 and 9.1.3).

sp-CSI-RNTI

RNTI for Semi-Persistent CSI reporting on PUSCH (see CSI-ReportConfig) (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.2.1.5.2). Network always configures the UE with a value for this field when at least one CSI-ReportConfig with reportConfigType set to semiPersistentOnPUSCH is configured.

tpc-PUCCH-RNTI

RNTI used for PUCCH TPC commands on DCI (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 10.1).

tpc-PUSCH-RNTI

RNTI used for PUSCH TPC commands on DCI (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 10.1).

tpc-SRS-RNTI

RNTI used for SRS TPC commands on DCI (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 10.1).

xScale

The UE is allowed to drop NR only if the power scaling applied to NR results in a difference between scaled and unscaled NR UL of more than xScale dB (see TS 38.213 [13]). If the value is not configured for dynamic power sharing, the UE assumes default value of 6 dB.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

MCG-Only

This field is optionally present, Need R, in the PhysicalCellGroupConfig of the MCG. It is absent otherwise.

SCG-Only

This field is optionally present, Need S, in the PhysicalCellGroupConfig of the SCG in (NG)EN-DC as defined in TS 38.213 [13]. It is absent otherwise.

PLMN-Identity

The IE PLMN-Identity identifies a Public Land Mobile Network. Further information regarding how to set the IE is specified in TS 23.003 [21].

PLMN-Identity information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PLMN-IDENTITY-START

PLMN-Identity ::= SEQUENCE {

mcc MCC OPTIONAL, — Cond MCC

mnc MNC

}

MCC ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (3)) OF MCC-MNC-Digit

MNC ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (2..3)) OF MCC-MNC-Digit

MCC-MNC-Digit ::= INTEGER (0..9)

— TAG-PLMN-IDENTITY-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PLMN-Identity field descriptions

mcc

The first element contains the first MCC digit, the second element the second MCC digit and so on. If the field is absent, it takes the same value as the mcc of the immediately preceding IE PLMN-Identity. See TS 23.003 [21].

mnc

The first element contains the first MNC digit, the second element the second MNC digit and so on. See TS 23.003 [21].

Conditional Presence

Explanation

MCC

This field is mandatory present when PLMN-Identity is not used in a list or if it is the first entry of PLMN-Identity in a list. Otherwise it is optionally present, Need S.

PLMN-IdentityInfoList

The IE PLMN-IdentityInfoList includes a list of PLMN identity information.

PLMN-IdentityInfoList information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PLMN-IDENTITYINFOLIST-START

PLMN-IdentityInfoList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPLMN)) OF PLMN-IdentityInfo

PLMN-IdentityInfo ::= SEQUENCE {

plmn-IdentityList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPLMN)) OF PLMN-Identity,

trackingAreaCode TrackingAreaCode OPTIONAL, — Need R

ranac RAN-AreaCode OPTIONAL, — Need R

cellIdentity CellIdentity,

cellReservedForOperatorUse ENUMERATED {reserved, notReserved},

}

— TAG-PLMN-IDENTITYINFOLIST-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PLMN-IdentityInfo field descriptions

cellReservedForOperatorUse

Indicates whether the cell is reserved for operator use (per PLMN), as defined in TS 38.304 [20].

trackingAreaCode

Indicates Tracking Area Code to which the cell indicated by cellIdentity field belongs. The absence of the field indicates that the cell only supports PSCell/SCell functionality (per PLMN).

PRB-Id

The IE PRB-Id identifies a Physical Resource Block (PRB) position within a carrier.

PRB-Id information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PRB-ID-START

PRB-Id ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofPhysicalResourceBlocks-1)

— TAG-PRB-ID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PTRS-DownlinkConfig

The IE PTRS-DownlinkConfig is used to configure downlink phase tracking reference signals (PTRS) (see TS 38.214 [19] clause 5.1.6.3)

PTRS-DownlinkConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PTRS-DOWNLINKCONFIG-START

PTRS-DownlinkConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

frequencyDensity SEQUENCE (SIZE (2)) OF INTEGER (1..276) OPTIONAL, — Need S

timeDensity SEQUENCE (SIZE (3)) OF INTEGER (0..29) OPTIONAL, — Need S

epre-Ratio INTEGER (0..3) OPTIONAL, — Need S

resourceElementOffset ENUMERATED { offset01, offset10, offset11 } OPTIONAL, — Need S

}

— TAG-PTRS-DOWNLINKCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PTRS-DownlinkConfig field descriptions

epre-Ratio

EPRE ratio between PTRS and PDSCH. Value 0 corresponds to the codepoint "00" in table 4.1-2. Value 1 corresponds to codepoint "01", and so on. If the field is not provided, the UE applies value 0 (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 4.1).

frequencyDensity

Presence and frequency density of DL PT-RS as a function of Scheduled BW. If the field is absent, the UE uses K_PT-RS = 2 (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.6.3, table 5.1.6.3-2).

resourceElementOffset

Indicates the subcarrier offset for DL PTRS. If the field is absent, the UE applies the value offset00 (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.2.2).

timeDensity

Presence and time density of DL PT-RS as a function of MCS. The value 29 is only applicable for MCS Table 5.1.3.1-1 (TS 38.214 [19]). If the field is absent, the UE uses L_PT-RS = 1 (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.6.3, table 5.1.6.3-1).

PTRS-UplinkConfig

The IE PTRS-UplinkConfig is used to configure uplink Phase-Tracking-Reference-Signals (PTRS).

PTRS-UplinkConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PTRS-UPLINKCONFIG-START

PTRS-UplinkConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

transformPrecoderDisabled SEQUENCE {

frequencyDensity SEQUENCE (SIZE (2)) OF INTEGER (1..276) OPTIONAL, — Need S

timeDensity SEQUENCE (SIZE (3)) OF INTEGER (0..29) OPTIONAL, — Need S

maxNrofPorts ENUMERATED {n1, n2},

resourceElementOffset ENUMERATED {offset01, offset10, offset11 } OPTIONAL, — Need S

ptrs-Power ENUMERATED {p00, p01, p10, p11}

} OPTIONAL, — Need R

transformPrecoderEnabled SEQUENCE {

sampleDensity SEQUENCE (SIZE (5)) OF INTEGER (1..276),

timeDensityTransformPrecoding ENUMERATED {d2} OPTIONAL — Need S

} OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

— TAG-PTRS-UPLINKCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PTRS-UplinkConfig field descriptions

frequencyDensity

Presence and frequency density of UL PT-RS for CP-OFDM waveform as a function of scheduled BW If the field is absent, the UE uses K_PT-RS = 2 (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1).

maxNrofPorts

The maximum number of UL PTRS ports for CP-OFDM (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.3.1).

ptrs-Power

UL PTRS power boosting factor per PTRS port (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1, table 6.2.3.1.3).

resourceElementOffset

Indicates the subcarrier offset for UL PTRS for CP-OFDM. If the field is absent, the UE applies the value offset00 (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.4.1.2.2).

sampleDensity

Sample density of PT-RS for DFT-s-OFDM, pre-DFT, indicating a set of thresholds T={NRBn, n=0,1,2,3,4}, that indicates dependency between presence of PT-RS and scheduled BW and the values of X and K the UE should use depending on the scheduled BW, see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1, table 6.2.3.2-1.

timeDensity

Presence and time density of UL PT-RS for CP-OFDM waveform as a function of MCS If the field is absent, the UE uses L_PT-RS = 1 (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1).

timeDensityTransformPrecoding

Time density (OFDM symbol level) of PT-RS for DFT-s-OFDM. If the field is absent, the UE applies value d1 (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1).

transformPrecoderDisabled

Configuration of UL PTRS without transform precoder (with CP-OFDM).

transformPrecoderEnabled

Configuration of UL PTRS with transform precoder (DFT-S-OFDM).

PUCCH-Config

The IE PUCCH-Config is used to configure UE specific PUCCH parameters (per BWP).

PUCCH-Config information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PUCCH-CONFIG-START

PUCCH-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

resourceSetToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofPUCCH-ResourceSets)) OF PUCCH-ResourceSet OPTIONAL, — Need N

resourceSetToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofPUCCH-ResourceSets)) OF PUCCH-ResourceSetId OPTIONAL, — Need N

resourceToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofPUCCH-Resources)) OF PUCCH-Resource OPTIONAL, — Need N

resourceToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofPUCCH-Resources)) OF PUCCH-ResourceId OPTIONAL, — Need N

format1 SetupRelease { PUCCH-FormatConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

format2 SetupRelease { PUCCH-FormatConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

format3 SetupRelease { PUCCH-FormatConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

format4 SetupRelease { PUCCH-FormatConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

schedulingRequestResourceToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSR-Resources)) OF SchedulingRequestResourceConfig

OPTIONAL, — Need N

schedulingRequestResourceToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSR-Resources)) OF SchedulingRequestResourceId

OPTIONAL, — Need N

multi-CSI-PUCCH-ResourceList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..2)) OF PUCCH-ResourceId OPTIONAL, — Need M

dl-DataToUL-ACK SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..8)) OF INTEGER (0..15) OPTIONAL, — Need M

spatialRelationInfoToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSpatialRelationInfos)) OF PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo

OPTIONAL, — Need N

spatialRelationInfoToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSpatialRelationInfos)) OF PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfoId

OPTIONAL, — Need N

pucch-PowerControl PUCCH-PowerControl OPTIONAL, — Need M

}

PUCCH-FormatConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

interslotFrequencyHopping ENUMERATED {enabled} OPTIONAL, — Need R

additionalDMRS ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL, — Need R

maxCodeRate PUCCH-MaxCodeRate OPTIONAL, — Need R

nrofSlots ENUMERATED {n2,n4,n8} OPTIONAL, — Need S

pi2BPSK ENUMERATED {enabled} OPTIONAL, — Need R

simultaneousHARQ-ACK-CSI ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL — Need R

}

PUCCH-MaxCodeRate ::= ENUMERATED {zeroDot08, zeroDot15, zeroDot25, zeroDot35, zeroDot45, zeroDot60, zeroDot80}

— A set with one or more PUCCH resources

PUCCH-ResourceSet ::= SEQUENCE {

pucch-ResourceSetId PUCCH-ResourceSetId,

resourceList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofPUCCH-ResourcesPerSet)) OF PUCCH-ResourceId,

maxPayloadSize INTEGER (4..256) OPTIONAL — Need R

}

PUCCH-ResourceSetId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofPUCCH-ResourceSets-1)

PUCCH-Resource ::= SEQUENCE {

pucch-ResourceId PUCCH-ResourceId,

startingPRB PRB-Id,

intraSlotFrequencyHopping ENUMERATED { enabled } OPTIONAL, — Need R

secondHopPRB PRB-Id OPTIONAL, — Need R

format CHOICE {

format0 PUCCH-format0,

format1 PUCCH-format1,

format2 PUCCH-format2,

format3 PUCCH-format3,

format4 PUCCH-format4

}

}

PUCCH-ResourceId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofPUCCH-Resources-1)

PUCCH-format0 ::= SEQUENCE {

initialCyclicShift INTEGER(0..11),

nrofSymbols INTEGER (1..2),

startingSymbolIndex INTEGER(0..13)

}

PUCCH-format1 ::= SEQUENCE {

initialCyclicShift INTEGER(0..11),

nrofSymbols INTEGER (4..14),

startingSymbolIndex INTEGER(0..10),

timeDomainOCC INTEGER(0..6)

}

PUCCH-format2 ::= SEQUENCE {

nrofPRBs INTEGER (1..16),

nrofSymbols INTEGER (1..2),

startingSymbolIndex INTEGER(0..13)

}

PUCCH-format3 ::= SEQUENCE {

nrofPRBs INTEGER (1..16),

nrofSymbols INTEGER (4..14),

startingSymbolIndex INTEGER(0..10)

}

PUCCH-format4 ::= SEQUENCE {

nrofSymbols INTEGER (4..14),

occ-Length ENUMERATED {n2,n4},

occ-Index ENUMERATED {n0,n1,n2,n3},

startingSymbolIndex INTEGER(0..10)

}

— TAG-PUCCH-CONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PUCCH-Config field descriptions

dl-DataToUL-ACK

List of timing for given PDSCH to the DL ACK (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.1.2).

format1

Parameters that are common for all PUCCH resources of format 1.

format2

Parameters that are common for all PUCCH resources of format 2.

format3

Parameters that are common for all PUCCH resources of format 3.

format4.

Parameters that are common for all PUCCH resources of format 4

resourceSetToAddModList, resourceSetToReleaseList

Lists for adding and releasing PUCCH resource sets (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2).

resourceToAddModList, resourceToReleaseList

Lists for adding and releasing PUCCH resources applicable for the UL BWP and serving cell in which the PUCCH-Config is defined. The resources defined herein are referred to from other parts of the configuration to determine which resource the UE shall use for which report.

spatialRelationInfoToAddModList

Configuration of the spatial relation between a reference RS and PUCCH. Reference RS can be SSB/CSI-RS/SRS. If the list has more than one element, MAC-CE selects a single element (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.18.8 and TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.2).

PUCCH-format3 field descriptions

nrofPRBs

The supported values are 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,12,15 and 16.

PUCCH-FormatConfig field descriptions

additionalDMRS

If the field is present, the UE enables 2 DMRS symbols per hop of a PUCCH Format 3 or 4 if both hops are more than X symbols when FH is enabled (X=4). And it enables 4 DMRS symbols for a PUCCH Format 3 or 4 with more than 2X+1 symbols when FH is disabled (X=4). The field is not applicable for format 1 and 2. See TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.2.

interslotFrequencyHopping

If the field is present, the UE enables inter-slot frequency hopping when PUCCH Format 1, 3 or 4 is repeated over multiple slots. For long PUCCH over multiple slots, the intra and inter slot frequency hopping cannot be enabled at the same time for a UE. The field is not applicable for format 2. See TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.6.

maxCodeRate

Max coding rate to determine how to feedback UCI on PUCCH for format 2, 3 or 4. The field is not applicable for format 1. See TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.5.

nrofSlots

Number of slots with the same PUCCH F1, F3 or F4. When the field is absent the UE applies the value n1. The field is not applicable for format 2. See TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.6.

pi2BPSK

If the field is present, the UE uses pi/2 BPSK for UCI symbols instead of QPSK for PUCCH. The field is not applicable for format 1 and 2. See TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.5.

simultaneousHARQ-ACK-CSI

If the field is present, the UE uses simultaneous transmission of CSI and HARQ-ACK feedback with or without SR with PUCCH Format 2, 3 or 4. See TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.5. When the field is absent the UE applies the value off. The field is not applicable for format 1.

PUCCH-Resource field descriptions

format

Selection of the PUCCH format (format 0 – 4) and format-specific parameters, see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2. format0 and format1 are only allowed for a resource in a first PUCCH resource set. format2, format3 and format4 are only allowed for a resource in non-first PUCCH resource set.

intraSlotFrequencyHopping

Enabling intra-slot frequency hopping, applicable for all types of PUCCH formats. For long PUCCH over multiple slots, the intra and inter slot frequency hopping cannot be enabled at the same time for a UE. See TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.1.

pucch-ResourceId

Identifier of the PUCCH resource.

secondHopPRB

Index of first PRB after frequency hopping of PUCCH. This value is applicable for intra-slot frequency hopping (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.1) or inter-slot frequency hopping (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.6).

PUCCH-ResourceSet field descriptions

maxPayloadSize

Maximum number of UCI information bits that the UE may transmit using this PUCCH resource set (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.1). In a PUCCH occurrence, the UE chooses the first of its PUCCH-ResourceSet which supports the number of bits that the UE wants to transmit. The field is absent in the first set (Set0) and in the last configured set since the UE derives the maximum number of UCI information bits as specified in TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.1. This field can take integer values that are multiples of 4.

resourceList

PUCCH resources of format0 and format1 are only allowed in the first PUCCH resource set, i.e., in a PUCCH-ResourceSet with pucch-ResourceSetId = 0. This set may contain between 1 and 32 resources. PUCCH resources of format2, format3 and format4 are only allowed in a PUCCH-ResourceSet with pucch-ResourceSetId > 0. If present, these sets contain between 1 and 8 resources each. The UE chooses a PUCCH-Resource from this list as specified in TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.3. Note that this list contains only a list of resource IDs. The actual resources are configured in PUCCH-Config.

PUCCH-ConfigCommon

The IE PUCCH-ConfigCommon is used to configure the cell specific PUCCH parameters.

PUCCH-ConfigCommon information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PUCCH-CONFIGCOMMON-START

PUCCH-ConfigCommon ::= SEQUENCE {

pucch-ResourceCommon INTEGER (0..15) OPTIONAL, — Cond InitialBWP-Only

pucch-GroupHopping ENUMERATED { neither, enable, disable },

hoppingId INTEGER (0..1023) OPTIONAL, — Need R

p0-nominal INTEGER (-202..24) OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

— TAG-PUCCH-CONFIGCOMMON-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PUCCH-ConfigCommon field descriptions

hoppingId

Cell-specific scrambling ID for group hopping and sequence hopping if enabled, see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.3.2.2.

p0-nominal

Power control parameter P0 for PUCCH transmissions. Value in dBm. Only even values (step size 2) allowed (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.2).

pucch-GroupHopping

Configuration of group- and sequence hopping for all the PUCCH formats 0, 1, 3 and 4. Value neither implies neither group or sequence hopping is enabled. Value enable enables group hopping and disables sequence hopping. Value disable disables group hopping and enables sequence hopping (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.3.2.2).

pucch-ResourceCommon

An entry into a 16-row table where each row configures a set of cell-specific PUCCH resources/parameters. The UE uses those PUCCH resources until it is provided with a dedicated PUCCH-Config (e.g. during initial access) on the initial uplink BWP. Once the network provides a dedicated PUCCH-Config for that bandwidth part the UE applies that one instead of the one provided in this field (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2).

Conditional Presence

Explanation

InitialBWP-Only

The field is mandatory present in the PUCCH-ConfigCommon of the initial BWP (BWP#0) in SIB1. It is absent in other BWPs.

PUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id

The IE PUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id is an ID for a reference signal (RS) configured as PUCCH pathloss reference (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.2).

PUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PUCCH-PATHLOSSREFERENCERS-ID-START

PUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofPUCCH-PathlossReferenceRSs-1)

— TAG-PUCCH-PATHLOSSREFERENCERS-ID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PUCCH-PowerControl

The IE PUCCH-PowerControl is used to configure UE-specific parameters for the power control of PUCCH.

PUCCH-PowerControl information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PUCCH-POWERCONTROL-START

PUCCH-PowerControl ::= SEQUENCE {

deltaF-PUCCH-f0 INTEGER (-16..15) OPTIONAL, — Need R

deltaF-PUCCH-f1 INTEGER (-16..15) OPTIONAL, — Need R

deltaF-PUCCH-f2 INTEGER (-16..15) OPTIONAL, — Need R

deltaF-PUCCH-f3 INTEGER (-16..15) OPTIONAL, — Need R

deltaF-PUCCH-f4 INTEGER (-16..15) OPTIONAL, — Need R

p0-Set SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofPUCCH-P0-PerSet)) OF P0-PUCCH OPTIONAL, — Need M

pathlossReferenceRSs SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofPUCCH-PathlossReferenceRSs)) OF PUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS

OPTIONAL, — Need M

twoPUCCH-PC-AdjustmentStates ENUMERATED {twoStates} OPTIONAL, — Need S

}

P0-PUCCH ::= SEQUENCE {

p0-PUCCH-Id P0-PUCCH-Id,

p0-PUCCH-Value INTEGER (-16..15)

}

P0-PUCCH-Id ::= INTEGER (1..8)

PUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS ::= SEQUENCE {

pucch-PathlossReferenceRS-Id PUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id,

referenceSignal CHOICE {

ssb-Index SSB-Index,

csi-RS-Index NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId

}

}

— TAG-PUCCH-POWERCONTROL-STOP

— ASN1STOP

P0-PUCCH field descriptions

p0-PUCCH-Value

P0 value for PUCCH with 1dB step size.

PUCCH-PowerControl field descriptions

deltaF-PUCCH-f0

deltaF for PUCCH format 0 with 1dB step size (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.2).

deltaF-PUCCH-f1

deltaF for PUCCH format 1 with 1dB step size (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.2).

deltaF-PUCCH-f2

deltaF for PUCCH format 2 with 1dB step size (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.2).

deltaF-PUCCH-f3

deltaF for PUCCH format 3 with 1dB step size (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.2).

deltaF-PUCCH-f4

deltaF for PUCCH format 4 with 1dB step size (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.2).

p0-Set

A set with dedicated P0 values for PUCCH, i.e., {P01, P02,… } (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.2).

pathlossReferenceRSs

A set of Reference Signals (e.g. a CSI-RS config or a SS block) to be used for PUCCH pathloss estimation. Up to maxNrofPUCCH-PathlossReference-RSs may be configured. If the field is not configured, the UE uses the SSB as reference signal (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.2).

twoPUCCH-PC-AdjustmentStates

Number of PUCCH power control adjustment states maintained by the UE (i.e., g(i)). If the field is present (n2) the UE maintains two power control states (i.e., g(i,0) and g(i,1)). If the field is absent, it maintains one power control state (i.e., g(i,0)) (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.2).

PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo

The IE PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo is used to configure the spatial setting for PUCCH transmission and the parameters for PUCCH power control, see TS 38.213, [13], clause 9.2.2.

PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PUCCH-SPATIALRELATIONINFO-START

PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo ::= SEQUENCE {

pucch-SpatialRelationInfoId PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfoId,

servingCellId ServCellIndex OPTIONAL, — Need S

referenceSignal CHOICE {

ssb-Index SSB-Index,

csi-RS-Index NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId,

srs SEQUENCE {

resource SRS-ResourceId,

uplinkBWP BWP-Id

}

},

pucch-PathlossReferenceRS-Id PUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id,

p0-PUCCH-Id P0-PUCCH-Id,

closedLoopIndex ENUMERATED { i0, i1 }

}

PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfoId ::= INTEGER (1..maxNrofSpatialRelationInfos)

— TAG-PUCCH-SPATIALRELATIONINFO-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo field descriptions

servingCellId

If the field is absent, the UE applies the ServCellId of the serving cell in which this PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo is configured

PUCCH-TPC-CommandConfig

The IE PUCCH-TPC-CommandConfig is used to configure the UE for extracting TPC commands for PUCCH from a group-TPC messages on DCI.

PUCCH-TPC-CommandConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PUCCH-TPC-COMMANDCONFIG-START

PUCCH-TPC-CommandConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

tpc-IndexPCell INTEGER (1..15) OPTIONAL, — Cond PDCCH-OfSpcell

tpc-IndexPUCCH-SCell INTEGER (1..15) OPTIONAL, — Cond PDCCH-ofSpCellOrPUCCH-SCell

}

— TAG-PUCCH-TPC-COMMANDCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PUCCH-TPC-CommandConfig field descriptions

tpc-IndexPCell

An index determining the position of the first bit of TPC command (applicable to the SpCell) inside the DCI format 2-2 payload.

tpc-IndexPUCCH-SCell

An index determining the position of the first bit of TPC command (applicable to the PUCCH SCell) inside the DCI format 2-2 payload.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

PDCCH-OfSpcell

The field is mandatory present if the PUCCH-TPC-CommandConfig is provided in the PDCCH-Config for the SpCell. Otherwise, the field is absent, Need R.

PDCCH-ofSpCellOrPUCCH-SCell

The field is mandatory present if the PUCCH-TPC-CommandConfig is provided in the PDCCH-Config for the PUCCH-SCell.

The field is optionally present, need R, if the UE is configured with a PUCCH SCell in this cell group and if the PUCCH-TPC-CommandConfig is provided in the PDCCH-Config for the SpCell.

Otherwise, the field is absent, Need R.

PUSCH-Config

The IE PUSCH-Config is used to configure the UE specific PUSCH parameters applicable to a particular BWP.

PUSCH-Config information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PUSCH-CONFIG-START

PUSCH-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

dataScramblingIdentityPUSCH INTEGER (0..1023) OPTIONAL, — Need S

txConfig ENUMERATED {codebook, nonCodebook} OPTIONAL, — Need S

dmrs-UplinkForPUSCH-MappingTypeA SetupRelease { DMRS-UplinkConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

dmrs-UplinkForPUSCH-MappingTypeB SetupRelease { DMRS-UplinkConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

pusch-PowerControl PUSCH-PowerControl OPTIONAL, — Need M

frequencyHopping ENUMERATED {intraSlot, interSlot} OPTIONAL, — Need S

frequencyHoppingOffsetLists SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..4)) OF INTEGER (1.. maxNrofPhysicalResourceBlocks-1)

OPTIONAL, — Need M

resourceAllocation ENUMERATED { resourceAllocationType0, resourceAllocationType1, dynamicSwitch},

pusch-TimeDomainAllocationList SetupRelease { PUSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList } OPTIONAL, — Need M

pusch-AggregationFactor ENUMERATED { n2, n4, n8 } OPTIONAL, — Need S

mcs-Table ENUMERATED {qam256, qam64LowSE} OPTIONAL, — Need S

mcs-TableTransformPrecoder ENUMERATED {qam256, qam64LowSE} OPTIONAL, — Need S

transformPrecoder ENUMERATED {enabled, disabled} OPTIONAL, — Need S

codebookSubset ENUMERATED {fullyAndPartialAndNonCoherent, partialAndNonCoherent,nonCoherent}

OPTIONAL, — Cond codebookBased

maxRank INTEGER (1..4) OPTIONAL, — Cond codebookBased

rbg-Size ENUMERATED { config2} OPTIONAL, — Need S

uci-OnPUSCH SetupRelease { UCI-OnPUSCH} OPTIONAL, — Need M

tp-pi2BPSK ENUMERATED {enabled} OPTIONAL, — Need S

}

UCI-OnPUSCH ::= SEQUENCE {

betaOffsets CHOICE {

dynamic SEQUENCE (SIZE (4)) OF BetaOffsets,

semiStatic BetaOffsets

} OPTIONAL, — Need M

scaling ENUMERATED { f0p5, f0p65, f0p8, f1 }

}

— TAG-PUSCH-CONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PUSCH-Config field descriptions

codebookSubset

Subset of PMIs addressed by TPMI, where PMIs are those supported by UEs with maximum coherence capabilities (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.1.1).

dataScramblingIdentityPUSCH

Identifier used to initalite data scrambling (c_init) for PUSCH. If the field is absent, the UE applies the physical cell ID. (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.3.1.1).

dmrs-UplinkForPUSCH-MappingTypeA

DMRS configuration for PUSCH transmissions using PUSCH mapping type A (chosen dynamically via PUSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocation). Only the fields dmrs-Type, dmrs-AdditionalPosition and maxLength may be set differently for mapping type A and B.

dmrs-UplinkForPUSCH-MappingTypeB

DMRS configuration for PUSCH transmissions using PUSCH mapping type B (chosen dynamically via PUSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocation). Only the fields dmrs-Type, dmrs-AdditionalPosition and maxLength may be set differently for mapping type A and B.

frequencyHopping

The value intraSlot enables ‘Intra-slot frequency hopping’ and the value interSlot enables ‘Inter-slot frequency hopping’. If the field is absent, frequency hopping is not configured (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.3).

frequencyHoppingOffsetLists

Set of frequency hopping offsets used when frequency hopping is enabled for granted transmission (not msg3) and type 2 configured grant activation (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.3).

maxRank

Subset of PMIs addressed by TRIs from 1 to ULmaxRank (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.1.1).

mcs-Table

Indicates which MCS table the UE shall use for PUSCH without transform precoder (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.4.1). If the field is absent the UE applies the value 64QAM

mcs-TableTransformPrecoder

Indicates which MCS table the UE shall use for PUSCH with transform precoding (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.4.1) If the field is absent the UE applies the value 64QAM

pusch-AggregationFactor

Number of repetitions for data (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.2.1). If the field is absent the UE applies the value 1.

pusch-TimeDomainAllocationList

List of time domain allocations for timing of UL assignment to UL data (see TS 38.214 [19], table 6.1.2.1.1-1).

rbg-Size

Selection between configuration 1 and configuration 2 for RBG size for PUSCH. The UE does not apply this field if resourceAllocation is set to resourceAllocationType1. Otherwise, the UE applies the value config1 when the field is absent (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.2.2.1).

resourceAllocation

Configuration of resource allocation type 0 and resource allocation type 1 for non-fallback DCI (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.2).

tp-pi2BPSK

Enables pi/2-BPSK modulation with transform precoding if the field is present and disables it otherwise.

transformPrecoder

The UE specific selection of transformer precoder for PUSCH (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.3). When the field is absent the UE applies the value of the field msg3-transformPrecoder.

txConfig

Whether UE uses codebook based or non-codebook based transmission (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.1). If the field is absent, the UE transmits PUSCH on one antenna port, see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.1.

UCI-OnPUSCH field descriptions

betaOffsets

Selection between and configuration of dynamic and semi-static beta-offset. If the field is not configured, the UE applies the value ‘semiStatic’ (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.3).

scaling

Indicates a scaling factor to limit the number of resource elements assigned to UCI on PUSCH. Value f0p5 corresponds to 0.5, value f0p65 corresponds to 0.65, and so on. The value configured herein is applicable for PUSCH with configured grant (see TS 38.212 [17], clause 6.3).

Conditional Presence

Explanation

codebookBased

The field is mandatory present if txConfig is set to codebook and absent otherwise.

PUSCH-ConfigCommon

The IE PUSCH-ConfigCommon is used to configure the cell specific PUSCH parameters.

PUSCH-ConfigCommon information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PUSCH-CONFIGCOMMON-START

PUSCH-ConfigCommon ::= SEQUENCE {

groupHoppingEnabledTransformPrecoding ENUMERATED {enabled} OPTIONAL, — Need R

pusch-TimeDomainAllocationList PUSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList OPTIONAL, — Need R

msg3-DeltaPreamble INTEGER (-1..6) OPTIONAL, — Need R

p0-NominalWithGrant INTEGER (-202..24) OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

— TAG-PUSCH-CONFIGCOMMON-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PUSCH-ConfigCommon field descriptions

groupHoppingEnabledTransformPrecoding

For DMRS transmission with transform precoder, the NW may configure group hopping by this cell-specific parameter, see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.4.1.1.1.2.

msg3-DeltaPreamble

Power offset between msg3 and RACH preamble transmission. Actual value = field value * 2 [dB] (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.1)

p0-NominalWithGrant

P0 value for PUSCH with grant (except msg3). Value in dBm. Only even values (step size 2) allowed (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.1) This field is cell specific

pusch-TimeDomainAllocationList

List of time domain allocations for timing of UL assignment to UL data (see TS 38.214 [19], table 6.1.2.1.1-1).

PUSCH-PowerControl

The IE PUSCH-PowerControl is used to configure UE specific power control parameter for PUSCH.

PUSCH-PowerControl information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PUSCH-POWERCONTROL-START

PUSCH-PowerControl ::= SEQUENCE {

tpc-Accumulation ENUMERATED { disabled } OPTIONAL, — Need S

msg3-Alpha Alpha OPTIONAL, — Need S

p0-NominalWithoutGrant INTEGER (-202..24) OPTIONAL, — Need M

p0-AlphaSets SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofP0-PUSCH-AlphaSets)) OF P0-PUSCH-AlphaSet OPTIONAL, — Need M

pathlossReferenceRSToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofPUSCH-PathlossReferenceRSs)) OF PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS

OPTIONAL, — Need N

pathlossReferenceRSToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofPUSCH-PathlossReferenceRSs)) OF PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id

OPTIONAL, — Need N

twoPUSCH-PC-AdjustmentStates ENUMERATED {twoStates} OPTIONAL, — Need S

deltaMCS ENUMERATED {enabled} OPTIONAL, — Need S

sri-PUSCH-MappingToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSRI-PUSCH-Mappings)) OF SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl

OPTIONAL, — Need N

sri-PUSCH-MappingToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSRI-PUSCH-Mappings)) OF SRI-PUSCH-PowerControlId

OPTIONAL — Need N

}

P0-PUSCH-AlphaSet ::= SEQUENCE {

p0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId,

p0 INTEGER (-16..15) OPTIONAL, — Need S

alpha Alpha OPTIONAL — Need S

}

P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofP0-PUSCH-AlphaSets-1)

PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS ::= SEQUENCE {

pusch-PathlossReferenceRS-Id PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id,

referenceSignal CHOICE {

ssb-Index SSB-Index,

csi-RS-Index NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId

}

}

PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofPUSCH-PathlossReferenceRSs-1)

SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl ::= SEQUENCE {

sri-PUSCH-PowerControlId SRI-PUSCH-PowerControlId,

sri-PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id,

sri-P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId,

sri-PUSCH-ClosedLoopIndex ENUMERATED { i0, i1 }

}

SRI-PUSCH-PowerControlId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofSRI-PUSCH-Mappings-1)

— TAG-PUSCH-POWERCONTROL-STOP

— ASN1STOP

P0-PUSCH-AlphaSet field descriptions

alpha

alpha value for PUSCH with grant (except msg3) (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.1). When the field is absent the UE applies the value 1.

p0

P0 value for PUSCH with grant (except msg3) in steps of 1dB (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.1). When the field is absent the UE applies the value 0.

PUSCH-PowerControl field descriptions

deltaMCS

Indicates whether to apply delta MCS. When the field is absent, the UE applies Ks = 0 in delta_TFC formula for PUSCH (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.1).

msg3-Alpha

Dedicated alpha value for msg3 PUSCH (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.1). When the field is absent the UE applies the value 1.

p0-AlphaSets

configuration {p0-pusch, alpha} sets for PUSCH (except msg3), i.e., { {p0,alpha,index1}, {p0,alpha,index2},…} (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.1). When no set is configured, the UE uses the P0-nominal for msg3 PUSCH, P0-UE is set to 0 and alpha is set according to msg3-Alpha configured for msg3 PUSCH.

p0-NominalWithoutGrant

P0 value for UL grant-free/SPS based PUSCH. Value in dBm. Only even values (step size 2) allowed (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.1).

pathlossReferenceRSToAddModList

A set of Reference Signals (e.g. a CSI-RS config or a SS block) to be used for PUSCH path loss estimation. Up to maxNrofPUSCH-PathlossReferenceRSs may be configured (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.1).

sri-PUSCH-MappingToAddModList

A list of SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl elements among which one is selected by the SRI field in DCI (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.1).

tpc-Accumulation

If enabled, UE applies TPC commands via accumulation. If not enabled, UE applies the TPC command without accumulation. If the field is absent, TPC accumulation is enabled (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.1).

twoPUSCH-PC-AdjustmentStates

Number of PUSCH power control adjustment states maintained by the UE (i.e., fc(i)). If the field is present (n2) the UE maintains two power control states (i.e., fc(i,0) and fc(i,1)). If the field is absent, it maintains one power control state (i.e., fc(i,0)) (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.1).

SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl field descriptions

sri-P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId

The ID of a P0-PUSCH-AlphaSet as configured in p0-AlphaSets in PUSCH-PowerControl.

sri-PUSCH-ClosedLoopIndex

The index of the closed power control loop associated with this SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl.

sri-PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id

The ID of PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS as configured in the pathlossReferenceRSToAddModList in PUSCH-PowerControl.

sri-PUSCH-PowerControlId

The ID of this SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl configuration. It is used as the codepoint (payload) in the SRI DCI field.

PUSCH-ServingCellConfig

The IE PUSCH-ServingCellConfig is used to configure UE specific PUSCH parameters that are common across the UE’s BWPs of one serving cell.

PUSCH-ServingCellConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PUSCH-SERVINGCELLCONFIG-START

PUSCH-ServingCellConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

codeBlockGroupTransmission SetupRelease { PUSCH-CodeBlockGroupTransmission } OPTIONAL, — Need M

rateMatching ENUMERATED {limitedBufferRM} OPTIONAL, — Need S

xOverhead ENUMERATED {xoh6, xoh12, xoh18} OPTIONAL, — Need S

…,

[[

maxMIMO-Layers INTEGER (1..4) OPTIONAL, — Need M

processingType2Enabled BOOLEAN OPTIONAL — Need M

]]

}

PUSCH-CodeBlockGroupTransmission ::= SEQUENCE {

maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock ENUMERATED {n2, n4, n6, n8},

}

— TAG-PUSCH-SERVINGCELLCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PUSCH-CodeBlockGroupTransmission field descriptions

maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock

Maximum number of code-block-groups (CBGs) per TB (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.1).

PUSCH-ServingCellConfig field descriptions

codeBlockGroupTransmission

Enables and configures code-block-group (CBG) based transmission (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.5).

maxMIMO-Layers

Indicates the maximum MIMO layer to be used for PUSCH in all BWPs of the normal UL of this serving cell (see TS 38.212 [17], clause 5.4.2.1). If present, the network sets maxRank to the same value. For SUL, the maximum number of MIMO layers is always 1, and network does not configure this field.

processingType2Enabled

Enables configuration of advanced processing time capability 2 for PUSCH (see 38.214 [19], clause 6.4).

rateMatching

Enables LBRM (Limited buffer rate-matching). When the field is absent the UE applies FBRM (Full buffer rate-matchingLBRM) (see TS 38.212 [17], clause 5.4.2).

xOverhead

If the field is absent, the UE applies the value ‘xoh0’ (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.3.2).

PUSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList

The IE PUSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocation is used to configure a time domain relation between PDCCH and PUSCH. PUSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList contains one or more of such PUSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocations. The network indicates in the UL grant which of the configured time domain allocations the UE shall apply for that UL grant. The UE determines the bit width of the DCI field based on the number of entries in the PUSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList. Value 0 in the DCI field refers to the first element in this list, value 1 in the DCI field refers to the second element in this list, and so on.

PUSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocation information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PUSCH-TIMEDOMAINRESOURCEALLOCATIONLIST-START

PUSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofUL-Allocations)) OF PUSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocation

PUSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocation ::= SEQUENCE {

k2 INTEGER(0..32) OPTIONAL, — Need S

mappingType ENUMERATED {typeA, typeB},

startSymbolAndLength INTEGER (0..127)

}

— TAG-PUSCH-TIMEDOMAINRESOURCEALLOCATIONLIST-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PUSCH-TimeDomainResourceAllocationList field descriptions

k2

Corresponds to L1 parameter ‘K2’ (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.2.1) When the field is absent the UE applies the value 1 when PUSCH SCS is 15/30 kHz; the value 2 when PUSCH SCS is 60 kHz, and the value 3 when PUSCH SCS is 120KHz.

mappingType

Mapping type (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.2.1).

startSymbolAndLength

An index giving valid combinations of start symbol and length (jointly encoded) as start and length indicator (SLIV). The network configures the field so that the allocation does not cross the slot boundary. (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.2.1).

PUSCH-TPC-CommandConfig

The IE PUSCH-TPC-CommandConfig is used to configure the UE for extracting TPC commands for PUSCH from a group-TPC messages on DCI.

PUSCH-TPC-CommandConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-PUSCH-TPC-COMMANDCONFIG-START

PUSCH-TPC-CommandConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

tpc-Index INTEGER (1..15) OPTIONAL, — Cond SUL

tpc-IndexSUL INTEGER (1..15) OPTIONAL, — Cond SUL-Only

targetCell ServCellIndex OPTIONAL, — Need S

}

— TAG-PUSCH-TPC-COMMANDCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

PUSCH-TPC-CommandConfig field descriptions

targetCell

The serving cell to which the acquired power control commands are applicable. If the value is absent, the UE applies the TPC commands to the serving cell on which the command has been received.

tpc-Index

An index determining the position of the first bit of TPC command inside the DCI format 2-2 payload.

tpc-IndexSUL

An index determining the position of the first bit of TPC command inside the DCI format 2-2 payload.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

SUL-Only

The field is optionally present, Need R, if supplementaryUplink is configured within ServingCellConfig. It is absent otherwise.

SUL

The field is optionally present, Need R, if supplementaryUplink is configured within ServingCellConfig. It is mandatory present otherwise.

– Q-OffsetRange

The IE Q-OffsetRange is used to indicate a cell, beam or measurement object specific offset to be applied when evaluating candidates for cell re-selection or when evaluating triggering conditions for measurement reporting. The value is in dB. Value dB-24 corresponds to -24 dB, dB-22 corresponds to -22 dB and so on.

Q-OffsetRange information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-Q-OFFSETRANGE-START

Q-OffsetRange ::= ENUMERATED {

dB-24, dB-22, dB-20, dB-18, dB-16, dB-14,

dB-12, dB-10, dB-8, dB-6, dB-5, dB-4, dB-3,

dB-2, dB-1, dB0, dB1, dB2, dB3, dB4, dB5,

dB6, dB8, dB10, dB12, dB14, dB16, dB18,

dB20, dB22, dB24}

— TAG-Q-OFFSETRANGE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

Q-QualMin

The IE Q-QualMin is used to indicate for cell selection/ re-selection the required minimum received RSRQ level in the (NR) cell. Corresponds to parameter Qqualmin in TS 38.304 [20]. Actual value Qqualmin = field value [dB].

Q-QualMin information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-Q-QUALMIN-START

Q-QualMin ::= INTEGER (-43..-12)

— TAG-Q-QUALMIN-STOP

— ASN1STOP

Q-RxLevMin

The IE Q-RxLevMin is used to indicate for cell selection/ re-selection the required minimum received RSRP level in the (NR) cell. Corresponds to parameter Qrxlevmin in TS 38.304 [20]. Actual value Qrxlevmin = field value * 2 [dBm].

Q-RxLevMin information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-Q-RXLEVMIN-START

Q-RxLevMin ::= INTEGER (-70..-22)

— TAG-Q-RXLEVMIN-STOP

— ASN1STOP

QuantityConfig

The IE QuantityConfig specifies the measurement quantities and layer 3 filtering coefficients for NR and inter-RAT measurements.

QuantityConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-QUANTITYCONFIG-START

QuantityConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

quantityConfigNR-List SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofQuantityConfig)) OF QuantityConfigNR OPTIONAL, — Need M

…,

[[

quantityConfigEUTRA FilterConfig OPTIONAL — Need M

]]

}

QuantityConfigNR::= SEQUENCE {

quantityConfigCell QuantityConfigRS,

quantityConfigRS-Index QuantityConfigRS OPTIONAL — Need M

}

QuantityConfigRS ::= SEQUENCE {

ssb-FilterConfig FilterConfig,

csi-RS-FilterConfig FilterConfig

}

FilterConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

filterCoefficientRSRP FilterCoefficient DEFAULT fc4,

filterCoefficientRSRQ FilterCoefficient DEFAULT fc4,

filterCoefficientRS-SINR FilterCoefficient DEFAULT fc4

}

— TAG-QUANTITYCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

QuantityConfigNR field descriptions

quantityConfigCell

Specifies L3 filter configurations for cell measurement results for the configurable RS Types (e.g. SS/PBCH block and CSI-RS) and the configurable measurement quantities (e.g. RSRP, RSRQ and SINR).

quantityConfigRS-Index

Specifies L3 filter configurations for measurement results per RS index for the configurable RS Types (e.g. SS/PBCH block and CSI-RS) and the configurable measurement quantities (e.g. RSRP, RSRQ and SINR).

QuantityConfigRS field descriptions

csi-RS-FilterConfig

CSI-RS based L3 filter configurations:

Specifies L3 filter configurations for CSI-RSRP, CSI-RSRQ and CSI-SINR measurement results from the L1 filter(s), as defined in TS 38.215 [9].

ssb-FilterConfig

SS Block based L3 filter configurations:

Specifies L3 filter configurations for SS-RSRP, SS-RSRQ and SS-SINR measurement results from the L1 filter(s), as defined in TS 38.215 [9].

RACH-ConfigCommon

The IE RACH-ConfigCommon is used to specify the cell specific random-access parameters.

RACH-ConfigCommon information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RACH-CONFIGCOMMON-START

RACH-ConfigCommon ::= SEQUENCE {

rach-ConfigGeneric RACH-ConfigGeneric,

totalNumberOfRA-Preambles INTEGER (1..63) OPTIONAL, — Need S

ssb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblesPerSSB CHOICE {

oneEighth ENUMERATED {n4,n8,n12,n16,n20,n24,n28,n32,n36,n40,n44,n48,n52,n56,n60,n64},

oneFourth ENUMERATED {n4,n8,n12,n16,n20,n24,n28,n32,n36,n40,n44,n48,n52,n56,n60,n64},

oneHalf ENUMERATED {n4,n8,n12,n16,n20,n24,n28,n32,n36,n40,n44,n48,n52,n56,n60,n64},

one ENUMERATED {n4,n8,n12,n16,n20,n24,n28,n32,n36,n40,n44,n48,n52,n56,n60,n64},

two ENUMERATED {n4,n8,n12,n16,n20,n24,n28,n32},

four INTEGER (1..16),

eight INTEGER (1..8),

sixteen INTEGER (1..4)

} OPTIONAL, — Need M

groupBconfigured SEQUENCE {

ra-Msg3SizeGroupA ENUMERATED {b56, b144, b208, b256, b282, b480, b640,

b800, b1000, b72, spare6, spare5,spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1},

messagePowerOffsetGroupB ENUMERATED { minusinfinity, dB0, dB5, dB8, dB10, dB12, dB15, dB18},

numberOfRA-PreamblesGroupA INTEGER (1..64)

} OPTIONAL, — Need R

ra-ContentionResolutionTimer ENUMERATED { sf8, sf16, sf24, sf32, sf40, sf48, sf56, sf64},

rsrp-ThresholdSSB RSRP-Range OPTIONAL, — Need R

rsrp-ThresholdSSB-SUL RSRP-Range OPTIONAL, — Cond SUL

prach-RootSequenceIndex CHOICE {

l839 INTEGER (0..837),

l139 INTEGER (0..137)

},

msg1-SubcarrierSpacing SubcarrierSpacing OPTIONAL, — Cond L139

restrictedSetConfig ENUMERATED {unrestrictedSet, restrictedSetTypeA, restrictedSetTypeB},

msg3-transformPrecoder ENUMERATED {enabled} OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

— TAG-RACH-CONFIGCOMMON-STOP

— ASN1STOP

RACH-ConfigCommon field descriptions

messagePowerOffsetGroupB

Threshold for preamble selection. Value is in dB. Value minusinfinity corresponds to –infinity. Value dB0 corresponds to 0 dB, dB5 corresponds to 5 dB and so on. (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.1.2)

msg1-SubcarrierSpacing

Subcarrier spacing of PRACH (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 5.3.2). Only the values 15 or 30 kHz (FR1), and 60 or 120 kHz (FR2) are applicable. If absent, the UE applies the SCS as derived from the prach-ConfigurationIndex in RACH-ConfigGeneric (see tables Table 6.3.3.1-1, Table 6.3.3.2-2 and Table 6.3.3.2-3, TS 38.211 [16]). The value also applies to contention free random access (RACH-ConfigDedicated), to SI-request and to contention-based beam failure recovery (CB-BFR). But it does not apply for contention free beam failure recovery (CF-BFR) (see BeamFailureRecoveryConfig).

msg3-transformPrecoder

Enables the transform precoder for Msg3 transmission according to clause 6.1.3 of TS 38.214 [19]. If the field is absent, the UE disables the transformer precoder (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 8.3).

numberOfRA-PreamblesGroupA

The number of CB preambles per SSB in group A. This determines implicitly the number of CB preambles per SSB available in group B. (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.1.1). The setting should be consistent with the setting of ssb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblesPerSSB.

prach-RootSequenceIndex

PRACH root sequence index (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.3.3.1). The value range depends on whether L=839 or L=139. The short/long preamble format indicated in this IE should be consistent with the one indicated in prach-ConfigurationIndex in the RACH-ConfigDedicated (if configured).

ra-ContentionResolutionTimer

The initial value for the contention resolution timer (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.1.5). Value sf8 corresponds to 8 subframes, value sf16 corresponds to 16 subframes, and so on.

ra-Msg3SizeGroupA

Transport Blocks size threshold in bits below which the UE shall use a contention-based RA preamble of group A. (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.1.2).

rach-ConfigGeneric

RACH parameters for both regular random access and beam failure recovery.

restrictedSetConfig

Configuration of an unrestricted set or one of two types of restricted sets, see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.3.3.1.

rsrp-ThresholdSSB

UE may select the SS block and corresponding PRACH resource for path-loss estimation and (re)transmission based on SS blocks that satisfy the threshold (see TS 38.213 [13]).

rsrp-ThresholdSSB-SUL

The UE selects SUL carrier to perform random access based on this threshold (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.1.1). The value applies to all the BWPs.

ssb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblesPerSSB

The meaning of this field is twofold: the CHOICE conveys the information about the number of SSBs per RACH occasion. Value oneEighth corresponds to one SSB associated with 8 RACH occasions, value oneFourth corresponds to one SSB associated with 4 RACH occasions, and so on. The ENUMERATED part indicates the number of Contention Based preambles per SSB. Value n4 corresponds to 4 Contention Based preambles per SSB, value n8 corresponds to 8 Contention Based preambles per SSB, and so on. The total number of CB preambles in a RACH occasion is given by CB-preambles-per-SSB * max(1, SSB-per-rach-occasion). See TS 38.213 [13].

totalNumberOfRA-Preambles

Total number of preambles used for contention based and contention free random access in the RACH resources defined in RACH-ConfigCommon, excluding preambles used for other purposes (e.g. for SI request). If the field is absent, all 64 preambles are available for RA. The setting should be consistent with the setting of ssb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblesPerSSB, i.e. it should be a multiple of the number of SSBs per RACH occasion.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

L139

The field is mandatory present if prach-RootSequenceIndex L=139, otherwise the field is absent, Need S.

SUL

The field is mandatory present in initialUplinkBWP if supplementaryUplink is configured in ServingCellConfigCommonSIB or if supplementaryUplinkConfig is configured in ServingCellConfigCommon; otherwise, the field is absent.

RACH-ConfigDedicated

The IE RACH-ConfigDedicated is used to specify the dedicated random access parameters.

RACH-ConfigDedicated information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RACH-CONFIGDEDICATED-START

RACH-ConfigDedicated ::= SEQUENCE {

cfra CFRA OPTIONAL, — Need S

ra-Prioritization RA-Prioritization OPTIONAL, — Need N

}

CFRA ::= SEQUENCE {

occasions SEQUENCE {

rach-ConfigGeneric RACH-ConfigGeneric,

ssb-perRACH-Occasion ENUMERATED {oneEighth, oneFourth, oneHalf, one, two, four, eight, sixteen}

OPTIONAL — Cond Mandatory

} OPTIONAL, — Need S

resources CHOICE {

ssb SEQUENCE {

ssb-ResourceList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxRA-SSB-Resources)) OF CFRA-SSB-Resource,

ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex INTEGER (0..15)

},

csirs SEQUENCE {

csirs-ResourceList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxRA-CSIRS-Resources)) OF CFRA-CSIRS-Resource,

rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS RSRP-Range

}

},

…,

[[

totalNumberOfRA-Preambles INTEGER (1..63) OPTIONAL — Cond Occasions

]]

}

CFRA-SSB-Resource ::= SEQUENCE {

ssb SSB-Index,

ra-PreambleIndex INTEGER (0..63),

}

CFRA-CSIRS-Resource ::= SEQUENCE {

csi-RS CSI-RS-Index,

ra-OccasionList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxRA-OccasionsPerCSIRS)) OF INTEGER (0..maxRA-Occasions-1),

ra-PreambleIndex INTEGER (0..63),

}

— TAG-RACH-CONFIGDEDICATED-STOP

— ASN1STOP

CFRA-CSIRS-Resource field descriptions

csi-RS

The ID of a CSI-RS resource defined in the measurement object associated with this serving cell.

ra-OccasionList

RA occasions that the UE shall use when performing CF-RA upon selecting the candidate beam identified by this CSI-RS. The network ensures that the RA occasion indexes provided herein are also configured by prach-ConfigurationIndex and msg1-FDM. Each RACH occasion is sequentially numbered, first, in increasing order of frequency resource indexes for frequency multiplexed PRACH occasions; second, in increasing order of time resource indexes for time multiplexed PRACH occasions within a PRACH slot and Third, in increasing order of indexes for PRACH slots.

ra-PreambleIndex

The RA preamble index to use in the RA occasions associated with this CSI-RS.

CFRA field descriptions

occasions

RA occasions for contention free random access. If the field is absent, the UE uses the RA occasions configured in RACH-ConfigCommon in the first active UL BWP.

ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex

Explicitly signalled PRACH Mask Index for RA Resource selection in TS 38.321 [3]. The mask is valid for all SSB resources signalled in ssb-ResourceList.

rach-ConfigGeneric

Configuration of contention free random access occasions for CFRA. The UE shall ignore preambleReceivedTargetPower, preambleTransMax, powerRampingStep, ra-ResponseWindow signaled within this field and use the corresponding values provided in RACH-ConfigCommon.

ssb-perRACH-Occasion

Number of SSBs per RACH occasion.

totalNumberOfRA-Preambles

Total number of preambles used for contention free random access in the RACH resources defined in CFRA, excluding preambles used for other purposes (e.g. for SI request). If the field is absent but the field occasions is present, the UE may assume all the 64 preambles are for RA. The setting should be consistent with the setting of ssb-perRACH-Occasion, if present, i.e. it should be a multiple of the number of SSBs per RACH occasion.

CFRA-SSB-Resource field descriptions

ra-PreambleIndex

The preamble index that the UE shall use when performing CF-RA upon selecting the candidate beams identified by this SSB.

ssb

The ID of an SSB transmitted by this serving cell.

RACH-ConfigDedicated field descriptions

cfra

Parameters for contention free random access to a given target cell. If the field is absent, the UE performs contention based random access.

ra-prioritization

Parameters which apply for prioritized random access procedure to a given target cell (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.1.1).

Conditional Presence

Explanation

Mandatory

The field is mandatory present.

Occasions

The field is optionally present, Need S, if the field occasions is present, otherwise it is absent.

RACH-ConfigGeneric

The IE RACH-ConfigGeneric is used to specify the random-access parameters both for regular random access as well as for beam failure recovery.

RACH-ConfigGeneric information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RACH-CONFIGGENERIC-START

RACH-ConfigGeneric ::= SEQUENCE {

prach-ConfigurationIndex INTEGER (0..255),

msg1-FDM ENUMERATED {one, two, four, eight},

msg1-FrequencyStart INTEGER (0..maxNrofPhysicalResourceBlocks-1),

zeroCorrelationZoneConfig INTEGER(0..15),

preambleReceivedTargetPower INTEGER (-202..-60),

preambleTransMax ENUMERATED {n3, n4, n5, n6, n7, n8, n10, n20, n50, n100, n200},

powerRampingStep ENUMERATED {dB0, dB2, dB4, dB6},

ra-ResponseWindow ENUMERATED {sl1, sl2, sl4, sl8, sl10, sl20, sl40, sl80},

}

— TAG-RACH-CONFIGGENERIC-STOP

— ASN1STOP

RACH-ConfigGeneric field descriptions

msg1-FDM

The number of PRACH transmission occasions FDMed in one time instance. (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.3.3.2).

msg1-FrequencyStart

Offset of lowest PRACH transmission occasion in frequency domain with respective to PRB 0. The value is configured so that the corresponding RACH resource is entirely within the bandwidth of the UL BWP. (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.3.3.2).

powerRampingStep

Power ramping steps for PRACH (see TS 38.321 [3],5.1.3).

prach-ConfigurationIndex

PRACH configuration index. For prach-ConfigurationIndex configured under beamFailureRecovery-Config, the prach-ConfigurationIndex can only correspond to the short preamble format, (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.3.3.2).

preambleReceivedTargetPower

The target power level at the network receiver side (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.4, TS 38.321 [3], clauses 5.1.2, 5.1.3). Only multiples of 2 dBm may be chosen (e.g. -202, -200, -198, …).

preambleTransMax

Max number of RA preamble transmission performed before declaring a failure (see TS 38.321 [3], clauses 5.1.4, 5.1.5).

ra-ResponseWindow

Msg2 (RAR) window length in number of slots. The network configures a value lower than or equal to 10 ms (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.1.4). UE ignores the field if included in SCellConfig.

zeroCorrelationZoneConfig

N-CS configuration, see Table 6.3.3.1-5 in TS 38.211 [16].

RA-Prioritization

The IE RA-Prioritization is used to configure prioritized random access.

RA-Prioritization information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RA-PRIORITIZATION-START

RA-Prioritization ::= SEQUENCE {

powerRampingStepHighPriority ENUMERATED {dB0, dB2, dB4, dB6},

scalingFactorBI ENUMERATED {zero, dot25, dot5, dot75} OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

— TAG-RA-PRIORITIZATION-STOP

— ASN1STOP

RA-Prioritization field descriptions

powerRampingStepHighPrioritiy

Power ramping step applied for prioritized random access procedure.

scalingFactorBI

Scaling factor for the backoff indicator (BI) for the prioritized random access procedure. (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.1.4). Value zero corresponds to 0, value dot25 corresponds to 0.25 and so on.

RadioBearerConfig

The IE RadioBearerConfig is used to add, modify and release signalling and/or data radio bearers. Specifically, this IE carries the parameters for PDCP and, if applicable, SDAP entities for the radio bearers.

RadioBearerConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RADIOBEARERCONFIG-START

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

srb-ToAddModList SRB-ToAddModList OPTIONAL, — Cond HO-Conn

srb3-ToRelease ENUMERATED{true} OPTIONAL, — Need N

drb-ToAddModList DRB-ToAddModList OPTIONAL, — Cond HO-toNR

drb-ToReleaseList DRB-ToReleaseList OPTIONAL, — Need N

securityConfig SecurityConfig OPTIONAL, — Need M

}

SRB-ToAddModList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..2)) OF SRB-ToAddMod

SRB-ToAddMod ::= SEQUENCE {

srb-Identity SRB-Identity,

reestablishPDCP ENUMERATED{true} OPTIONAL, — Need N

discardOnPDCP ENUMERATED{true} OPTIONAL, — Need N

pdcp-Config PDCP-Config OPTIONAL, — Cond PDCP

}

DRB-ToAddModList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod

DRB-ToAddMod ::= SEQUENCE {

cnAssociation CHOICE {

eps-BearerIdentity INTEGER (0..15),

sdap-Config SDAP-Config

} OPTIONAL, — Cond DRBSetup

drb-Identity DRB-Identity,

reestablishPDCP ENUMERATED{true} OPTIONAL, — Need N

recoverPDCP ENUMERATED{true} OPTIONAL, — Need N

pdcp-Config PDCP-Config OPTIONAL, — Cond PDCP

}

DRB-ToReleaseList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-Identity

SecurityConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

securityAlgorithmConfig SecurityAlgorithmConfig OPTIONAL, — Cond RBTermChange1

keyToUse ENUMERATED{master, secondary} OPTIONAL, — Cond RBTermChange

}

— TAG-RADIOBEARERCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

DRB-ToAddMod field descriptions

cnAssociation

Indicates if the bearer is associated with the eps-bearerIdentity (when connected to EPC) or sdap-Config (when connected to 5GC).

drb-Identity

In case of DC, the DRB identity is unique within the scope of the UE, i.e. an MCG DRB cannot use the same value as a split DRB. For a split DRB the same identity is used for the MCG and SCG parts of the configuration.

eps-BearerIdentity

The EPS bearer ID determines the EPS bearer.

reestablishPDCP

Indicates that PDCP should be re-established. Network sets this to true whenever the security key used for this radio bearer changes. Key change could for example be due to termination point change for the bearer, reconfiguration with sync, resuming an RRC connection, or the first reconfiguration after reestablishment. It is also applicable for LTE procedures when NR PDCP is configured.

recoverPDCP

Indicates that PDCP should perform recovery according to TS 38.323 [5].

sdap-Config

The SDAP configuration determines how to map QoS flows to DRBs when NR or E-UTRA connects to the 5GC and presence/absence of UL/DL SDAP headers.

RadioBearerConfig field descriptions

securityConfig

Indicates the security algorithm and key to use for the signalling and data radio bearers configured with the list in this IE RadioBearerConfig. When the field is not included after AS security has been activated, the UE shall continue to use the currently configured keyToUse and security algorithm for the radio bearers reconfigured with the lists in this IE RadioBearerConfig. The field is not included when configuring SRB1 before AS security is activated.

srb3-ToRelease

Release SRB3. SRB3 release can only be done over SRB1 and only at SCG release and reconfiguration with sync.

SecurityConfig field descriptions

keyToUse

Indicates if the bearers configured with the list in this IE RadioBearerConfig are using the master key or the secondary key for deriving ciphering and/or integrity protection keys. For MR-DC, network should not configure SRB1 and SRB2 with secondary key and SRB3 with the master key. When the field is not included, the UE shall continue to use the currently configured keyToUse for the radio bearers reconfigured with the lists in this IE RadioBearerConfig.

securityAlgorithmConfig

Indicates the security algorithm for the signalling and data radio bearers configured with the list in this IE RadioBearerConfig. When the field is not included, the UE shall continue to use the currently configured security algorithm for the radio bearers reconfigured with the lists in this IE RadioBearerConfig.

SRB-ToAddMod field descriptions

discardOnPDCP

Indicates that PDCP should discard stored SDU and PDU according to TS 38.323 [5].

reestablishPDCP

Indicates that PDCP should be re-established. Network sets this to true whenever the security key used for this radio bearer changes. Key change could for example be due to reconfiguration with sync, for SRB2 when resuming an RRC connection, or at the first reconfiguration after RRC connection reestablishment in NR. For SRB1, when resuming an RRC connection, or at the first reconfiguration after RRC connection reestablishment in NR, the network does not set this field to true. For LTE SRBs using NR PDCP, it could be for handover, RRC connection reestablishment or resume.

srb-Identity

Value 1 is applicable for SRB1 only. Value 2 is applicable for SRB2 only. Value 3 is applicable for SRB3 only.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

RBTermChange

The field is mandatory present in case of:

– set up of signalling,

– data radio bearer and change of termination point for the radio bearer between MN and SN.

It is optionally present otherwise, Need S.

RBTermChange1

The field is mandatory present in case of:

– set up of signalling and data radio bearer,

– change of termination point for the radio bearer between MN and SN,

– handover from E-UTRA/EPC or E-UTRA/5GC to NR,

– handover from NR or E-UTRA/EPC to E-UTRA/5GC if the UE supports NGEN-DC.

It is optionally present otherwise, Need S.

PDCP

The field is mandatory present if the corresponding DRB is being setup or corresponding DRB is reconfigured with NR PDCP or corresponding SRB associated with two RLC entities is being setup or if the number of RLC bearers associated with the DRB or SRB is changed. The field is optionally present, Need S, if the corresponding SRB associated with one RLC entity is being setup or corresponding SRB is reconfigured with NR PDCP; otherwise the field is optionally present, need M.

DRBSetup

The field is mandatory present if the corresponding DRB is being setup; otherwise the field is optionally present, need M.

HO-Conn

The field is mandatory present

– in case of inter-system handover from E-UTRA/EPC to E-UTRA/5GC or NR,

– or when the fullConfig is included in the RRCReconfiguration message and NE-DC/NR-DC is not configured,

– or in case of RRCSetup.

Otherwise the field is optionally present, need N.

Upon RRCSetup, only SRB1 can be present.

HO-toNR

The field is mandatory present

– in case of inter-system handover from E-UTRA/EPC to E-UTRA/5GC or NR,

– or when the fullConfig is included in the RRCReconfiguration message and NE-DC/NR-DC is not configured.

In case of RRCSetup, the field is absent; otherwise the field is optionally present, need N.

RadioLinkMonitoringConfig

The IE RadioLinkMonitoringConfig is used to configure radio link monitoring for detection of beam- and/or cell radio link failure. See also TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.1.1.

RadioLinkMonitoringConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RADIOLINKMONITORINGCONFIG-START

RadioLinkMonitoringConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

failureDetectionResourcesToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofFailureDetectionResources)) OF RadioLinkMonitoringRS

OPTIONAL, — Need N

failureDetectionResourcesToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofFailureDetectionResources)) OF RadioLinkMonitoringRS-Id

OPTIONAL, — Need N

beamFailureInstanceMaxCount ENUMERATED {n1, n2, n3, n4, n5, n6, n8, n10} OPTIONAL, — Need R

beamFailureDetectionTimer ENUMERATED {pbfd1, pbfd2, pbfd3, pbfd4, pbfd5, pbfd6, pbfd8, pbfd10} OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

RadioLinkMonitoringRS ::= SEQUENCE {

radioLinkMonitoringRS-Id RadioLinkMonitoringRS-Id,

purpose ENUMERATED {beamFailure, rlf, both},

detectionResource CHOICE {

ssb-Index SSB-Index,

csi-RS-Index NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId

},

}

— TAG-RADIOLINKMONITORINGCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

RadioLinkMonitoringConfig field descriptions

beamFailureDetectionTimer

Timer for beam failure detection (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.17). See also the BeamFailureRecoveryConfig IE. Value in number of "Qout,LR reporting periods of Beam Failure Detection" Reference Signal (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 6). Value pbfd1 corresponds to 1 Qout,LR reporting period of Beam Failure Detection Reference Signal, value pbfd2 corresponds to 2 Qout,LR reporting periods of Beam Failure Detection Reference Signal and so on.

beamFailureInstanceMaxCount

This field determines after how many beam failure events the UE triggers beam failure recovery (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.17). Value n1 corresponds to 1 beam failure instance, value n2 corresponds to 2 beam failure instances and so on.

failureDetectionResourcesToAddModList

A list of reference signals for detecting beam failure and/or cell level radio link failure (RLF). The limits of the reference signals that the network can configure are specified in TS 38.213 [13], table 5-1. The network configures at most two detectionResources per BWP for the purpose beamFailure or both. If no RSs are provided for the purpose of beam failure detection, the UE performs beam monitoring based on the activated TCI-State for PDCCH as described in TS 38.213 [13], clause 6. If no RSs are provided in this list for the purpose of RLF detection, the UE performs Cell-RLM based on the activated TCI-State of PDCCH as described in TS 38.213 [13], clause 5. The network ensures that the UE has a suitable set of reference signals for performing cell-RLM.

RadioLinkMonitoringRS field descriptions

detectionResource

A reference signal that the UE shall use for radio link monitoring or beam failure detection (depending on the indicated purpose).

purpose

Determines whether the UE shall monitor the associated reference signal for the purpose of cell- and/or beam failure detection.

RadioLinkMonitoringRS-Id

The IE RadioLinkMonitoringRS-Id is used to identify one RadioLinkMonitoringRS.

RadioLinkMonitoringRS-Id information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RADIOLINKMONITORINGRS-ID-START

RadioLinkMonitoringRS-Id ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofFailureDetectionResources-1)

— TAG-RADIOLINKMONITORINGRS-ID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

RAN-AreaCode

The IE RAN-AreaCode is used to identify a RAN area within the scope of a tracking area.

RAN-AreaCode information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RAN-AREACODE-START

RAN-AreaCode ::= INTEGER (0..255)

— TAG-RAN-AREACODE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

RateMatchPattern

The IE RateMatchPattern is used to configure one rate matching pattern for PDSCH, see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.1.

RateMatchPattern information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RATEMATCHPATTERN-START

RateMatchPattern ::= SEQUENCE {

rateMatchPatternId RateMatchPatternId,

patternType CHOICE {

bitmaps SEQUENCE {

resourceBlocks BIT STRING (SIZE (275)),

symbolsInResourceBlock CHOICE {

oneSlot BIT STRING (SIZE (14)),

twoSlots BIT STRING (SIZE (28))

},

periodicityAndPattern CHOICE {

n2 BIT STRING (SIZE (2)),

n4 BIT STRING (SIZE (4)),

n5 BIT STRING (SIZE (5)),

n8 BIT STRING (SIZE (8)),

n10 BIT STRING (SIZE (10)),

n20 BIT STRING (SIZE (20)),

n40 BIT STRING (SIZE (40))

} OPTIONAL, — Need S

},

controlResourceSet ControlResourceSetId

},

subcarrierSpacing SubcarrierSpacing OPTIONAL, — Cond CellLevel

dummy ENUMERATED { dynamic, semiStatic },

}

— TAG-RATEMATCHPATTERN-STOP

— ASN1STOP

RateMatchPattern field descriptions

bitmaps

Indicates rate matching pattern by a pair of bitmaps resourceBlocks and symbolsInResourceBlock to define the rate match pattern within one or two slots, and a third bitmap periodicityAndPattern to define the repetition pattern with which the pattern defined by the above bitmap pair occurs.

controlResourceSet

This ControlResourceSet is used as a PDSCH rate matching pattern, i.e., PDSCH reception rate matches around it. In frequency domain, the resource is determined by the frequency domain resource of the CORESET with the corresponding CORESET ID. Time domain resource is determined by the parameters of the associated search space of the CORESET.

periodicityAndPattern

A time domain repetition pattern at which the pattern defined by symbolsInResourceBlock and resourceBlocks recurs. This slot pattern repeats itself continuously. Absence of this field indicates the value n1 (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.1).

resourceBlocks

A resource block level bitmap in the frequency domain. A bit in the bitmap set to 1 indicates that the UE shall apply rate matching in the corresponding resource block in accordance with the symbolsInResourceBlock bitmap. If used as cell-level rate matching pattern, the bitmap identifies "common resource blocks (CRB)". If used as BWP-level rate matching pattern, the bitmap identifies "physical resource blocks" inside the BWP. The first/ leftmost bit corresponds to resource block 0, and so on (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.1).

subcarrierSpacing

The SubcarrierSpacing for this resource pattern. If the field is absent, the UE applies the SCS of the associated BWP. The value kHz15 corresponds to µ=0, the value kHz30 corresponds to µ=1, and so on. Only the values 15 kHz, 30 kHz or 60 kHz (FR1), and 60 kHz or 120 kHz (FR2) are applicable (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.1).

symbolsInResourceBlock

A symbol level bitmap in time domain. It indicates with a bit set to true that the UE shall rate match around the corresponding symbol. This pattern recurs (in time domain) with the configured periodicityAndPattern (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.1).

For oneSlot, if ECP is configured, the first 12 bits represent the symbols within the slot and the last two bits within the bitstring are ignored by the UE; Otherwise, the 14 bits represent the symbols within the slot.

For twoSlots, if ECP is configured, the first 12 bits represent the symbols within the first slot and the next 12 bits represent the symbols in the second slot and the last four bits within the bit string are ignored by the UE; Otherwise, the first 14 bits represent the symbols within the first slot and the next 14 bits represent the symbols in the second slot.

For the bits representing symbols in a slot, the most significant bit of the bit string represents the first symbol in the slot and the second most significant bit represents the second symbol in the slot and so on.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

CellLevel

The field is mandatory present if the RateMatchPattern is defined on cell level. The field is absent when the RateMatchPattern is defined on BWP level. If the RateMatchPattern is defined on BWP level, the UE applies the SCS of the BWP.

RateMatchPatternId

The IE RateMatchPatternId identifies one RateMatchMattern (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.2).

RateMatchPatternId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RATEMATCHPATTERNID-START

RateMatchPatternId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofRateMatchPatterns-1)

— TAG-RATEMATCHPATTERNID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

RateMatchPatternLTE-CRS

The IE RateMatchPatternLTE-CRS is used to configure a pattern to rate match around LTE CRS. See TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.2.

RateMatchPatternLTE-CRS information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RATEMATCHPATTERNLTE-CRS-START

RateMatchPatternLTE-CRS ::= SEQUENCE {

carrierFreqDL INTEGER (0..16383),

carrierBandwidthDL ENUMERATED {n6, n15, n25, n50, n75, n100, spare2, spare1},

mbsfn-SubframeConfigList EUTRA-MBSFN-SubframeConfigList OPTIONAL, — Need M

nrofCRS-Ports ENUMERATED {n1, n2, n4},

v-Shift ENUMERATED {n0, n1, n2, n3, n4, n5}

}

— TAG-RATEMATCHPATTERNLTE-CRS-STOP

— ASN1STOP

RateMatchPatternLTE-CRS field descriptions

carrierBandwidthDL

BW of the LTE carrier in number of PRBs (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.2).

carrierFreqDL

Center of the LTE carrier (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.2).

mbsfn-SubframeConfigList

LTE MBSFN subframe configuration (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.2).

nrofCRS-Ports

Number of LTE CRS antenna port to rate-match around (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.2).

v-Shift

Shifting value v-shift in LTE to rate match around LTE CRS (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.2).

RejectWaitTime

The IE RejectWaitTime is used to provide the value in seconds for timer T302.

RejectWaitTime information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-REJECTWAITTIME-START

RejectWaitTime ::= INTEGER (1..16)

— TAG-REJECTWAITTIME-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ReportConfigId

The IE ReportConfigId is used to identify a measurement reporting configuration.

ReportConfigId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-REPORTCONFIGID-START

ReportConfigId ::= INTEGER (1..maxReportConfigId)

— TAG-REPORTCONFIGID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

– ReportConfigInterRAT

The IE ReportConfigInterRAT specifies criteria for triggering of an inter-RAT measurement reporting event. The inter-RAT measurement reporting events for E-UTRA are labelled BN with N equal to 1, 2 and so on.

Event B1: Neighbour becomes better than absolute threshold;

Event B2: PCell becomes worse than absolute threshold1 AND Neighbour becomes better than another absolute threshold2;

ReportConfigInterRAT information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-REPORTCONFIGINTERRAT-START

ReportConfigInterRAT ::= SEQUENCE {

reportType CHOICE {

periodical PeriodicalReportConfigInterRAT,

eventTriggered EventTriggerConfigInterRAT,

reportCGI ReportCGI-EUTRA,

…,

reportSFTD ReportSFTD-EUTRA

}

}

ReportCGI-EUTRA ::= SEQUENCE {

cellForWhichToReportCGI EUTRA-PhysCellId,

}

ReportSFTD-EUTRA ::= SEQUENCE {

reportSFTD-Meas BOOLEAN,

reportRSRP BOOLEAN,

}

EventTriggerConfigInterRAT ::= SEQUENCE {

eventId CHOICE {

eventB1 SEQUENCE {

b1-ThresholdEUTRA MeasTriggerQuantityEUTRA,

reportOnLeave BOOLEAN,

hysteresis Hysteresis,

timeToTrigger TimeToTrigger,

},

eventB2 SEQUENCE {

b2-Threshold1 MeasTriggerQuantity,

b2-Threshold2EUTRA MeasTriggerQuantityEUTRA,

reportOnLeave BOOLEAN,

hysteresis Hysteresis,

timeToTrigger TimeToTrigger,

},

},

rsType NR-RS-Type,

reportInterval ReportInterval,

reportAmount ENUMERATED {r1, r2, r4, r8, r16, r32, r64, infinity},

reportQuantity MeasReportQuantity,

maxReportCells INTEGER (1..maxCellReport),

}

PeriodicalReportConfigInterRAT ::= SEQUENCE {

reportInterval ReportInterval,

reportAmount ENUMERATED {r1, r2, r4, r8, r16, r32, r64, infinity},

reportQuantity MeasReportQuantity,

maxReportCells INTEGER (1..maxCellReport),

}

— TAG-REPORTCONFIGINTERRAT-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ReportConfigInterRAT field descriptions

reportType

Type of the configured measurement report. In (NG)EN-DC and NR-DC, network does not configure report of type ReportCGI-EUTRA for SCG.

EventTriggerConfigInterRAT field descriptions

b2-Threshold1

NR threshold to be used in inter RAT measurement report triggering condition for event B2.

bN-ThresholdEUTRA

E-UTRA threshold value associated with the selected trigger quantity (RSRP, RSRQ, SINR) to be used in inter RAT measurement report triggering condition for event number bN. In the same eventB2, the network configures the same CHOICE name (rsrp, rsrq or sinr) for the MeasTriggerQuantity of the b2-Threshold1 and for the MeasTriggerQuantityEUTRA of the b2-Threshold2EUTRA.

eventId

Choice of inter RAT event triggered reporting criteria.

maxReportCells

Max number of non-serving cells to include in the measurement report.

reportAmount

Number of measurement reports applicable for eventTriggered as well as for periodical report types

reportOnLeave

Indicates whether or not the UE shall initiate the measurement reporting procedure when the leaving condition is met for a cell in cellsTriggeredList, as specified in 5.5.4.1.

reportQuantity

The cell measurement quantities to be included in the measurement report.

timeToTrigger

Time during which specific criteria for the event needs to be met in order to trigger a measurement report.

PeriodicalReportConfigInterRAT field descriptions

maxReportCells

Max number of non-serving cells to include in the measurement report.

reportAmount

Number of measurement reports applicable for eventTriggered as well as for periodical report types

reportQuantity

The cell measurement quantities to be included in the measurement report.

ReportConfigNR

The IE ReportConfigNR specifies criteria for triggering of an NR measurement reporting event. Measurement reporting events are based on cell measurement results, which can either be derived based on SS/PBCH block or CSI-RS. These events are labelled AN with N equal to 1, 2 and so on.

Event A1: Serving becomes better than absolute threshold;

Event A2: Serving becomes worse than absolute threshold;

Event A3: Neighbour becomes amount of offset better than PCell/PSCell;

Event A4: Neighbour becomes better than absolute threshold;

Event A5: PCell/PSCell becomes worse than absolute threshold1 AND Neighbour/SCell becomes better than another absolute threshold2;

Event A6: Neighbour becomes amount of offset better than SCell.

ReportConfigNR information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-REPORTCONFIGNR-START

ReportConfigNR ::= SEQUENCE {

reportType CHOICE {

periodical PeriodicalReportConfig,

eventTriggered EventTriggerConfig,

…,

reportCGI ReportCGI,

reportSFTD ReportSFTD-NR

}

}

ReportCGI ::= SEQUENCE {

cellForWhichToReportCGI PhysCellId,

}

ReportSFTD-NR ::= SEQUENCE {

reportSFTD-Meas BOOLEAN,

reportRSRP BOOLEAN,

…,

[[

reportSFTD-NeighMeas ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL, — Need R

drx-SFTD-NeighMeas ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL, — Need R

cellsForWhichToReportSFTD SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellSFTD)) OF PhysCellId OPTIONAL — Need R

]]

}

EventTriggerConfig::= SEQUENCE {

eventId CHOICE {

eventA1 SEQUENCE {

a1-Threshold MeasTriggerQuantity,

reportOnLeave BOOLEAN,

hysteresis Hysteresis,

timeToTrigger TimeToTrigger

},

eventA2 SEQUENCE {

a2-Threshold MeasTriggerQuantity,

reportOnLeave BOOLEAN,

hysteresis Hysteresis,

timeToTrigger TimeToTrigger

},

eventA3 SEQUENCE {

a3-Offset MeasTriggerQuantityOffset,

reportOnLeave BOOLEAN,

hysteresis Hysteresis,

timeToTrigger TimeToTrigger,

useWhiteCellList BOOLEAN

},

eventA4 SEQUENCE {

a4-Threshold MeasTriggerQuantity,

reportOnLeave BOOLEAN,

hysteresis Hysteresis,

timeToTrigger TimeToTrigger,

useWhiteCellList BOOLEAN

},

eventA5 SEQUENCE {

a5-Threshold1 MeasTriggerQuantity,

a5-Threshold2 MeasTriggerQuantity,

reportOnLeave BOOLEAN,

hysteresis Hysteresis,

timeToTrigger TimeToTrigger,

useWhiteCellList BOOLEAN

},

eventA6 SEQUENCE {

a6-Offset MeasTriggerQuantityOffset,

reportOnLeave BOOLEAN,

hysteresis Hysteresis,

timeToTrigger TimeToTrigger,

useWhiteCellList BOOLEAN

},

},

rsType NR-RS-Type,

reportInterval ReportInterval,

reportAmount ENUMERATED {r1, r2, r4, r8, r16, r32, r64, infinity},

reportQuantityCell MeasReportQuantity,

maxReportCells INTEGER (1..maxCellReport),

reportQuantityRS-Indexes MeasReportQuantity OPTIONAL, — Need R

maxNrofRS-IndexesToReport INTEGER (1..maxNrofIndexesToReport) OPTIONAL, — Need R

includeBeamMeasurements BOOLEAN,

reportAddNeighMeas ENUMERATED {setup} OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

PeriodicalReportConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rsType NR-RS-Type,

reportInterval ReportInterval,

reportAmount ENUMERATED {r1, r2, r4, r8, r16, r32, r64, infinity},

reportQuantityCell MeasReportQuantity,

maxReportCells INTEGER (1..maxCellReport),

reportQuantityRS-Indexes MeasReportQuantity OPTIONAL, — Need R

maxNrofRS-IndexesToReport INTEGER (1..maxNrofIndexesToReport) OPTIONAL, — Need R

includeBeamMeasurements BOOLEAN,

useWhiteCellList BOOLEAN,

}

NR-RS-Type ::= ENUMERATED {ssb, csi-rs}

MeasTriggerQuantity ::= CHOICE {

rsrp RSRP-Range,

rsrq RSRQ-Range,

sinr SINR-Range

}

MeasTriggerQuantityOffset ::= CHOICE {

rsrp INTEGER (-30..30),

rsrq INTEGER (-30..30),

sinr INTEGER (-30..30)

}

MeasReportQuantity ::= SEQUENCE {

rsrp BOOLEAN,

rsrq BOOLEAN,

sinr BOOLEAN

}

— TAG-REPORTCONFIGNR-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ReportConfigNR field descriptions

reportType

Type of the configured measurement report. In MR-DC, network does not configure report of type reportCGI using SRB3.

EventTriggerConfig field descriptions

a3-Offset/a6-Offset

Offset value(s) to be used in NR measurement report triggering condition for event a3/a6. The actual value is field value * 0.5 dB.

aN-ThresholdM

Threshold value associated to the selected trigger quantity (e.g. RSRP, RSRQ, SINR) per RS Type (e.g. SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS) to be used in NR measurement report triggering condition for event number aN. If multiple thresholds are defined for event number aN, the thresholds are differentiated by M. The network configures aN-Threshold1 only for events A1, A2, A4, A5 and a5-Threshold2 only for event A5. In the same eventA5, the network configures the same quantity for the MeasTriggerQuantity of the a5-Threshold1 and for the MeasTriggerQuantity of the a5-Threshold2.

eventId

Choice of NR event triggered reporting criteria.

maxNrofRS-IndexesToReport

Max number of RS indexes to include in the measurement report for A1-A6 events.

maxReportCells

Max number of non-serving cells to include in the measurement report.

reportAddNeighMeas

Indicates that the UE shall include the best neighbour cells per serving frequency.

reportAmount

Number of measurement reports applicable for eventTriggered as well as for periodical report types.

reportOnLeave

Indicates whether or not the UE shall initiate the measurement reporting procedure when the leaving condition is met for a cell in cellsTriggeredList, as specified in 5.5.4.1.

reportQuantityCell

The cell measurement quantities to be included in the measurement report.

reportQuantityRS-Indexes

Indicates which measurement information per RS index the UE shall include in the measurement report.

timeToTrigger

Time during which specific criteria for the event needs to be met in order to trigger a measurement report.

useWhiteCellList

Indicates whether only the cells included in the white-list of the associated measObject are applicable as specified in 5.5.4.1.

PeriodicalReportConfig field descriptions

maxNrofRS-IndexesToReport

Max number of RS indexes to include in the measurement report.

maxReportCells

Max number of non-serving cells to include in the measurement report.

reportAmount

Number of measurement reports applicable for eventTriggered as well as for periodical report types

reportQuantityCell

The cell measurement quantities to be included in the measurement report.

reportQuantityRS-Indexes

Indicates which measurement information per RS index the UE shall include in the measurement report.

useWhiteCellList

Indicates whether only the cells included in the white-list of the associated measObject are applicable as specified in 5.5.4.1.

ReportSFTD-NR field descriptions

cellForWhichToReportSFTD

Indicates the target NR neighbour cells for SFTD measurement between PCell and NR neighbour cells.

drx-SFTD-NeighMeas

Indicates that the UE shall use available idle periods (i.e. DRX off periods) for the SFTD measurement in NR standalone. The network only includes drx-SFTD-NeighMeas field when reprtSFTD-NeighMeas is set to true.

reportSFTD-Meas

Indicates whether UE is required to perform SFTD measurement between PCell and NR PSCell in NR-DC.

reportSFTD-NeighMeas

Indicates whether UE is required to perform SFTD measurement between PCell and NR neighbour cells in NR standalone. The network does not include this field if reportSFTD-Meas is set to true.

reportRSRP

Indicates whether UE is required to include RSRP result of NR PSCell or NR neighbour cells in SFTD measurement result, derived based on SSB. If it is set to true, the network should ensure that ssb-ConfigMobility is included in the measurement object for NR PSCell or NR neighbour cells.

ReportConfigToAddModList

The IE ReportConfigToAddModList concerns a list of reporting configurations to add or modify.

ReportConfigToAddModList information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-REPORTCONFIGTOADDMODLIST-START

ReportConfigToAddModList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxReportConfigId)) OF ReportConfigToAddMod

ReportConfigToAddMod ::= SEQUENCE {

reportConfigId ReportConfigId,

reportConfig CHOICE {

reportConfigNR ReportConfigNR,

…,

reportConfigInterRAT ReportConfigInterRAT

}

}

— TAG-REPORTCONFIGTOADDMODLIST-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ReportInterval

The IE ReportInterval indicates the interval between periodical reports. The ReportInterval is applicable if the UE performs periodical reporting (i.e. when reportAmount exceeds 1), for triggerTypeevent as well as for triggerTypeperiodical. Value ms120 corresponds to 120 ms, value ms240 corresponds to 240 ms and so on, while value min1 corresponds to 1 min, min6 corresponds to 6 min and so on.

ReportInterval information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-REPORTINTERVAL-START

ReportInterval ::= ENUMERATED {ms120, ms240, ms480, ms640, ms1024, ms2048, ms5120, ms10240, ms20480, ms40960,

min1,min6, min12, min30 }

— TAG-REPORTINTERVAL-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ReselectionThreshold

The IE ReselectionThreshold is used to indicate an Rx level threshold for cell reselection. Actual value of threshold = field value * 2 [dB].

ReselectionThreshold information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RESELECTIONTHRESHOLD-START

ReselectionThreshold ::= INTEGER (0..31)

— TAG-RESELECTIONTHRESHOLD-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ReselectionThresholdQ

The IE ReselectionThresholdQ is used to indicate a quality level threshold for cell reselection. Actual value of threshold = field value [dB].

ReselectionThresholdQ information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RESELECTIONTHRESHOLDQ-START

ReselectionThresholdQ ::= INTEGER (0..31)

— TAG-RESELECTIONTHRESHOLDQ-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ResumeCause

The IE ResumeCause is used to indicate the resume cause in RRCResumeRequest and RRCResumeRequest1.

ResumeCause information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RESUMECAUSE-START

ResumeCause ::= ENUMERATED {emergency, highPriorityAccess, mt-Access, mo-Signalling,

mo-Data, mo-VoiceCall, mo-VideoCall, mo-SMS, rna-Update, mps-PriorityAccess,

mcs-PriorityAccess, spare1, spare2, spare3, spare4, spare5 }

— TAG-RESUMECAUSE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

RLC-BearerConfig

The IE RLC-BearerConfig is used to configure an RLC entity, a corresponding logical channel in MAC and the linking to a PDCP entity (served radio bearer).

RLC-BearerConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RLC-BEARERCONFIG-START

RLC-BearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

logicalChannelIdentity LogicalChannelIdentity,

servedRadioBearer CHOICE {

srb-Identity SRB-Identity,

drb-Identity DRB-Identity

} OPTIONAL, — Cond LCH-SetupOnly

reestablishRLC ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL, — Need N

rlc-Config RLC-Config OPTIONAL, — Cond LCH-Setup

mac-LogicalChannelConfig LogicalChannelConfig OPTIONAL, — Cond LCH-Setup

}

— TAG-RLC-BEARERCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

RLC-BearerConfig field descriptions

logicalChannelIdentity

ID used commonly for the MAC logical channel and for the RLC bearer.

reestablishRLC

Indicates that RLC should be re-established. Network sets this to true at least whenever the security key used for the radio bearer associated with this RLC entity changes. For SRB2 and DRBs, unless full configuration is used, it is also set to true during the resumption of the RRC connection or the first reconfiguration after reestablishment. For SRB1, when resuming an RRC connection, or at the first reconfiguration after RRC connection reestablishment, the network does not set this field to true.

rlc-Config

Determines the RLC mode (UM, AM) and provides corresponding parameters. RLC mode reconfiguration can only be performed by DRB release/addition or full configuration.

servedRadioBearer

Associates the RLC Bearer with an SRB or a DRB. The UE shall deliver DL RLC SDUs received via the RLC entity of this RLC bearer to the PDCP entity of the servedRadioBearer. Furthermore, the UE shall advertise and deliver uplink PDCP PDUs of the uplink PDCP entity of the servedRadioBearer to the uplink RLC entity of this RLC bearer unless the uplink scheduling restrictions (moreThanOneRLC in PDCP-Config and the restrictions in LogicalChannelConfig) forbid it to do so.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

LCH-Setup

This field is mandatory present upon creation of a new logical channel for a DRB. This field is optionally present, Need S, upon creation of a new logical channel for an SRB. It is optionally present, Need M, otherwise.

LCH-SetupOnly

This field is mandatory present upon creation of a new logical channel. It is absent, Need M otherwise.

RLC-Config

The IE RLC-Config is used to specify the RLC configuration of SRBs and DRBs.

RLC-Config information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RLC-CONFIG-START

RLC-Config ::= CHOICE {

am SEQUENCE {

ul-AM-RLC UL-AM-RLC,

dl-AM-RLC DL-AM-RLC

},

um-Bi-Directional SEQUENCE {

ul-UM-RLC UL-UM-RLC,

dl-UM-RLC DL-UM-RLC

},

um-Uni-Directional-UL SEQUENCE {

ul-UM-RLC UL-UM-RLC

},

um-Uni-Directional-DL SEQUENCE {

dl-UM-RLC DL-UM-RLC

},

}

UL-AM-RLC ::= SEQUENCE {

sn-FieldLength SN-FieldLengthAM OPTIONAL, — Cond Reestab

t-PollRetransmit T-PollRetransmit,

pollPDU PollPDU,

pollByte PollByte,

maxRetxThreshold ENUMERATED { t1, t2, t3, t4, t6, t8, t16, t32 }

}

DL-AM-RLC ::= SEQUENCE {

sn-FieldLength SN-FieldLengthAM OPTIONAL, — Cond Reestab

t-Reassembly T-Reassembly,

t-StatusProhibit T-StatusProhibit

}

UL-UM-RLC ::= SEQUENCE {

sn-FieldLength SN-FieldLengthUM OPTIONAL — Cond Reestab

}

DL-UM-RLC ::= SEQUENCE {

sn-FieldLength SN-FieldLengthUM OPTIONAL, — Cond Reestab

t-Reassembly T-Reassembly

}

T-PollRetransmit ::= ENUMERATED {

ms5, ms10, ms15, ms20, ms25, ms30, ms35,

ms40, ms45, ms50, ms55, ms60, ms65, ms70,

ms75, ms80, ms85, ms90, ms95, ms100, ms105,

ms110, ms115, ms120, ms125, ms130, ms135,

ms140, ms145, ms150, ms155, ms160, ms165,

ms170, ms175, ms180, ms185, ms190, ms195,

ms200, ms205, ms210, ms215, ms220, ms225,

ms230, ms235, ms240, ms245, ms250, ms300,

ms350, ms400, ms450, ms500, ms800, ms1000,

ms2000, ms4000, spare5, spare4, spare3,

spare2, spare1}

PollPDU ::= ENUMERATED {

p4, p8, p16, p32, p64, p128, p256, p512, p1024, p2048, p4096, p6144, p8192, p12288, p16384,p20480,

p24576, p28672, p32768, p40960, p49152, p57344, p65536, infinity, spare8, spare7, spare6, spare5, spare4,

spare3, spare2, spare1}

PollByte ::= ENUMERATED {

kB1, kB2, kB5, kB8, kB10, kB15, kB25, kB50, kB75,

kB100, kB125, kB250, kB375, kB500, kB750, kB1000,

kB1250, kB1500, kB2000, kB3000, kB4000, kB4500,

kB5000, kB5500, kB6000, kB6500, kB7000, kB7500,

mB8, mB9, mB10, mB11, mB12, mB13, mB14, mB15,

mB16, mB17, mB18, mB20, mB25, mB30, mB40, infinity,

spare20, spare19, spare18, spare17, spare16,

spare15, spare14, spare13, spare12, spare11,

spare10, spare9, spare8, spare7, spare6, spare5,

spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1}

T-Reassembly ::= ENUMERATED {

ms0, ms5, ms10, ms15, ms20, ms25, ms30, ms35,

ms40, ms45, ms50, ms55, ms60, ms65, ms70,

ms75, ms80, ms85, ms90, ms95, ms100, ms110,

ms120, ms130, ms140, ms150, ms160, ms170,

ms180, ms190, ms200, spare1}

T-StatusProhibit ::= ENUMERATED {

ms0, ms5, ms10, ms15, ms20, ms25, ms30, ms35,

ms40, ms45, ms50, ms55, ms60, ms65, ms70,

ms75, ms80, ms85, ms90, ms95, ms100, ms105,

ms110, ms115, ms120, ms125, ms130, ms135,

ms140, ms145, ms150, ms155, ms160, ms165,

ms170, ms175, ms180, ms185, ms190, ms195,

ms200, ms205, ms210, ms215, ms220, ms225,

ms230, ms235, ms240, ms245, ms250, ms300,

ms350, ms400, ms450, ms500, ms800, ms1000,

ms1200, ms1600, ms2000, ms2400, spare2, spare1}

SN-FieldLengthUM ::= ENUMERATED {size6, size12}

SN-FieldLengthAM ::= ENUMERATED {size12, size18}

— TAG-RLC-CONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

RLC-Config field descriptions

maxRetxThreshold

Parameter for RLC AM in TS 38.322 [4]. Value t1 corresponds to 1 retransmission, value t2 corresponds to 2 retransmissions and so on.

pollByte

Parameter for RLC AM in TS 38.322 [4]. Value kB25 corresponds to 25 kBytes, value kB50 corresponds to 50 kBytes and so on. infinity corresponds to an infinite amount of kBytes.

pollPDU

Parameter for RLC AM in TS 38.322 [4]. Value p4 corresponds to 4 PDUs, value p8 corresponds to 8 PDUs and so on. infinity corresponds to an infinite number of PDUs.

sn-FieldLength

Indicates the RLC SN field size, see TS 38.322 [4], in bits. Value size6 means 6 bits, value size12 means 12 bits, value size18 means 18 bits. The value of sn-FieldLength for a DRB shall be changed only using reconfiguration with sync. The network configures only value size12 in SN-FieldLengthAM for SRB.

t-PollRetransmit

Timer for RLC AM in TS 38.322 [4], in milliseconds. Value ms5 means 5 ms, value ms10 means 10 ms and so on.

t-Reassembly

Timer for reassembly in TS 38.322 [4], in milliseconds. Value ms0 means 0 ms, value ms5 means 5 ms and so on.

t-StatusProhibit

Timer for status reporting in TS 38.322 [4], in milliseconds. Value ms0 means 0 ms, value ms5 means 5 ms and so on.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

Reestab

The field is mandatory present at bearer setup. It is optionally present, need M, at RLC re-establishment. Otherwise it is absent. Need M.

RLF-TimersAndConstants

The IE RLF-TimersAndConstants is used to configure UE specific timers and constants.

RLF-TimersAndConstants information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RLF-TIMERSANDCONSTANTS-START

RLF-TimersAndConstants ::= SEQUENCE {

t310 ENUMERATED {ms0, ms50, ms100, ms200, ms500, ms1000, ms2000, ms4000, ms6000},

n310 ENUMERATED {n1, n2, n3, n4, n6, n8, n10, n20},

n311 ENUMERATED {n1, n2, n3, n4, n5, n6, n8, n10},

…,

[[

t311 ENUMERATED {ms1000, ms3000, ms5000, ms10000, ms15000, ms20000, ms30000}

]]

}

— TAG-RLF-TIMERSANDCONSTANTS-STOP

— ASN1STOP

RLF-TimersAndConstants field descriptions

n3xy

Constants are described in clause 7.3. Value n1 corresponds to 1, value n2 corresponds to 2 and so on.

t3xy

Timers are described in clause 7.1. Value ms0 corresponds to 0 ms, value ms50 corresponds to 50 ms and so on.

RNTI-Value

The IE RNTI-Value represents a Radio Network Temporary Identity.

RNTI-Value information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RNTI-VALUE-START

RNTI-Value ::= INTEGER (0..65535)

— TAG-RNTI-VALUE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

RSRP-Range

The IE RSRP-Range specifies the value range used in RSRP measurements and thresholds. For measurements, integer value for RSRP measurements is according to Table 10.1.6.1-1 in TS 38.133 [14]. For thresholds, the actual value is (IE value – 156) dBm, except for the IE value 127, in which case the actual value is infinity.

RSRP-Range information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RSRP-RANGE-START

RSRP-Range ::= INTEGER(0..127)

— TAG-RSRP-RANGE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

RSRQ-Range

The IE RSRQ-Range specifies the value range used in RSRQ measurements and thresholds. For measurements, integer value for RSRQ measurements is according to Table 10.1.11.1-1 in TS 38.133 [14]. For thresholds, the actual value is (IE value – 87) / 2 dB.

RSRQ-Range information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-RSRQ-RANGE-START

RSRQ-Range ::= INTEGER(0..127)

— TAG-RSRQ-RANGE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SCellIndex

The IE SCellIndex concerns a short identity, used to identify an SCell. The value range is shared across the Cell Groups.

SCellIndex information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SCELLINDEX-START

SCellIndex ::= INTEGER (1..31)

— TAG-SCELLINDEX-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SchedulingRequestConfig

The IE SchedulingRequestConfig is used to configure the parameters, for the dedicated scheduling request (SR) resources.

SchedulingRequestConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SCHEDULINGREQUESTCONFIG-START

SchedulingRequestConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

schedulingRequestToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSR-ConfigPerCellGroup)) OF SchedulingRequestToAddMod

OPTIONAL, — Need N

schedulingRequestToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSR-ConfigPerCellGroup)) OF SchedulingRequestId

OPTIONAL — Need N

}

SchedulingRequestToAddMod ::= SEQUENCE {

schedulingRequestId SchedulingRequestId,

sr-ProhibitTimer ENUMERATED {ms1, ms2, ms4, ms8, ms16, ms32, ms64, ms128} OPTIONAL, — Need S

sr-TransMax ENUMERATED { n4, n8, n16, n32, n64, spare3, spare2, spare1}

}

— TAG-SCHEDULINGREQUESTCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SchedulingRequestConfig field descriptions

schedulingRequestToAddModList

List of Scheduling Request configurations to add or modify.

schedulingRequestToReleaseList

List of Scheduling Request configurations to release.

SchedulingRequestToAddMod field descriptions

schedulingRequestId

Used to modify a SR configuration and to indicate, in LogicalChannelConfig, the SR configuration to which a logical channel is mapped and to indicate, in SchedulingRequestresourceConfig, the SR configuration for which a scheduling request resource is used.

sr-ProhibitTimer

Timer for SR transmission on PUCCH in TS 38.321 [3]. Value is in ms. Value ms1 corresponds to 1ms, value ms2 corresponds to 2ms, and so on. When the field is absent, the UE applies the value 0.

sr-TransMax

Maximum number of SR transmissions as described in TS 38.321 [3]. Value n4 corresponds to 4, value n8 corresponds to 8, and so on.

SchedulingRequestId

The IE SchedulingRequestId is used to identify a Scheduling Request instance in the MAC layer.

SchedulingRequestId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SCHEDULINGREQUESTID-START

SchedulingRequestId ::= INTEGER (0..7)

— TAG-SCHEDULINGREQUESTID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SchedulingRequestResourceConfig

The IE SchedulingRequestResourceConfig determines physical layer resources on PUCCH where the UE may send the dedicated scheduling request (D-SR) (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.4).

SchedulingRequestResourceConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SCHEDULINGREQUESTRESOURCECONFIG-START

SchedulingRequestResourceConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

schedulingRequestResourceId SchedulingRequestResourceId,

schedulingRequestID SchedulingRequestId,

periodicityAndOffset CHOICE {

sym2 NULL,

sym6or7 NULL,

sl1 NULL, — Recurs in every slot

sl2 INTEGER (0..1),

sl4 INTEGER (0..3),

sl5 INTEGER (0..4),

sl8 INTEGER (0..7),

sl10 INTEGER (0..9),

sl16 INTEGER (0..15),

sl20 INTEGER (0..19),

sl40 INTEGER (0..39),

sl80 INTEGER (0..79),

sl160 INTEGER (0..159),

sl320 INTEGER (0..319),

sl640 INTEGER (0..639)

} OPTIONAL, — Need M

resource PUCCH-ResourceId OPTIONAL — Need M

}

— TAG-SCHEDULINGREQUESTRESOURCECONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SchedulingRequestResourceConfig field descriptions

periodicityAndOffset

SR periodicity and offset in number of symbols or slots (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.4) The following periodicities may be configured depending on the chosen subcarrier spacing:

SCS = 15 kHz: 2sym, 7sym, 1sl, 2sl, 4sl, 5sl, 8sl, 10sl, 16sl, 20sl, 40sl, 80sl

SCS = 30 kHz: 2sym, 7sym, 1sl, 2sl, 4sl, 8sl, 10sl, 16sl, 20sl, 40sl, 80sl, 160sl

SCS = 60 kHz: 2sym, 7sym/6sym, 1sl, 2sl, 4sl, 8sl, 16sl, 20sl, 40sl, 80sl, 160sl, 320sl

SCS = 120 kHz: 2sym, 7sym, 1sl, 2sl, 4sl, 8sl, 16sl, 40sl, 80sl, 160sl, 320sl, 640sl

sym6or7 corresponds to 6 symbols if extended cyclic prefix and a SCS of 60 kHz are configured, otherwise it corresponds to 7 symbols.

For periodicities 2sym, 7sym and sl1 the UE assumes an offset of 0 slots.

resource

ID of the PUCCH resource in which the UE shall send the scheduling request. The actual PUCCH-Resource is configured in PUCCH-Config of the same UL BWP and serving cell as this SchedulingRequestResourceConfig. The network configures a PUCCH-Resource of PUCCH-format0 or PUCCH-format1 (other formats not supported) (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.4)

schedulingRequestID

The ID of the SchedulingRequestConfig that uses this scheduling request resource.

SchedulingRequestResourceId

The IE SchedulingRequestResourceId is used to identify scheduling request resources on PUCCH.

SchedulingRequestResourceId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SCHEDULINGREQUESTRESOURCEID-START

SchedulingRequestResourceId ::= INTEGER (1..maxNrofSR-Resources)

— TAG-SCHEDULINGREQUESTRESOURCEID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ScramblingId

The IE ScramblingID is used for scrambling channels and reference signals.

ScramblingId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SCRAMBLINGID-START

ScramblingId ::= INTEGER(0..1023)

— TAG-SCRAMBLINGID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SCS-SpecificCarrier

The IE SCS-SpecificCarrier provides parameters determining the location and width of the actual carrier or the carrier bandwidth. It is defined specifically for a numerology (subcarrier spacing (SCS)) and in relation (frequency offset) to Point A.

SCS-SpecificCarrier information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SCS-SPECIFICCARRIER-START

SCS-SpecificCarrier ::= SEQUENCE {

offsetToCarrier INTEGER (0..2199),

subcarrierSpacing SubcarrierSpacing,

carrierBandwidth INTEGER (1..maxNrofPhysicalResourceBlocks),

…,

[[

txDirectCurrentLocation INTEGER (0..4095) OPTIONAL — Need S

]]

}

— TAG-SCS-SPECIFICCARRIER-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SCS-SpecificCarrier field descriptions

carrierBandwidth

Width of this carrier in number of PRBs (using the subcarrierSpacing defined for this carrier) (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 4.4.2).

offsetToCarrier

Offset in frequency domain between Point A (lowest subcarrier of common RB 0) and the lowest usable subcarrier on this carrier in number of PRBs (using the subcarrierSpacing defined for this carrier). The maximum value corresponds to 275*8-1. See TS 38.211 [16], clause 4.4.2.

txDirectCurrentLocation

Indicates the downlink Tx Direct Current location for the carrier. A value in the range 0..3299 indicates the subcarrier index within the carrier. The values in the value range 3301..4095 are reserved and ignored by the UE. If this field is absent for downlink within ServingCellConfigCommon and ServingCellConfigCommonSIB, the UE assumes the default value of 3300 (i.e. "Outside the carrier"). (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 4.4.2). Network does not configure this field via ServingCellConfig or for uplink carriers.

subcarrierSpacing

Subcarrier spacing of this carrier. It is used to convert the offsetToCarrier into an actual frequency. Only the values 15 kHz, 30 kHz or 60 kHz (FR1), and 60 kHz or 120 kHz (FR2) are applicable.

SDAP-Config

The IE SDAP-Config is used to set the configurable SDAP parameters for a data radio bearer. All configured instances of SDAP-Config with the same value of pdu-Session correspond to the same SDAP entity as specified in TS 37.324 [24].

SDAP-Config information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SDAP-CONFIG-START

SDAP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

pdu-Session PDU-SessionID,

sdap-HeaderDL ENUMERATED {present, absent},

sdap-HeaderUL ENUMERATED {present, absent},

defaultDRB BOOLEAN,

mappedQoS-FlowsToAdd SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofQFIs)) OF QFI OPTIONAL, — Need N

mappedQoS-FlowsToRelease SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofQFIs)) OF QFI OPTIONAL, — Need N

}

QFI ::= INTEGER (0..maxQFI)

PDU-SessionID ::= INTEGER (0..255)

— TAG-SDAP-CONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SDAP-Config field descriptions

defaultDRB

Indicates whether or not this is the default DRB for this PDU session. Among all configured instances of SDAP-Config with the same value of pdu-Session, this field shall be set to true in at most one instance of SDAP-Config and to false in all other instances.

mappedQoS-FlowsToAdd

Indicates the list of QFIs of UL QoS flows of the PDU session to be additionally mapped to this DRB. A QFI value can be included at most once in all configured instances of SDAP-Config with the same value of pdu-Session. For QoS flow remapping, the QFI value of the remapped QoS flow is only included in mappedQoS-FlowsToAdd in sdap-Config corresponding to the new DRB and not included in mappedQoS-FlowsToRelease in sdap-Config corresponding to the old DRB.

mappedQoS-FlowsToRelease

Indicates the list of QFIs of QoS flows of the PDU session to be released from existing QoS flow to DRB mapping of this DRB.

pdu-Session

Identity of the PDU session whose QoS flows are mapped to the DRB.

sdap-HeaderUL

Indicates whether or not a SDAP header is present for UL data on this DRB. The field cannot be changed after a DRB is established. The network sets this field to present if the field defaultDRB is set to true.

sdap-HeaderDL

Indicates whether or not a SDAP header is present for DL data on this DRB. The field cannot be changed after a DRB is established.

SearchSpace

The IE SearchSpace defines how/where to search for PDCCH candidates. Each search space is associated with one ControlResourceSet. For a scheduled cell in the case of cross carrier scheduling, except for nrofCandidates, all the optional fields are absent (regardless of their presence conditions).

SearchSpace information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SEARCHSPACE-START

SearchSpace ::= SEQUENCE {

searchSpaceId SearchSpaceId,

controlResourceSetId ControlResourceSetId OPTIONAL, — Cond SetupOnly

monitoringSlotPeriodicityAndOffset CHOICE {

sl1 NULL,

sl2 INTEGER (0..1),

sl4 INTEGER (0..3),

sl5 INTEGER (0..4),

sl8 INTEGER (0..7),

sl10 INTEGER (0..9),

sl16 INTEGER (0..15),

sl20 INTEGER (0..19),

sl40 INTEGER (0..39),

sl80 INTEGER (0..79),

sl160 INTEGER (0..159),

sl320 INTEGER (0..319),

sl640 INTEGER (0..639),

sl1280 INTEGER (0..1279),

sl2560 INTEGER (0..2559)

} OPTIONAL, — Cond Setup

duration INTEGER (2..2559) OPTIONAL, — Need R

monitoringSymbolsWithinSlot BIT STRING (SIZE (14)) OPTIONAL, — Cond Setup

nrofCandidates SEQUENCE {

aggregationLevel1 ENUMERATED {n0, n1, n2, n3, n4, n5, n6, n8},

aggregationLevel2 ENUMERATED {n0, n1, n2, n3, n4, n5, n6, n8},

aggregationLevel4 ENUMERATED {n0, n1, n2, n3, n4, n5, n6, n8},

aggregationLevel8 ENUMERATED {n0, n1, n2, n3, n4, n5, n6, n8},

aggregationLevel16 ENUMERATED {n0, n1, n2, n3, n4, n5, n6, n8}

} OPTIONAL, — Cond Setup

searchSpaceType CHOICE {

common SEQUENCE {

dci-Format0-0-AndFormat1-0 SEQUENCE {

} OPTIONAL, — Need R

dci-Format2-0 SEQUENCE {

nrofCandidates-SFI SEQUENCE {

aggregationLevel1 ENUMERATED {n1, n2} OPTIONAL, — Need R

aggregationLevel2 ENUMERATED {n1, n2} OPTIONAL, — Need R

aggregationLevel4 ENUMERATED {n1, n2} OPTIONAL, — Need R

aggregationLevel8 ENUMERATED {n1, n2} OPTIONAL, — Need R

aggregationLevel16 ENUMERATED {n1, n2} OPTIONAL — Need R

},

} OPTIONAL, — Need R

dci-Format2-1 SEQUENCE {

} OPTIONAL, — Need R

dci-Format2-2 SEQUENCE {

} OPTIONAL, — Need R

dci-Format2-3 SEQUENCE {

dummy1 ENUMERATED {sl1, sl2, sl4, sl5, sl8, sl10, sl16, sl20} OPTIONAL, — Cond Setup

dummy2 ENUMERATED {n1, n2},

} OPTIONAL — Need R

},

ue-Specific SEQUENCE {

dci-Formats ENUMERATED {formats0-0-And-1-0, formats0-1-And-1-1},

}

} OPTIONAL — Cond Setup

}

— TAG-SEARCHSPACE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SearchSpace field descriptions

common

Configures this search space as common search space (CSS) and DCI formats to monitor.

controlResourceSetId

The CORESET applicable for this SearchSpace. Value 0 identifies the common CORESET#0 configured in MIB and in ServingCellConfigCommon. Values 1..maxNrofControlResourceSets-1 identify CORESETs configured in System Information or by dedicated signalling. The CORESETs with non-zero controlResourceSetId are configured in the same BWP as this SearchSpace.

dummy1, dummy2

This field is not used in the specification. If received it shall be ignored by the UE.

dci-Format0-0-AndFormat1-0

If configured, the UE monitors the DCI formats 0_0 and 1_0 according to TS 38.213 [13], clause 10.1.

dci-Format2-0

If configured, UE monitors the DCI format 2_0 according to TS 38.213 [13], clause 10.1, 11.1.1.

dci-Format2-1

If configured, UE monitors the DCI format 2_1 according to TS 38.213 [13], clause 10.1, 11.2.

dci-Format2-2

If configured, UE monitors the DCI format 2_2 according to TS 38.213 [13], clause 10.1, 11.3.

dci-Format2-3

If configured, UE monitors the DCI format 2_3 according to TS 38.213 [13], clause 10.1, 11.4

dci-Formats

Indicates whether the UE monitors in this USS for DCI formats 0-0 and 1-0 or for formats 0-1 and 1-1.

duration

Number of consecutive slots that a SearchSpace lasts in every occasion, i.e., upon every period as given in the periodicityAndOffset. If the field is absent, the UE applies the value 1 slot, except for DCI format 2_0. The UE ignores this field for DCI format 2_0. The maximum valid duration is periodicity-1 (periodicity as given in the monitoringSlotPeriodicityAndOffset).

monitoringSlotPeriodicityAndOffset

Slots for PDCCH Monitoring configured as periodicity and offset. If the UE is configured to monitor DCI format 2_1, only the values ‘sl1’, ‘sl2’ or ‘sl4’ are applicable. If the UE is configured to monitor DCI format 2_0, only the values ′sl1′, ′sl2′, ′sl4′, ′sl5′, ′sl8′, ′sl10′, ′sl16′, and ′sl20′ are applicable (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 10).

monitoringSymbolsWithinSlot

The first symbol(s) for PDCCH monitoring in the slots configured for PDCCH monitoring (see monitoringSlotPeriodicityAndOffset and duration). The most significant (left) bit represents the first OFDM in a slot, and the second most significant (left) bit represents the second OFDM symbol in a slot and so on. The bit(s) set to one identify the first OFDM symbol(s) of the control resource set within a slot. If the cyclic prefix of the BWP is set to extended CP, the last two bits within the bit string shall be ignored by the UE .

For DCI format 2_0, the first one symbol applies if the duration of CORESET (in the IE ControlResourceSet) identified by controlResourceSetId indicates 3 symbols, the first two symbols apply if the duration of CORESET identified by controlResourceSetId indicates 2 symbols, and the first three symbols apply if the duration of CORESET identified by controlResourceSetId indicates 1 symbol.

See TS 38.213 [13], clause 10.

nrofCandidates-SFI

The number of PDCCH candidates specifically for format 2-0 for the configured aggregation level. If an aggregation level is absent, the UE does not search for any candidates with that aggregation level. The network configures only one aggregationLevel and the corresponding number of candidates (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1.1).

nrofCandidates

Number of PDCCH candidates per aggregation level. The number of candidates and aggregation levels configured here applies to all formats unless a particular value is specified or a format-specific value is provided (see inside searchSpaceType). If configured in the SearchSpace of a cross carrier scheduled cell, this field determines the number of candidates and aggregation levels to be used on the linked scheduling cell (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 10).

searchSpaceId

Identity of the search space. SearchSpaceId = 0 identifies the searchSpaceZero configured via PBCH (MIB) or ServingCellConfigCommon and may hence not be used in the SearchSpace IE. The searchSpaceId is unique among the BWPs of a Serving Cell. In case of cross carrier scheduling, search spaces with the same searchSpaceId in scheduled cell and scheduling cell are linked to each other. The UE applies the search space for the scheduled cell only if the DL BWPs in which the linked search spaces are configured in scheduling cell and scheduled cell are both active.

searchSpaceType

Indicates whether this is a common search space (present) or a UE specific search space as well as DCI formats to monitor for.

ue-Specific

Configures this search space as UE specific search space (USS). The UE monitors the DCI format with CRC scrambled by C-RNTI, CS-RNTI (if configured), and SP-CSI-RNTI (if configured)

Conditional Presence

Explanation

Setup

This field is mandatory present upon creation of a new SearchSpace. It is optionally present, Need M, otherwise.

SetupOnly

This field is mandatory present upon creation of a new SearchSpace. It is absent, Need M, otherwise.

SearchSpaceId

The IE SearchSpaceId is used to identify Search Spaces. The ID space is used across the BWPs of a Serving Cell. The search space with the SearchSpaceId = 0 identifies the search space configured via PBCH (MIB) and in ServingCellConfigCommon (searchSpaceZero). The number of Search Spaces per BWP is limited to 10 including the common and UE specific Search Spaces.

SearchSpaceId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SEARCHSPACEID-START

SearchSpaceId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofSearchSpaces-1)

— TAG-SEARCHSPACEID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SearchSpaceZero

The IE SearchSpaceZero is used to configure SearchSpace#0 of the initial BWP (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 13).

SearchSpaceZero information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SEARCHSPACEZERO-START

SearchSpaceZero ::= INTEGER (0..15)

— TAG-SEARCHSPACEZERO-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SecurityAlgorithmConfig

The IE SecurityAlgorithmConfig is used to configure AS integrity protection algorithm and AS ciphering algorithm for SRBs and DRBs.

SecurityAlgorithmConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SECURITYALGORITHMCONFIG-START

SecurityAlgorithmConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

cipheringAlgorithm CipheringAlgorithm,

integrityProtAlgorithm IntegrityProtAlgorithm OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

IntegrityProtAlgorithm ::= ENUMERATED {

nia0, nia1, nia2, nia3, spare4, spare3,

spare2, spare1, …}

CipheringAlgorithm ::= ENUMERATED {

nea0, nea1, nea2, nea3, spare4, spare3,

spare2, spare1, …}

— TAG-SECURITYALGORITHMCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SecurityAlgorithmConfig field descriptions

cipheringAlgorithm

Indicates the ciphering algorithm to be used for SRBs and DRBs, as specified in TS 33.501 [11]. The algorithms nea0nea3 are identical to the LTE algorithms eea0-3. The algorithms configured for all bearers using master key shall be the same, and the algorithms configured for all bearers using secondary key, if any, shall be the same. If UE is connected to E-UTRA/EPC, this field indicates the ciphering algorithm to be used for RBs configured with NR PDCP, as specified in TS 33.501 [11].

integrityProtAlgorithm

Indicates the integrity protection algorithm to be used for SRBs and DRBs, as specified in TS 33.501 [11]. The algorithms nia0-nia3 are identical to the E-UTRA algorithms eia0-3. The algorithms configured for all bearers using master key shall be the same and the algorithms configured for all bearers using secondary key, if any, shall be the same. The network does not configure nia0 except for unauthenticated emergency sessions for unauthenticated UEs in LSM (limited service mode).

If UE is connected to E-UTRA/EPC, this field indicates the integrity protection algorithm to be used for SRBs configured with NR PDCP, as specified in TS 33.501 [11]. The network does not configure nia0 for SRB3.

ServCellIndex

The IE ServCellIndex concerns a short identity, used to uniquely identify a serving cell (i.e. the PCell, the PSCell or an SCell) across the cell groups. Value 0 applies for the PCell, while the SCellIndex that has previously been assigned applies for SCells.

ServCellIndex information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SERVCELLINDEX-START

ServCellIndex ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofServingCells-1)

— TAG-SERVCELLINDEX-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ServingCellConfig

The IE ServingCellConfig is used to configure (add or modify) the UE with a serving cell, which may be the SpCell or an SCell of an MCG or SCG. The parameters herein are mostly UE specific but partly also cell specific (e.g. in additionally configured bandwidth parts). Reconfiguration between a PUCCH and PUCCHless SCell is only supported using an SCell release and add.

ServingCellConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SERVINGCELLCONFIG-START

ServingCellConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationDedicated TDD-UL-DL-ConfigDedicated OPTIONAL, — Cond TDD

initialDownlinkBWP BWP-DownlinkDedicated OPTIONAL, — Need M

downlinkBWP-ToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofBWPs)) OF BWP-Id OPTIONAL, — Need N

downlinkBWP-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofBWPs)) OF BWP-Downlink OPTIONAL, — Need N

firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id BWP-Id OPTIONAL, — Cond SyncAndCellAdd

bwp-InactivityTimer ENUMERATED {ms2, ms3, ms4, ms5, ms6, ms8, ms10, ms20, ms30,

ms40,ms50, ms60, ms80,ms100, ms200,ms300, ms500,

ms750, ms1280, ms1920, ms2560, spare10, spare9, spare8,

spare7, spare6, spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1 } OPTIONAL, –Need R

defaultDownlinkBWP-Id BWP-Id OPTIONAL, — Need S

uplinkConfig UplinkConfig OPTIONAL, — Need M

supplementaryUplink UplinkConfig OPTIONAL, — Need M

pdcch-ServingCellConfig SetupRelease { PDCCH-ServingCellConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

pdsch-ServingCellConfig SetupRelease { PDSCH-ServingCellConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

csi-MeasConfig SetupRelease { CSI-MeasConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

sCellDeactivationTimer ENUMERATED {ms20, ms40, ms80, ms160, ms200, ms240,

ms320, ms400, ms480, ms520, ms640, ms720,

ms840, ms1280, spare2,spare1} OPTIONAL, — Cond ServingCellWithoutPUCCH

crossCarrierSchedulingConfig CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig OPTIONAL, — Need M

tag-Id TAG-Id,

dummy ENUMERATED {enabled} OPTIONAL, — Need R

pathlossReferenceLinking ENUMERATED {spCell, sCell} OPTIONAL, — Cond SCellOnly

servingCellMO MeasObjectId OPTIONAL, — Cond MeasObject

…,

[[

lte-CRS-ToMatchAround SetupRelease { RateMatchPatternLTE-CRS } OPTIONAL, — Need M

rateMatchPatternToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofRateMatchPatterns)) OF RateMatchPattern OPTIONAL, — Need N

rateMatchPatternToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofRateMatchPatterns)) OF RateMatchPatternId OPTIONAL, — Need N

downlinkChannelBW-PerSCS-List SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxSCSs)) OF SCS-SpecificCarrier OPTIONAL — Need S

]]

}

UplinkConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

initialUplinkBWP BWP-UplinkDedicated OPTIONAL, — Need M

uplinkBWP-ToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofBWPs)) OF BWP-Id OPTIONAL, — Need N

uplinkBWP-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofBWPs)) OF BWP-Uplink OPTIONAL, — Need N

firstActiveUplinkBWP-Id BWP-Id OPTIONAL, — Cond SyncAndCellAdd

pusch-ServingCellConfig SetupRelease { PUSCH-ServingCellConfig } OPTIONAL, — Need M

carrierSwitching SetupRelease { SRS-CarrierSwitching } OPTIONAL, — Need M

…,

[[

powerBoostPi2BPSK BOOLEAN OPTIONAL, — Need M

uplinkChannelBW-PerSCS-List SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxSCSs)) OF SCS-SpecificCarrier OPTIONAL — Need S

]]

}

— TAG-SERVINGCELLCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ServingCellConfig field descriptions

bwp-InactivityTimer

The duration in ms after which the UE falls back to the default Bandwidth Part (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.15). When the network releases the timer configuration, the UE stops the timer without switching to the default BWP.

crossCarrierSchedulingConfig

Indicates whether this serving cell is cross-carrier scheduled by another serving cell or whether it cross-carrier schedules another serving cell.

defaultDownlinkBWP-Id

The initial bandwidth part is referred to by BWP-Id = 0. ID of the downlink bandwidth part to be used upon expiry of the BWP inactivity timer. This field is UE specific. When the field is absent the UE uses the initial BWP as default BWP. (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 12 and TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.15).

downlinkBWP-ToAddModList

List of additional downlink bandwidth parts to be added or modified. (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 12).

downlinkBWP-ToReleaseList

List of additional downlink bandwidth parts to be released. (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 12).

downlinkChannelBW-PerSCS-List

A set of UE specific channel bandwidth and location configurations for different subcarrier spacings (numerologies). Defined in relation to Point A. The UE uses the configuration provided in this field only for the purpose of channel bandwidth and location determination. If absent, UE uses the configuration indicated in scs-SpecificCarrierList in DownlinkConfigCommon / DownlinkConfigCommonSIB. Network only configures channel bandwidth that corresponds to the channel bandwidth values defined in TS 38.101-1 [15] and TS 38.101-2 [39].

firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id

If configured for an SpCell, this field contains the ID of the DL BWP to be activated upon performing the RRC (re-)configuration. If the field is absent, the RRC (re-)configuration does not impose a BWP switch.

If configured for an SCell, this field contains the ID of the downlink bandwidth part to be used upon MAC-activation of an SCell. The initial bandwidth part is referred to by BWP-Id = 0.

Upon reconfiguration with reconfigurationWithSync, the network sets the firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id and firstActiveUplinkBWP-Id to the same value.

initialDownlinkBWP

The dedicated (UE-specific) configuration for the initial downlink bandwidth-part (i.e. DL BWP#0). If any of the optional IEs are configured within this IE, the UE considers the BWP#0 to be an RRC configured BWP (from UE capability viewpoint). Otherwise, the UE does not consider the BWP#0 as an RRC configured BWP (from UE capability viewpoint). Network always configures the UE with a value for this field if no other BWPs are configured. NOTE1

lte-CRS-ToMatchAround

Parameters to determine an LTE CRS pattern that the UE shall rate match around.

pathlossReferenceLinking

Indicates whether UE shall apply as pathloss reference either the downlink of SpCell (PCell for MCG or PSCell for SCG) or of SCell that corresponds with this uplink (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7).

pdsch-ServingCellConfig

PDSCH related parameters that are not BWP-specific.

rateMatchPatternToAddModList

Resources patterns which the UE should rate match PDSCH around. The UE rate matches around the union of all resources indicated in the rate match patterns. Rate match patterns defined here on cell level apply only to PDSCH of the same numerology. See TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.1.

sCellDeactivationTimer

SCell deactivation timer in TS 38.321 [3]. If the field is absent, the UE applies the value infinity.

servingCellMO

measObjectId of the MeasObjectNR in MeasConfig which is associated to the serving cell. For this MeasObjectNR, the following relationship applies between this MeasObjectNR and frequencyInfoDL in ServingCellConfigCommon of the serving cell: if ssbFrequency is configured, its value is the same as the absoluteFrequencySSB and if csi-rs-ResourceConfigMobility is configured, the value of its subcarrierSpacing is present in one entry of the scs-SpecificCarrierList, csi-RS-CellListMobility includes an entry corresponding to the serving cell (with cellId equal to physCellId in ServingCellConfigCommon) and the frequency range indicated by the csi-rs-MeasurementBW of the entry in csi-RS-CellListMobility is included in the frequency range indicated by in the entry of the scs-SpecificCarrierList.

supplementaryUplink

Network may configure this field only when supplementaryUplinkConfig is configured in ServingCellConfigCommon or supplementaryUplink is configured in ServingCellConfigCommonSIB.

tag-Id

Timing Advance Group ID, as specified in TS 38.321 [3], which this cell belongs to.

uplinkConfig

Network may configure this field only when uplinkConfigCommon is configured in ServingCellConfigCommon or ServingCellConfigCommonSIB. Addition or release of this field can only be done upon SCell addition or release (respectively).

UplinkConfig field descriptions

carrierSwitching

Includes parameters for configuration of carrier based SRS switching (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.1.3.

firstActiveUplinkBWP-Id

If configured for an SpCell, this field contains the ID of the UL BWP to be activated upon performing the RRC (re-)configuration. If the field is absent, the RRC (re-)configuration does not impose a BWP switch.

If configured for an SCell, this field contains the ID of the uplink bandwidth part to be used upon MAC-activation of an SCell. The initial bandwidth part is referred to by BandiwdthPartId = 0.

initialUplinkBWP

The dedicated (UE-specific) configuration for the initial uplink bandwidth-part (i.e. UL BWP#0). If any of the optional IEs are configured within this IE as part of the IE uplinkConfig, the UE considers the BWP#0 to be an RRC configured BWP (from UE capability viewpoint). Otherwise, the UE does not consider the BWP#0 as an RRC configured BWP (from UE capability viewpoint). Network always configures the UE with a value for this field if no other BWPs are configured. NOTE1

powerBoostPi2BPSK

If this field is set to true, the UE determines the maximum output power for PUCCH/PUSCH transmissions that use pi/2 BPSK modulation according to TS 38.101-1 [15], clause 6.2.4.

pusch-ServingCellConfig

PUSCH related parameters that are not BWP-specific.

uplinkBWP-ToAddModList

The additional bandwidth parts for uplink to be added or modified. In case of TDD uplink- and downlink BWP with the same bandwidthPartId are considered as a BWP pair and must have the same center frequency.

uplinkBWP-ToReleaseList

The additional bandwidth parts for uplink to be released.

uplinkChannelBW-PerSCS-List

A set of UE specific channel bandwidth and location configurations for different subcarrier spacings (numerologies). Defined in relation to Point A. The UE uses the configuration provided in this field only for the purpose of channel bandwidth and location determination. If absent, UE uses the configuration indicated in scs-SpecificCarrierList in UplinkConfigCommon / UplinkConfigCommonSIB. Network only configures channel bandwidth that corresponds to the channel bandwidth values defined in TS 38.101-1 [15] and TS 38.101-2 [39].

NOTE 1: If the dedicated part of initial UL/DL BWP configuration is absent, the initial BWP can be used but with some limitations. For example, changing to another BWP requires RRCReconfiguration since DCI format 1_0 doesn’t support DCI-based switching.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

MeasObject

This field is mandatory present for the SpCell if the UE has a measConfig, and it is optionally present, Need M, for SCells.

SCellOnly

This field is optionally present, Need R, for SCells. It is absent otherwise.

ServingCellWithoutPUCCH

This field is optionally present, Need S, for SCells except PUCCH SCells. It is absent otherwise.

SyncAndCellAdd

This field is mandatory present for a SpCell upon reconfiguration with reconfigurationWithSync and upon RRCSetup/RRCResume.

The field is optionally present for a SpCell, Need N, upon reconfiguration without reconfigurationWithSync.

The field is mandatory present for an SCell upon addition, and absent for SCell in other cases, Need M.

TDD

This field is optionally present, Need R, for TDD cells. It is absent otherwise.

ServingCellConfigCommon

The IE ServingCellConfigCommon is used to configure cell specific parameters of a UE’s serving cell. The IE contains parameters which a UE would typically acquire from SSB, MIB or SIBs when accessing the cell from IDLE. With this IE, the network provides this information in dedicated signalling when configuring a UE with a SCells or with an additional cell group (SCG). It also provides it for SpCells (MCG and SCG) upon reconfiguration with sync.

ServingCellConfigCommon information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SERVINGCELLCONFIGCOMMON-START

ServingCellConfigCommon ::= SEQUENCE {

physCellId PhysCellId OPTIONAL, — Cond HOAndServCellAdd,

downlinkConfigCommon DownlinkConfigCommon OPTIONAL, — Cond HOAndServCellAdd

uplinkConfigCommon UplinkConfigCommon OPTIONAL, — Need M

supplementaryUplinkConfig UplinkConfigCommon OPTIONAL, — Need S

n-TimingAdvanceOffset ENUMERATED { n0, n25600, n39936 } OPTIONAL, — Need S

ssb-PositionsInBurst CHOICE {

shortBitmap BIT STRING (SIZE (4)),

mediumBitmap BIT STRING (SIZE (8)),

longBitmap BIT STRING (SIZE (64))

} OPTIONAL, — Cond AbsFreqSSB

ssb-periodicityServingCell ENUMERATED { ms5, ms10, ms20, ms40, ms80, ms160, spare2, spare1 } OPTIONAL, — Need S

dmrs-TypeA-Position ENUMERATED {pos2, pos3},

lte-CRS-ToMatchAround SetupRelease { RateMatchPatternLTE-CRS } OPTIONAL, — Need M

rateMatchPatternToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofRateMatchPatterns)) OF RateMatchPattern OPTIONAL, — Need N

rateMatchPatternToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofRateMatchPatterns)) OF RateMatchPatternId OPTIONAL, — Need N

ssbSubcarrierSpacing SubcarrierSpacing OPTIONAL, — Cond HOAndServCellWithSSB

tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon TDD-UL-DL-ConfigCommon OPTIONAL, — Cond TDD

ss-PBCH-BlockPower INTEGER (-60..50),

}

— TAG-SERVINGCELLCONFIGCOMMON-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ServingCellConfigCommon field descriptions

dmrs-TypeA-Position

Position of (first) DM-RS for downlink (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 7.4.1.1.1) and uplink (TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.4.1.1.3).

downlinkConfigCommon

The common downlink configuration of the serving cell, including the frequency information configuration and the initial downlink BWP common configuration. The parameters provided herein should match the parameters configured by MIB and SIB1 (if provided) of the serving cell, with the exception of controlResourceSetZero and searchSpaceZero which can be configured in ServingCellConfigCommon even if MIB indicates that they are absent.

longBitmap

Bitmap when maximum number of SS/PBCH blocks per half frame equals to 64 as defined in TS 38.213 [13], clause 4.1.

lte-CRS-ToMatchAround

Parameters to determine an LTE CRS pattern that the UE shall rate match around.

mediumBitmap

Bitmap when maximum number of SS/PBCH blocks per half frame equals to 8 as defined in TS 38.213 [13], clause 4.1.

n-TimingAdvanceOffset

The N_TA-Offset to be applied for all uplink transmissions on this serving cell. If the field is absent, the UE applies the value defined for the duplex mode and frequency range of this serving cell. See TS 38.133 [14], table 7.1.2-2.

rateMatchPatternToAddModList

Resources patterns which the UE should rate match PDSCH around. The UE rate matches around the union of all resources indicated in the rate match patterns. Rate match patterns defined here on cell level apply only to PDSCH of the same numerology (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4,1).

shortBitmap

Bitmap when maximum number of SS/PBCH blocks per half frame equals to 4 as defined in TS 38.213 [13], clause 4.1.

ss-PBCH-BlockPower

Average EPRE of the resources elements that carry secondary synchronization signals in dBm that the NW used for SSB transmission, see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.

ssb-periodicityServingCell

The SSB periodicity in ms for the rate matching purpose. If the field is absent, the UE applies the value ms5. (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 4.1)

ssb-PositionsInBurst

Indicates the time domain positions of the transmitted SS-blocks in a half frame with SS/PBCH blocks as defined in TS 38.213 [13], clause 4.1. The first/ leftmost bit corresponds to SS/PBCH block index 0, the second bit corresponds to SS/PBCH block index 1, and so on. Value 0 in the bitmap indicates that the corresponding SS/PBCH block is not transmitted while value 1 indicates that the corresponding SS/PBCH block is transmitted. The network configures the same pattern in this field as in the corresponding field in ServingCellConfigCommonSIB.

ssbSubcarrierSpacing

Subcarrier spacing of SSB. Only the values 15 kHz or 30 kHz (FR1), and 120 kHz or 240 kHz (FR2) are applicable.

supplementaryUplinkConfig

The network configures this field only if uplinkConfigCommon is configured. If this field is absent, the UE shall release the supplementaryUplinkConfig and the supplementaryUplink configured in ServingCellConfig of this serving cell, if configured.

tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon

A cell-specific TDD UL/DL configuration, see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

AbsFreqSSB

The field is absent when absoluteFrequencySSB in frequencyInfoDL is absent, otherwise the field is mandatory present.

HOAndServCellAdd

This field is mandatory present upon SpCell change and upon serving cell (PSCell/SCell) addition. Otherwise, the field is absent.

HOAndServCellWithSSB

This field is mandatory present upon SpCell change and upon serving cell (SCell with SSB or PSCell) addition. Otherwise, the field is absent.

TDD

The field is optionally present, Need R, for TDD cells; otherwise it is absent.

ServingCellConfigCommonSIB

The IE ServingCellConfigCommonSIB is used to configure cell specific parameters of a UE’s serving cell in SIB1.

ServingCellConfigCommonSIB information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SERVINGCELLCONFIGCOMMONSIB-START

ServingCellConfigCommonSIB ::= SEQUENCE {

downlinkConfigCommon DownlinkConfigCommonSIB,

uplinkConfigCommon UplinkConfigCommonSIB OPTIONAL, — Need R

supplementaryUplink UplinkConfigCommonSIB OPTIONAL, — Need R

n-TimingAdvanceOffset ENUMERATED { n0, n25600, n39936 } OPTIONAL, — Need S

ssb-PositionsInBurst SEQUENCE {

inOneGroup BIT STRING (SIZE (8)),

groupPresence BIT STRING (SIZE (8)) OPTIONAL — Cond FR2-Only

},

ssb-PeriodicityServingCell ENUMERATED {ms5, ms10, ms20, ms40, ms80, ms160},

tdd-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon TDD-UL-DL-ConfigCommon OPTIONAL, — Cond TDD

ss-PBCH-BlockPower INTEGER (-60..50),

}

— TAG-SERVINGCELLCONFIGCOMMONSIB-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ServingCellConfigCommonSIB field descriptions

groupPresence

This field is present when maximum number of SS/PBCH blocks per half frame equals to 64 as defined in TS 38.213 [13], clause 4.1. The first/leftmost bit corresponds to the SS/PBCH index 0-7, the second bit corresponds to SS/PBCH block 8-15, and so on. Value 0 in the bitmap indicates that the SSBs according to inOneGroup are absent. Value 1 indicates that the SS/PBCH blocks are transmitted in accordance with inOneGroup.

inOneGroup

When maximum number of SS/PBCH blocks per half frame equals to 4 as defined in TS 38.213 [13], clause 4.1, only the 4 leftmost bits are valid; the UE ignores the 4 rightmost bits. When maximum number of SS/PBCH blocks per half frame equals to 8 as defined in TS 38.213 [13], clause 4.1, all 8 bits are valid. The first/ leftmost bit corresponds to SS/PBCH block index 0, the second bit corresponds to SS/PBCH block index 1, and so on. When maximum number of SS/PBCH blocks per half frame equals to 64 as defined in TS 38.213 [13], clause 4.1, all 8 bit are valid; The first/ leftmost bit corresponds to the first SS/PBCH block index in the group (i.e., to SSB index 0, 8, and so on); the second bit corresponds to the second SS/PBCH block index in the group (i.e., to SSB index 1, 9, and so on), and so on. Value 0 in the bitmap indicates that the corresponding SS/PBCH block is not transmitted while value 1 indicates that the corresponding SS/PBCH block is transmitted.

n-TimingAdvanceOffset

The N_TA-Offset to be applied for random access on this serving cell. If the field is absent, the UE applies the value defined for the duplex mode and frequency range of this serving cell. See TS 38.133 [14], table 7.1.2-2.

ssb-PositionsInBurst

Time domain positions of the transmitted SS-blocks in an SS-burst as defined in TS 38.213 [13], clause 4.1.

ss-PBCH-BlockPower

Average EPRE of the resources elements that carry secondary synchronization signals in dBm that the NW used for SSB transmission, see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

FR2-Only

This field is mandatory present for an FR2 carrier frequency. It is absent otherwise and UE releases any configured value.

TDD

The field is optionally present, Need R, for TDD cells; otherwise it is absent.

– ShortI-RNTI-Value

The IE ShortI-RNTI-Value is used to identify the suspended UE context of a UE in RRC_INACTIVE using fewer bits compared to I-RNTI-Value.

ShortI-RNTI-Value information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SHORTI-RNTI-VALUE-START

ShortI-RNTI-Value ::= BIT STRING (SIZE(24))

— TAG-SHORTI-RNTI-VALUE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

– ShortMAC-I

The IE ShortMAC-I is used to identify and verify the UE at RRC connection re-establishment. The 16 least significant bits of the MAC-I calculated using the AS security configuration of the source PCell, as specified in 5.3.7.4.

ShortMAC-I information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SHORTMAC-I-START

ShortMAC-I ::= BIT STRING (SIZE (16))

— TAG-SHORTMAC-I-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SINR-Range

The IE SINR-Range specifies the value range used in SINR measurements and thresholds. For measurements, integer value for SINR measurements is according to Table 10.1.16.1-1 in TS 38.133 [14]. For thresholds, the actual value is (IE value – 46) / 2 dB.

SINR-Range information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SINR-RANGE-START

SINR-Range ::= INTEGER(0..127)

— TAG-SINR-RANGE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SI-SchedulingInfo

The IE SI-SchedulingInfo contains information needed for acquisition of SI messages.

SI-SchedulingInfo information element

— ASN1START

— TAG–SI-SCHEDULINGINFO-START

SI-SchedulingInfo ::= SEQUENCE {

schedulingInfoList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxSI-Message)) OF SchedulingInfo,

si-WindowLength ENUMERATED {s5, s10, s20, s40, s80, s160, s320, s640, s1280},

si-RequestConfig SI-RequestConfig OPTIONAL, — Cond MSG-1

si-RequestConfigSUL SI-RequestConfig OPTIONAL, — Cond SUL-MSG-1

systemInformationAreaID BIT STRING (SIZE (24)) OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

SchedulingInfo ::= SEQUENCE {

si-BroadcastStatus ENUMERATED {broadcasting, notBroadcasting},

si-Periodicity ENUMERATED {rf8, rf16, rf32, rf64, rf128, rf256, rf512},

sib-MappingInfo SIB-Mapping

}

SIB-Mapping ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxSIB)) OF SIB-TypeInfo

SIB-TypeInfo ::= SEQUENCE {

type ENUMERATED {sibType2, sibType3, sibType4, sibType5, sibType6, sibType7, sibType8, sibType9,

spare8, spare7, spare6, spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1,… },

valueTag INTEGER (0..31) OPTIONAL, — Cond SIB-TYPE

areaScope ENUMERATED {true} OPTIONAL — Need S

}

— Configuration for Msg1 based SI Request

SI-RequestConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rach-OccasionsSI SEQUENCE {

rach-ConfigSI RACH-ConfigGeneric,

ssb-perRACH-Occasion ENUMERATED {oneEighth, oneFourth, oneHalf, one, two, four, eight, sixteen}

} OPTIONAL, — Need R

si-RequestPeriod ENUMERATED {one, two, four, six, eight, ten, twelve, sixteen} OPTIONAL, — Need R

si-RequestResources SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxSI-Message)) OF SI-RequestResources

}

SI-RequestResources ::= SEQUENCE {

ra-PreambleStartIndex INTEGER (0..63),

ra-AssociationPeriodIndex INTEGER (0..15) OPTIONAL, — Need R

ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex INTEGER (0..15) OPTIONAL — Need R

}

— TAG-SI-SCHEDULINGINFO-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SchedulingInfo field descriptions

areaScope

Indicates that a SIB is area specific. If the field is absent, the SIB is cell specific.

si-BroadcastStatus

Indicates if the SI message is being broadcasted or not. Change of si-BroadcastStatus should not result in system information change notifications in Short Message transmitted with P-RNTI over DCI (see clause 6.5). The value of the indication is valid until the end of the BCCH modification period when set to broadcasting.

si-Periodicity

Periodicity of the SI-message in radio frames. Value rf8 corresponds to 8 radio frames, value rf16 corresponds to 16 radio frames, and so on.

SI-RequestConfig field descriptions

rach-OccasionsSI

Configuration of dedicated RACH Occassions for SI. If the field is absent, the UE uses the corresponding parameters configured in rach-ConfigCommon of the initial uplink BWP.

si-RequestPeriod

Periodicity of the SI-Request configuration in number of association periods.

si-RequestResources

If there is only one entry in the list, the configuration is used for all SI messages for which si-BroadcastStatus is set to notBroadcasting. Otherwise the 1st entry in the list corresponds to the first SI message in schedulingInfoList for which si-BroadcastStatus is set to notBroadcasting, 2nd entry in the list corresponds to the second SI message in schedulingInfoList for which si-BroadcastStatus is set to notBroadcasting and so on. Change of si-RequestResources should not result in system information change notification.

SI-RequestResources field descriptions

ra-AssociationPeriodIndex

Index of the association period in the si-RequestPeriod in which the UE can send the SI request for SI message(s) corresponding to this SI-RequestResources, using the preambles indicated by ra-PreambleStartIndex and rach occasions indicated by ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex.

ra-PreambleStartIndex

If N SSBs are associated with a RACH occasion, where N > = 1, for the i-th SSB (i=0, …, N-1) the preamble with preamble index = ra-PreambleStartIndex + i is used for SI request; For N < 1, the preamble with preamble index = ra-PreambleStartIndex is used for SI request.

SI-SchedulingInfo field descriptions

si-RequestConfig

Configuration of Msg1 resources that the UE uses for requesting SI-messages for which si-BroadcastStatus is set to notBroadcasting.

si-RequestConfigSUL

Configuration of Msg1 resources that the UE uses for requesting SI-messages for which si-BroadcastStatus is set to notBroadcasting.

si-WindowLength

The length of the SI scheduling window. Value s5 corresponds to 5 slots, value s10 corresponds to 10 slots and so on. The network always configures si-WindowLength to be shorter than or equal to the si-Periodicity.

systemInformationAreaID

Indicates the system information area that the cell belongs to, if any. Any SIB with areaScope within the SI is considered to belong to this systemInformationAreaID. The systemInformationAreaID is unique within a PLMN.

Conditional presence

Explanation

MSG-1

The field is optionally present, Need R, if si-BroadcastStatus is set to notBroadcasting for any SI-message included in SchedulingInfo. It is absent otherwise.

SIB-TYPE

The field is mandatory present if the SIB type is different from SIB6, SIB7 or SIB8. For SIB6, SIB7 and SIB8 it is absent.

SUL-MSG-1

The field is optionally present, Need R, if supplementaryUplink is configured in ServingCellConfigCommonSIB and if si-BroadcastStatus is set to notBroadcasting for any SI-message included in SchedulingInfo. It is absent otherwise.

– SK-Counter

The IE SK-Counter is a counter used upon initial configuration of SN security for NR-DC and NE-DC, as well as upon refresh of S-KgNB or S-KeNB based on the current or newly derived KgNB during RRC Resume or RRC Reconfiguration, as defined in TS 33.501 [11].

— ASN1START

— TAG-SKCOUNTER-START

SK-Counter ::= INTEGER (0..65535)

— TAG-SKCOUNTER-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SlotFormatCombinationsPerCell

The IE SlotFormatCombinationsPerCell is used to configure the SlotFormatCombinations applicable for one serving cell (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1.1).

SlotFormatCombinationsPerCell information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SLOTFORMATCOMBINATIONSPERCELL-START

SlotFormatCombinationsPerCell ::= SEQUENCE {

servingCellId ServCellIndex,

subcarrierSpacing SubcarrierSpacing,

subcarrierSpacing2 SubcarrierSpacing OPTIONAL, — Need R

slotFormatCombinations SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSlotFormatCombinationsPerSet)) OF SlotFormatCombination

OPTIONAL, — Need M

positionInDCI INTEGER(0..maxSFI-DCI-PayloadSize-1) OPTIONAL, — Need M

}

SlotFormatCombination ::= SEQUENCE {

slotFormatCombinationId SlotFormatCombinationId,

slotFormats SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSlotFormatsPerCombination)) OF INTEGER (0..255)

}

SlotFormatCombinationId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofSlotFormatCombinationsPerSet-1)

— TAG-SLOTFORMATCOMBINATIONSPERCELL-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SlotFormatCombination field descriptions

slotFormatCombinationId

This ID is used in the DCI payload to dynamically select this SlotFormatCombination, see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1.1.

slotFormats

Slot formats that occur in consecutive slots in time domain order as listed here (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1.1).

SlotFormatCombinationsPerCell field descriptions

positionInDCI

The (starting) position (bit) of the slotFormatCombinationId (SFI-Index) for this serving cell (servingCellId) within the DCI payload (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1.1).

servingCellId

The ID of the serving cell for which the slotFormatCombinations are applicable.

slotFormatCombinations

A list with SlotFormatCombinations. Each SlotFormatCombination comprises of one or more SlotFormats (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 4.3.2). The total number of slotFormats in the slotFormatCombinations list does not exceed 512.

subcarrierSpacing2

Reference subcarrier spacing for a Slot Format Combination on an FDD or SUL cell (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1.1). For FDD, subcarrierSpacing (SFI-scs) is the reference SCS for DL BWP and subcarrierSpacing2 (SFI-scs2) is the reference SCS for UL BWP. For SUL, subcarrierSpacing (SFI-scs) is the reference SCS for non-SUL carrier and subcarrierSpacing2 (SFI-scs2) is the reference SCS for SUL carrier. The network configures a value that is smaller than or equal to any SCS of configured BWPs of the serving cell that the command applies to. And the network configures a value that is smaller than or equal to the SCS of the serving cell which the UE monitors for SFI indications.

subcarrierSpacing

Reference subcarrier spacing for this Slot Format Combination. The network configures a value that is smaller than or equal to any SCS of configured BWPs of the serving cell that the command applies to. And the network configures a value that is smaller than or equal to the SCS of the serving cell which the UE monitors for SFI indications (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1.1).

SlotFormatIndicator

The IE SlotFormatIndicator is used to configure monitoring a Group-Common-PDCCH for Slot-Format-Indicators (SFI).

SlotFormatIndicator information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SLOTFORMATINDICATOR-START

SlotFormatIndicator ::= SEQUENCE {

sfi-RNTI RNTI-Value,

dci-PayloadSize INTEGER (1..maxSFI-DCI-PayloadSize),

slotFormatCombToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofAggregatedCellsPerCellGroup)) OF SlotFormatCombinationsPerCell

OPTIONAL, — Need N

slotFormatCombToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofAggregatedCellsPerCellGroup)) OF ServCellIndex OPTIONAL, — Need N

}

— TAG-SLOTFORMATINDICATOR-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SlotFormatIndicator field descriptions

dci-PayloadSize

Total length of the DCI payload scrambled with SFI-RNTI (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1.1).

sfi-RNTI

RNTI used for SFI on the given cell (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1.1).

slotFormatCombToAddModList

A list of SlotFormatCombinations for the UE’s serving cells (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1.1).

S-NSSAI

The IE S-NSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance Information) identifies a Network Slice end to end and comprises a slice/service type and a slice differentiator, see TS 23.003 [21].

S-NSSAI information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-S-NSSAI-START

S-NSSAI ::= CHOICE{

sst BIT STRING (SIZE (8)),

sst-SD BIT STRING (SIZE (32))

}

— TAG-S-NSSAI-STOP

— ASN1STOP

S-NSSAI field descriptions

sst

Indicates the S-NSSAI consisting of Slice/Service Type, see TS 23.003 [21].

sst-SD

Indicates the S-NSSAI consisting of Slice/Service Type and Slice Differentiator, see TS 23.003 [21].

SpeedStateScaleFactors

The IE SpeedStateScaleFactors concerns factors, to be applied when the UE is in medium or high speed state, used for scaling a mobility control related parameter.

SpeedStateScaleFactors information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SPEEDSTATESCALEFACTORS-START

SpeedStateScaleFactors ::= SEQUENCE {

sf-Medium ENUMERATED {oDot25, oDot5, oDot75, lDot0},

sf-High ENUMERATED {oDot25, oDot5, oDot75, lDot0}

}

— TAG-SPEEDSTATESCALEFACTORS-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SpeedStateScaleFactors field descriptions

sf-High

The concerned mobility control related parameter is multiplied with this factor if the UE is in High Mobility state as defined in TS 38.304 [20]. Value oDot25 corresponds to 0.25, value oDot5 corresponds to 0.5, oDot75 corresponds to 0.75 and so on.

sf-Medium

The concerned mobility control related parameter is multiplied with this factor if the UE is in Medium Mobility state as defined in TS 38.304 [20]. Value oDot25 corresponds to 0.25, value oDot5 corresponds to 0.5, value oDot75 corresponds to 0.75, and so on.

SPS-Config

The IE SPS-Config is used to configure downlink semi-persistent transmission. Downlink SPS may be configured on the SpCell as well as on SCells. The network ensures SPS-Config is configured for at most one cell in a cell group.

SPS-Config information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SPS-CONFIG-START

SPS-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

periodicity ENUMERATED {ms10, ms20, ms32, ms40, ms64, ms80, ms128, ms160, ms320, ms640,

spare6, spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1},

nrofHARQ-Processes INTEGER (1..8),

n1PUCCH-AN PUCCH-ResourceId OPTIONAL, — Need M

mcs-Table ENUMERATED {qam64LowSE} OPTIONAL, — Need S

}

— TAG-SPS-CONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SPS-Config field descriptions

mcs-Table

Indicates the MCS table the UE shall use for DL SPS (see TS 38.214 [19],clause 5.1.3.1. If present, the UE shall use the MCS table of low-SE 64QAM table indicated in Table 5.1.3.1-3 of TS 38.214 [19]. If this field is absent and field mcs-table in PDSCH-Config is set to ‘qam256’ and the activating DCI is of format 1_1, the UE applies the 256QAM table indicated in Table 5.1.3.1-2 of TS 38.214 [19]. Otherwise, the UE applies the non-low-SE 64QAM table indicated in Table 5.1.3.1-1 of TS 38.214 [19].

n1PUCCH-AN

HARQ resource for PUCCH for DL SPS. The network configures the resource either as format0 or format1. The actual PUCCH-Resource is configured in PUCCH-Config and referred to by its ID. See TS 38.213 [13], clause 9.2.3.

nrofHARQ-Processes

Number of configured HARQ processes for SPS DL (see TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.8.1).

periodicity

Periodicity for DL SPS (see TS 38.214 [19] and TS 38.321 [3], clause 5.8.1).

SRB-Identity

The IE SRB-Identity is used to identify a Signalling Radio Bearer (SRB) used by a UE.

SRB-Identity information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SRB-IDENTITY-START

SRB-Identity ::= INTEGER (1..3)

— TAG-SRB-IDENTITY-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SRS-CarrierSwitching

The IE SRS-CarrierSwitching is used to configure for SRS carrier switching when PUSCH is not configured and independent SRS power control from that of PUSCH.

SRS-CarrierSwitching information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SRS-CARRIERSWITCHING-START

SRS-CarrierSwitching ::= SEQUENCE {

srs-SwitchFromServCellIndex INTEGER (0..31) OPTIONAL, — Need M

srs-SwitchFromCarrier ENUMERATED {sUL, nUL},

srs-TPC-PDCCH-Group CHOICE {

typeA SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..32)) OF SRS-TPC-PDCCH-Config,

typeB SRS-TPC-PDCCH-Config

} OPTIONAL, — Need M

monitoringCells SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofServingCells)) OF ServCellIndex OPTIONAL, — Need M

}

SRS-TPC-PDCCH-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

srs-CC-SetIndexlist SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..4)) OF SRS-CC-SetIndex OPTIONAL — Need M

}

SRS-CC-SetIndex ::= SEQUENCE {

cc-SetIndex INTEGER (0..3) OPTIONAL, — Need M

cc-IndexInOneCC-Set INTEGER (0..7) OPTIONAL — Need M

}

— TAG-SRS-CARRIERSWITCHING-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SRS-CC-SetIndex field descriptions

cc-IndexInOneCC-Set

Indicates the CC index in one CC set for Type A (see TS 38.212 [17], TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.3.1, 11.4). The network always includes this field when the srs-TPC-PDCCH-Group is set to typeA.

cc-SetIndex

Indicates the CC set index for Type A associated (see TS 38.212 [17], TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.3.1, 11.4). The network always includes this field when the srs-TPC-PDCCH-Group is set to typeA. The network does not configure this field to 3 in this release of specification.

SRS-CarrierSwitching field descriptions

monitoringCells

A set of serving cells for monitoring PDCCH conveying SRS DCI format with CRC scrambled by TPC-SRS-RNTI (see TS 38.212 [17], TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.3.1, 11.3).

srs-SwitchFromServCellIndex

Indicates the serving cell whose UL transmission may be interrupted during SRS transmission on a PUSCH-less SCell. During SRS transmission on a PUSCH-less SCell, the UE may temporarily suspend the UL transmission on a serving cell with PUSCH in the same CG to allow the PUSCH-less SCell to transmit SRS. (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.1.3).

srs-TPC-PDCCH-Group

Network configures the UE with either typeA-SRS-TPC-PDCCH-Group or typeB-SRS-TPC-PDCCH-Group, if any.

typeA

Type A trigger configuration for SRS transmission on a PUSCH-less SCell (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.4). In this release, the network configures at most one entry (the first entry) of typeA, and the first entry corresponds to the serving cell in which the SRS-CarrierSwitching field is configured. SRS carrier switching to SUL carrier is not supported in this version of the specification.

typeB

Type B trigger configuration for SRS transmission on a PUSCH-less SCell (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.4).

SRS-TPC-PDCCH-Config field descriptions

srs-CC-SetIndexlist

A list of pairs of [cc-SetIndex; cc-IndexInOneCC-Set] (see TS 38.212 [17], TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.3.1, 11.4). The network does not configure this field for typeB.

SRS-Config

The IE SRS-Config is used to configure sounding reference signal transmissions. The configuration defines a list of SRS-Resources and a list of SRS-ResourceSets. Each resource set defines a set of SRS-Resources. The network triggers the transmission of the set of SRS-Resources using a configured aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger (L1 DCI).

SRS-Config information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SRS-CONFIG-START

SRS-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

srs-ResourceSetToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofSRS-ResourceSets)) OF SRS-ResourceSetId OPTIONAL, — Need N

srs-ResourceSetToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofSRS-ResourceSets)) OF SRS-ResourceSet OPTIONAL, — Need N

srs-ResourceToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofSRS-Resources)) OF SRS-ResourceId OPTIONAL, — Need N

srs-ResourceToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofSRS-Resources)) OF SRS-Resource OPTIONAL, — Need N

tpc-Accumulation ENUMERATED {disabled} OPTIONAL, — Need S

}

SRS-ResourceSet ::= SEQUENCE {

srs-ResourceSetId SRS-ResourceSetId,

srs-ResourceIdList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofSRS-ResourcesPerSet)) OF SRS-ResourceId OPTIONAL, — Cond Setup

resourceType CHOICE {

aperiodic SEQUENCE {

aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger INTEGER (1..maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates-1),

csi-RS NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId OPTIONAL, — Cond NonCodebook

slotOffset INTEGER (1..32) OPTIONAL, — Need S

…,

[[

aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates-2))

OF INTEGER (1..maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates-1) OPTIONAL — Need M

]]

},

semi-persistent SEQUENCE {

associatedCSI-RS NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId OPTIONAL, — Cond NonCodebook

},

periodic SEQUENCE {

associatedCSI-RS NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId OPTIONAL, — Cond NonCodebook

}

},

usage ENUMERATED {beamManagement, codebook, nonCodebook, antennaSwitching},

alpha Alpha OPTIONAL, — Need S

p0 INTEGER (-202..24) OPTIONAL, — Cond Setup

pathlossReferenceRS CHOICE {

ssb-Index SSB-Index,

csi-RS-Index NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId

} OPTIONAL, — Need M

srs-PowerControlAdjustmentStates ENUMERATED { sameAsFci2, separateClosedLoop} OPTIONAL, — Need S

}

SRS-ResourceSetId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofSRS-ResourceSets-1)

SRS-Resource ::= SEQUENCE {

srs-ResourceId SRS-ResourceId,

nrofSRS-Ports ENUMERATED {port1, ports2, ports4},

ptrs-PortIndex ENUMERATED {n0, n1 } OPTIONAL, — Need R

transmissionComb CHOICE {

n2 SEQUENCE {

combOffset-n2 INTEGER (0..1),

cyclicShift-n2 INTEGER (0..7)

},

n4 SEQUENCE {

combOffset-n4 INTEGER (0..3),

cyclicShift-n4 INTEGER (0..11)

}

},

resourceMapping SEQUENCE {

startPosition INTEGER (0..5),

nrofSymbols ENUMERATED {n1, n2, n4},

repetitionFactor ENUMERATED {n1, n2, n4}

},

freqDomainPosition INTEGER (0..67),

freqDomainShift INTEGER (0..268),

freqHopping SEQUENCE {

c-SRS INTEGER (0..63),

b-SRS INTEGER (0..3),

b-hop INTEGER (0..3)

},

groupOrSequenceHopping ENUMERATED { neither, groupHopping, sequenceHopping },

resourceType CHOICE {

aperiodic SEQUENCE {

},

semi-persistent SEQUENCE {

periodicityAndOffset-sp SRS-PeriodicityAndOffset,

},

periodic SEQUENCE {

periodicityAndOffset-p SRS-PeriodicityAndOffset,

}

},

sequenceId INTEGER (0..1023),

spatialRelationInfo SRS-SpatialRelationInfo OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

SRS-SpatialRelationInfo ::= SEQUENCE {

servingCellId ServCellIndex OPTIONAL, — Need S

referenceSignal CHOICE {

ssb-Index SSB-Index,

csi-RS-Index NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId,

srs SEQUENCE {

resourceId SRS-ResourceId,

uplinkBWP BWP-Id

}

}

}

SRS-ResourceId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofSRS-Resources-1)

SRS-PeriodicityAndOffset ::= CHOICE {

sl1 NULL,

sl2 INTEGER(0..1),

sl4 INTEGER(0..3),

sl5 INTEGER(0..4),

sl8 INTEGER(0..7),

sl10 INTEGER(0..9),

sl16 INTEGER(0..15),

sl20 INTEGER(0..19),

sl32 INTEGER(0..31),

sl40 INTEGER(0..39),

sl64 INTEGER(0..63),

sl80 INTEGER(0..79),

sl160 INTEGER(0..159),

sl320 INTEGER(0..319),

sl640 INTEGER(0..639),

sl1280 INTEGER(0..1279),

sl2560 INTEGER(0..2559)

}

— TAG-SRS-CONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SRS-Config field descriptions

tpc-Accumulation

If the field is absent, UE applies TPC commands via accumulation. If disabled, UE applies the TPC command without accumulation (this applies to SRS when a separate closed loop is configured for SRS) (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.3).

SRS-Resource field descriptions

cyclicShift-n2

Cyclic shift configuration (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.1).

cyclicShift-n4

Cyclic shift configuration (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.1).

freqHopping

Includes parameters capturing SRS frequency hopping (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.1).

groupOrSequenceHopping

Parameter(s) for configuring group or sequence hopping (see TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.4.1.4.2).

periodicityAndOffset-p

Periodicity and slot offset for this SRS resource. All values are in "number of slots". Value sl1 corresponds to a periodicity of 1 slot, value sl2 corresponds to a periodicity of 2 slots, and so on. For each periodicity the corresponding offset is given in number of slots. For periodicity sl1 the offset is 0 slots (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.1).

periodicityAndOffset-sp

Periodicity and slot offset for this SRS resource. All values are in "number of slots". Value sl1 corresponds to a periodicity of 1 slot, value sl2 corresponds to a periodicity of 2 slots, and so on. For each periodicity the corresponding offset is given in number of slots. For periodicity sl1 the offset is 0 slots (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.1).

ptrs-PortIndex

The PTRS port index for this SRS resource for non-codebook based UL MIMO. This is only applicable when the corresponding PTRS-UplinkConfig is set to CP-OFDM. The ptrs-PortIndex configured here must be smaller than the maxNrofPorts configured in the PTRS-UplinkConfig (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.3.1).

resourceMapping

OFDM symbol location of the SRS resource within a slot including nrofSymbols (number of OFDM symbols), startPosition (value 0 refers to the last symbol, value 1 refers to the second last symbol, and so on) and repetitionFactor (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.1 and TS 38.211 [16], clause 6.4.1.4). The configured SRS resource does not exceed the slot boundary.

resourceType

Periodicity and offset for semi-persistent and periodic SRS resource (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.1).

sequenceId

Sequence ID used to initialize pseudo random group and sequence hopping (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.1).

spatialRelationInfo

Configuration of the spatial relation between a reference RS and the target SRS. Reference RS can be SSB/CSI-RS/SRS (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.1).

transmissionComb

Comb value (2 or 4) and comb offset (0..combValue-1) (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.1).

SRS-ResourceSet field descriptions

alpha

alpha value for SRS power control (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.3). When the field is absent the UE applies the value 1.

aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList

An additional list of DCI "code points" upon which the UE shall transmit SRS according to this SRS resource set configuration (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6). When the field is not included during a reconfiguration of SRS-ResourceSet of resourceType set to aperiodic, UE maintains this value based on the Need M; that is, this list is not considered as an extension of aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger for purpose of applying the general rule for extended list in clause 6.1.3.

aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger

The DCI "code point" upon which the UE shall transmit SRS according to this SRS resource set configuration (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6).

associatedCSI-RS

ID of CSI-RS resource associated with this SRS resource set in non-codebook based operation (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.1.2).

csi-RS

ID of CSI-RS resource associated with this SRS resource set. (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.1.1.2).

p0

P0 value for SRS power control. The value is in dBm. Only even values (step size 2) are allowed (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.3).

pathlossReferenceRS

A reference signal (e.g. a CSI-RS config or a SS block) to be used for SRS path loss estimation (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.3).

resourceType

Time domain behavior of SRS resource configuration, see TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.1. The network configures SRS resources in the same resource set with the same time domain behavior on periodic, aperiodic and semi-persistent SRS.

slotOffset

An offset in number of slots between the triggering DCI and the actual transmission of this SRS-ResourceSet. If the field is absent the UE applies no offset (value 0).

srs-PowerControlAdjustmentStates

Indicates whether hsrs,c(i) = fc(i,1) or hsrs,c(i) = fc(i,2) (if twoPUSCH-PC-AdjustmentStates are configured) or separate close loop is configured for SRS. This parameter is applicable only for Uls on which UE also transmits PUSCH. If absent or release, the UE applies the value sameAs-Fci1 (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 7.3).

srs-ResourceIdList

The IDs of the SRS-Resources used in this SRS-ResourceSet. If this SRS-ResourceSet is configured with usage set to codebook, the srs-ResourceIdList contains at most 2 entries. If this SRS-ResourceSet is configured with usage set to nonCodebook, the srs-ResourceIdList contains at most 4 entries.

srs-ResourceSetId

The ID of this resource set. It is unique in the context of the BWP in which the parent SRS-Config is defined.

usage

Indicates if the SRS resource set is used for beam management, codebook based or non-codebook based transmission or antenna switching. See TS 38.214 [19], clause 6.2.1. Reconfiguration between codebook based and non-codebook based transmission is not supported.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

Setup

This field is mandatory present upon configuration of SRS-ResourceSet or SRS-Resource and optionally present, Need M, otherwise.

NonCodebook

This field is optionally present, Need M, in case of non-codebook based transmission, otherwise the field is absent.

SRS-TPC-CommandConfig

The IE SRS-TPC-CommandConfig is used to configure the UE for extracting TPC commands for SRS from a group-TPC messages on DCI

SRS-TPC-CommandConfig information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SRS-TPC-COMMANDCONFIG-START

SRS-TPC-CommandConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

startingBitOfFormat2-3 INTEGER (1..31) OPTIONAL, — Need R

fieldTypeFormat2-3 INTEGER (0..1) OPTIONAL, — Need R

…,

[[

startingBitOfFormat2-3SUL INTEGER (1..31) OPTIONAL — Need R

]]

}

— TAG-SRS-TPC-COMMANDCONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SRS-TPC-CommandConfig field descriptions

fieldTypeFormat2-3

The type of a field within the group DCI with SRS request fields (optional), which indicates how many bits in the field are for SRS request (0 or 2).

Note that for Type A, there is a common SRS request field for all SCells in the set, but each SCell has its own TPC command bits. See TS 38.212 [17] clause 7.3.1 and , TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.3.

startingBitOfFormat2-3

The starting bit position of a block within the group DCI with SRS request fields (optional) and TPC commands. The value 1 of the field corresponds to the first/left most bit of format2-3. The value 2 of the field corresponds to the second bit format2-3, and so on (see TS 38.212 [17], clause 7.3.1 and TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.3).

startingBitOfFormat2-3SUL

The starting bit position of a block within the group DCI with SRS request fields (optional) and TPC commands for SUL carrier (see TS 38.212 [17], clause 7.3.1 and TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.3).

SSB-Index

The IE SSB-Index identifies an SS-Block within an SS-Burst. See TS 38.213 [13], clause 4.1.

SSB-Index information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SSB-INDEX-START

SSB-Index ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofSSBs-1)

— TAG-SSB-INDEX-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SSB-MTC

The IE SSB-MTC is used to configure measurement timing configurations, i.e., timing occasions at which the UE measures SSBs.

SSB-MTC information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SSB-MTC-START

SSB-MTC ::= SEQUENCE {

periodicityAndOffset CHOICE {

sf5 INTEGER (0..4),

sf10 INTEGER (0..9),

sf20 INTEGER (0..19),

sf40 INTEGER (0..39),

sf80 INTEGER (0..79),

sf160 INTEGER (0..159)

},

duration ENUMERATED { sf1, sf2, sf3, sf4, sf5 }

}

SSB-MTC2 ::= SEQUENCE {

pci-List SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofPCIsPerSMTC)) OF PhysCellId OPTIONAL, — Need M

periodicity ENUMERATED {sf5, sf10, sf20, sf40, sf80, spare3, spare2, spare1}

}

— TAG-SSB-MTC-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SSB-MTC field descriptions

duration

Duration of the measurement window in which to receive SS/PBCH blocks. It is given in number of subframes (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 4.1).

periodicityAndOffset

Periodicity and offset of the measurement window in which to receive SS/PBCH blocks, see 5.5.2.10. Periodicity and offset are given in number of subframes.

SSB-MTC2 field descriptions

pci-List

PCIs that are known to follow this SMTC.

SSB-ToMeasure

The IE SSB-ToMeasure is used to configure a pattern of SSBs.

SSB-ToMeasure information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SSB-TOMEASURE-START

SSB-ToMeasure ::= CHOICE {

shortBitmap BIT STRING (SIZE (4)),

mediumBitmap BIT STRING (SIZE (8)),

longBitmap BIT STRING (SIZE (64))

}

— TAG-SSB-TOMEASURE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SSB-ToMeasure field descriptions

longBitmap

Bitmap when maximum number of SS/PBCH blocks per half frame equals to 64 as defined in TS 38.213 [13], clause 4.1.

mediumBitmap

Bitmap when maximum number of SS/PBCH blocks per half frame equals to 8 as defined in TS 38.213 [13], clause 4.1.

shortBitmap

Bitmap when maximum number of SS/PBCH blocks per half frame equals to 4 as defined in TS 38.213 [13], clause 4.1.

SS-RSSI-Measurement

The IE SS-RSSI-Measurement is used to configure RSSI measurements based on synchronization reference signals.

SS-RSSI-Measurement information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SS-RSSI-MEASUREMENT-START

SS-RSSI-Measurement ::= SEQUENCE {

measurementSlots BIT STRING (SIZE (1..80)),

endSymbol INTEGER(0..3)

}

— TAG-SS-RSSI-MEASUREMENT-STOP

— ASN1STOP

SS-RSSI-Measurement field descriptions

endSymbol

Within a slot that is configured for RSSI measurements (see measurementSlots) the UE measures the RSSI from symbol 0 to symbol endSymbol. This field identifies the entry in Table 5.1.3-1 in TS 38.215 [9], which determines the actual end symbol.

measurementSlots

Indicates the slots in which the UE can perform RSSI measurements. The length of the BIT STRING is equal to the number of slots in the configured SMTC window (determined by the duration and by the subcarrierSpacing). The first (left-most / most significant) bit in the bitmap corresponds to the first slot in the SMTC window, the second bit in the bitmap corresponds to the second slot in the SMTC window, and so on. The UE measures in slots for which the corresponding bit in the bitmap is set to 1.

SubcarrierSpacing

The IE SubcarrierSpacing determines the subcarrier spacing. Restrictions applicable for certain frequencies, channels or signals are clarified in the fields that use this IE.

SubcarrierSpacing information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-SUBCARRIERSPACING-START

SubcarrierSpacing ::= ENUMERATED {kHz15, kHz30, kHz60, kHz120, kHz240, spare3, spare2, spare1}

— TAG-SUBCARRIERSPACING-STOP

— ASN1STOP

TAG-Config

The IE TAG-Config is used to configure parameters for a time-alignment group.

TAG-Config information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-TAG-CONFIG-START

TAG-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

tag-ToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofTAGs)) OF TAG-Id OPTIONAL, — Need N

tag-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofTAGs)) OF TAG OPTIONAL — Need N

}

TAG ::= SEQUENCE {

tag-Id TAG-Id,

timeAlignmentTimer TimeAlignmentTimer,

}

TAG-Id ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofTAGs-1)

TimeAlignmentTimer ::= ENUMERATED {ms500, ms750, ms1280, ms1920, ms2560, ms5120, ms10240, infinity}

— TAG-TAG-CONFIG-STOP

— ASN1STOP

TAG field descriptions

tag-Id

Indicates the TAG of the SpCell or an SCell, see TS 38.321 [3]. Uniquely identifies the TAG within the scope of a Cell Group (i.e. MCG or SCG).

timeAlignmentTimer

Value in ms of the timeAlignmentTimer for TAG with ID tag-Id, as specified in TS 38.321 [3].

TCI-State

The IE TCI-State associates one or two DL reference signals with a corresponding quasi-colocation (QCL) type.

TCI-State information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-TCI-STATE-START

TCI-State ::= SEQUENCE {

tci-StateId TCI-StateId,

qcl-Type1 QCL-Info,

qcl-Type2 QCL-Info OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

QCL-Info ::= SEQUENCE {

cell ServCellIndex OPTIONAL, — Need R

bwp-Id BWP-Id OPTIONAL, — Cond CSI-RS-Indicated

referenceSignal CHOICE {

csi-rs NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId,

ssb SSB-Index

},

qcl-Type ENUMERATED {typeA, typeB, typeC, typeD},

}

— TAG-TCI-STATE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

QCL-Info field descriptions

bwp-Id

The DL BWP which the RS is located in.

cell

The UE’s serving cell in which the referenceSignal is configured. If the field is absent, it applies to the serving cell in which the TCI-State is configured. The RS can be located on a serving cell other than the serving cell in which the TCI-State is configured only if the qcl-Type is configured as typeC or typeD. See TS 38.214 [19] clause 5.1.5.

referenceSignal

Reference signal with which quasi-collocation information is provided as specified in TS 38.214 [19] subclause 5.1.5.

qcl-Type

QCL type as specified in TS 38.214 [19] subclause 5.1.5.

Conditional Presence

Explanation

CSI-RS-Indicated

This field is mandatory present if csi-rs is included, absent otherwise

TCI-StateId

The IE TCI-StateId is used to identify one TCI-State configuration.

TCI-StateId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-TCI-STATEID-START

TCI-StateId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofTCI-States-1)

— TAG-TCI-STATEID-STOP

— ASN1STOP

TDD-UL-DL-ConfigCommon

The IE TDD-UL-DL-ConfigCommon determines the cell specific Uplink/Downlink TDD configuration.

TDD-UL-DL-ConfigCommon information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-TDD-UL-DL-CONFIGCOMMON-START

TDD-UL-DL-ConfigCommon ::= SEQUENCE {

referenceSubcarrierSpacing SubcarrierSpacing,

pattern1 TDD-UL-DL-Pattern,

pattern2 TDD-UL-DL-Pattern OPTIONAL, — Need R

}

TDD-UL-DL-Pattern ::= SEQUENCE {

dl-UL-TransmissionPeriodicity ENUMERATED {ms0p5, ms0p625, ms1, ms1p25, ms2, ms2p5, ms5, ms10},

nrofDownlinkSlots INTEGER (0..maxNrofSlots),

nrofDownlinkSymbols INTEGER (0..maxNrofSymbols-1),

nrofUplinkSlots INTEGER (0..maxNrofSlots),

nrofUplinkSymbols INTEGER (0..maxNrofSymbols-1),

…,

[[

dl-UL-TransmissionPeriodicity-v1530 ENUMERATED {ms3, ms4} OPTIONAL — Need R

]]

}

— TAG-TDD-UL-DL-CONFIGCOMMON-STOP

— ASN1STOP

TDD-UL-DL-ConfigCommon field descriptions

referenceSubcarrierSpacing

Reference SCS used to determine the time domain boundaries in the UL-DL pattern which must be common across all subcarrier specific carriers, i.e., independent of the actual subcarrier spacing using for data transmission. Only the values 15, 30 or 60 kHz (FR1), and 60 or 120 kHz (FR2) are applicable. The network configures a not larger than any SCS of configured BWPs for the serving cell. See TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1.

TDD-UL-DL-Pattern field descriptions

dl-UL-TransmissionPeriodicity

Periodicity of the DL-UL pattern, see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1. If the dl-UL-TransmissionPeriodicity-v1530 is signalled, UE shall ignore the dl-UL-TransmissionPeriodicity (without suffix).

nrofDownlinkSlots

Number of consecutive full DL slots at the beginning of each DL-UL pattern, see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1. In this release, the maximum value for this field is 80.

nrofDownlinkSymbols

Number of consecutive DL symbols in the beginning of the slot following the last full DL slot (as derived from nrofDownlinkSlots). The value 0 indicates that there is no partial-downlink slot. (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1).

nrofUplinkSlots

Number of consecutive full UL slots at the end of each DL-UL pattern, see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1. In this release, the maximum value for this field is 80.

nrofUplinkSymbols

Number of consecutive UL symbols in the end of the slot preceding the first full UL slot (as derived from nrofUplinkSlots). The value 0 indicates that there is no partial-uplink slot. (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1).

TDD-UL-DL-ConfigDedicated

The IE TDD-UL-DL-ConfigDedicated determines the UE-specific Uplink/Downlink TDD configuration.

TDD-UL-DL-ConfigDedicated information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-TDD-UL-DL-CONFIGDEDICATED-START

TDD-UL-DL-ConfigDedicated ::= SEQUENCE {

slotSpecificConfigurationsToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSlots)) OF TDD-UL-DL-SlotConfig OPTIONAL, — Need N

slotSpecificConfigurationsToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSlots)) OF TDD-UL-DL-SlotIndex OPTIONAL, — Need N

}

TDD-UL-DL-SlotConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

slotIndex TDD-UL-DL-SlotIndex,

symbols CHOICE {

allDownlink NULL,

allUplink NULL,

explicit SEQUENCE {

nrofDownlinkSymbols INTEGER (1..maxNrofSymbols-1) OPTIONAL, — Need S

nrofUplinkSymbols INTEGER (1..maxNrofSymbols-1) OPTIONAL — Need S

}

}

}

TDD-UL-DL-SlotIndex ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofSlots-1)

— TAG-TDD-UL-DL-CONFIGDEDICATED-STOP

— ASN1STOP

TDD-UL-DL-ConfigDedicated field descriptions

slotSpecificConfigurationsToAddModList

The slotSpecificConfigurationToAddModList allows overriding UL/DL allocations provided in tdd-UL-DL-configurationCommon, see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1.

TDD-UL-DL-SlotConfig field descriptions

nrofDownlinkSymbols

Number of consecutive DL symbols in the beginning of the slot identified by slotIndex. If the field is absent the UE assumes that there are no leading DL symbols. (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1).

nrofUplinkSymbols

Number of consecutive UL symbols in the end of the slot identified by slotIndex. If the field is absent the UE assumes that there are no trailing UL symbols. (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1).

slotIndex

Identifies a slot within a slot configuration period given in tdd-UL-DL-configurationCommon, see TS 38.213 [13], clause 11.1.

symbols

The direction (downlink or uplink) for the symbols in this slot. Value allDownlink indicates that all symbols in this slot are used for downlink; value allUplink indicates that all symbols in this slot are used for uplink; value explicit indicates explicitly how many symbols in the beginning and end of this slot are allocated to downlink and uplink, respectively.

TrackingAreaCode

The IE TrackingAreaCode is used to identify a tracking area within the scope of a PLMN, see TS 24.501 [23].

TrackingAreaCode information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-TRACKINGAREACODE-START

TrackingAreaCode ::= BIT STRING (SIZE (24))

— TAG-TRACKINGAREACODE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

T-Reselection

The IE T-Reselection concerns the cell reselection timer TreselectionRAT for NR and E-UTRA Value in seconds. For value 0, behaviour as specified in 7.1.2 applies.

T-Reselectioninformation element

— ASN1START

— TAG-TRESELECTION-START

T-Reselection ::= INTEGER (0..7)

— TAG-TRESELECTION-STOP

— ASN1STOP

TimeToTrigger

The IE TimeToTrigger specifies the value range used for time to trigger parameter, which concerns the time during which specific criteria for the event needs to be met in order to trigger a measurement report. Value ms0 corresponds to 0 ms and behaviour as specified in 7.1.2 applies, value ms40 corresponds to 40 ms, and so on.

TimeToTrigger information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-TIMETOTRIGGER-START

TimeToTrigger ::= ENUMERATED {

ms0, ms40, ms64, ms80, ms100, ms128, ms160, ms256,

ms320, ms480, ms512, ms640, ms1024, ms1280, ms2560,

ms5120}

— TAG-TIMETOTRIGGER-STOP

— ASN1STOP

– UAC-BarringInfoSetIndex

The IE UAC-BarringInfoSetIndex provides the index of the entry in uac-BarringInfoSetList. Value 1 corresponds to the first entry in uac-BarringInfoSetList, value 2 corresponds to the second entry in this list and so on. An index value referring to an entry not included in uac-BarringInfoSetList indicates no barring.

UAC-BarringInfoSetIndex information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-UAC-BARRINGINFOSETINDEX-START

UAC-BarringInfoSetIndex ::= INTEGER (1..maxBarringInfoSet)

— TAG-UAC-BARRINGINFOSETINDEX-STOP

— ASN1STOP

– UAC-BarringInfoSetList

The IE UAC-BarringInfoSetList provides a list of access control parameter sets. An access category can be configured with access parameters according to one of the sets.

UAC-BarringInfoSetList information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-UAC-BARRINGINFOSETLIST-START

UAC-BarringInfoSetList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxBarringInfoSet)) OF UAC-BarringInfoSet

UAC-BarringInfoSet ::= SEQUENCE {

uac-BarringFactor ENUMERATED {p00, p05, p10, p15, p20, p25, p30, p40,

p50, p60, p70, p75, p80, p85, p90, p95},

uac-BarringTime ENUMERATED {s4, s8, s16, s32, s64, s128, s256, s512},

uac-BarringForAccessIdentity BIT STRING (SIZE(7))

}

— TAG-UAC-BARRINGINFOSETLIST-STOP

— ASN1STOP

UAC-BarringInfoSetList field descriptions

uac-BarringInfoSetList

List of access control parameter sets. Each access category can be configured with access parameters corresponding to a particular set by uac-barringInfoSetIndex. Association of an access category with an index that has no corresponding entry in the uac-BarringInfoSetList is valid configuration and indicates no barring.

uac-BarringForAccessIdentity

Indicates whether access attempt is allowed for each Access Identity. The leftmost bit, bit 0 in the bit string corresponds to Access Identity 1, bit 1 in the bit string corresponds to Access Identity 2, bit 2 in the bit string corresponds to Access Identity 11, bit 3 in the bit string corresponds to Access Identity 12, bit 4 in the bit string corresponds to Access Identity 13, bit 5 in the bit string corresponds to Access Identity 14, and bit 6 in the bit string corresponds to Access Identity 15. Value 0 means that access attempt is allowed for the corresponding access identity.

uac-BarringFactor

Represents the probability that access attempt would be allowed during access barring check.

uac-BarringTime

The average time in seconds before a new access attempt is to be performed after an access attempt was barred at access barring check for the same access category, see 5.3.14.5.

– UAC-BarringPerCatList

The IE UAC-BarringPerCatList provides access control parameters for a list of access categories.

UAC-BarringPerCatList information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-UAC-BARRINGPERCATLIST-START

UAC-BarringPerCatList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxAccessCat-1)) OF UAC-BarringPerCat

UAC-BarringPerCat ::= SEQUENCE {

accessCategory INTEGER (1..maxAccessCat-1),

uac-barringInfoSetIndex UAC-BarringInfoSetIndex

}

— TAG-UAC-BARRINGPERCATLIST-STOP

— ASN1STOP

UAC-BarringPerCatList field descriptions

accessCategory

The Access Category according to TS 22.261 [25].

– UAC-BarringPerPLMN-List

The IE UAC-BarringPerPLMN-List provides access category specific access control parameters, which are configured per PLMN.

UAC-BarringPerPLMN-List information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-UAC-BARRINGPERPLMN-LIST-START

UAC-BarringPerPLMN-List ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1.. maxPLMN)) OF UAC-BarringPerPLMN

UAC-BarringPerPLMN ::= SEQUENCE {

plmn-IdentityIndex INTEGER (1..maxPLMN),

uac-ACBarringListType CHOICE{

uac-ImplicitACBarringList SEQUENCE (SIZE(maxAccessCat-1)) OF UAC-BarringInfoSetIndex,

uac-ExplicitACBarringList UAC-BarringPerCatList

} OPTIONAL — Need S

}

— TAG-UAC-BARRINGPERPLMN-LIST-STOP

— ASN1STOP

UAC-BarringPerPLMN-List field descriptions

uac-ACBarringListType

Access control parameters for each access category valid only for a specific PLMN. UE behaviour upon absence of this field is specified in clause 5.3.14.2.

plmn-IdentityIndex

Index of the PLMN across the plmn-IdentityInfoList fields included in SIB1.

UE-TimersAndConstants

The IE UE-TimersAndConstants contains timers and constants used by the UE in RRC_CONNECTED, RRC_INACTIVE and RRC_IDLE.

UE-TimersAndConstants information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-UE-TIMERSANDCONSTANTS-START

UE-TimersAndConstants ::= SEQUENCE {

t300 ENUMERATED {ms100, ms200, ms300, ms400, ms600, ms1000, ms1500, ms2000},

t301 ENUMERATED {ms100, ms200, ms300, ms400, ms600, ms1000, ms1500, ms2000},

t310 ENUMERATED {ms0, ms50, ms100, ms200, ms500, ms1000, ms2000},

n310 ENUMERATED {n1, n2, n3, n4, n6, n8, n10, n20},

t311 ENUMERATED {ms1000, ms3000, ms5000, ms10000, ms15000, ms20000, ms30000},

n311 ENUMERATED {n1, n2, n3, n4, n5, n6, n8, n10},

t319 ENUMERATED {ms100, ms200, ms300, ms400, ms600, ms1000, ms1500, ms2000},

}

— TAG-UE-TIMERSANDCONSTANTS-STOP

— ASN1STOP

– UplinkConfigCommon

The IE UplinkConfigCommon provides common uplink parameters of a cell.

UplinkConfigCommon information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-UPLINKCONFIGCOMMON-START

UplinkConfigCommon ::= SEQUENCE {

frequencyInfoUL FrequencyInfoUL OPTIONAL, — Cond InterFreqHOAndServCellAdd

initialUplinkBWP BWP-UplinkCommon OPTIONAL, — Cond ServCellAdd

dummy TimeAlignmentTimer

}

— TAG-UPLINKCONFIGCOMMON-STOP

— ASN1STOP

UplinkConfigCommon field descriptions

frequencyInfoUL

Absolute uplink frequency configuration and subcarrier specific virtual carriers.

initialUplinkBWP

The initial uplink BWP configuration for a serving cell (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 12).

Conditional Presence

Explanation

InterFreqHOAndServCellAdd

This field is mandatory present for inter-frequency handover and upon serving cell (PSCell/SCell) addition. Otherwise, the field is optionally present, Need M.

ServCellAdd

This field is mandatory present upon serving cell addition (for PSCell and SCell) and upon handover from E-UTRA to NR. It is optionally present, Need M otherwise.

UplinkConfigCommonSIB

The IE UplinkConfigCommonSIB provides common uplink parameters of a cell.

UplinkConfigCommonSIB information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-UPLINKCONFIGCOMMONSIB-START

UplinkConfigCommonSIB ::= SEQUENCE {

frequencyInfoUL FrequencyInfoUL-SIB,

initialUplinkBWP BWP-UplinkCommon,

timeAlignmentTimerCommon TimeAlignmentTimer

}

— TAG-UPLINKCONFIGCOMMONSIB-STOP

— ASN1STOP

UplinkConfigCommonSIB field descriptions

frequencyInfoUL

Absolute uplink frequency configuration and subcarrier specific virtual carriers.

InitialUplinkBWP

The initial uplink BWP configuration for a PCell (see TS 38.213 [13], clause 12).

UplinkTxDirectCurrentList

The IE UplinkTxDirectCurrentList indicates the Tx Direct Current locations per serving cell for each configured UL BWP in the serving cell, based on the BWP numerology and the associated carrier bandwidth.

UplinkTxDirectCurrentList information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-UPLINKTXDIRECTCURRENTLIST-START

UplinkTxDirectCurrentList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofServingCells)) OF UplinkTxDirectCurrentCell

UplinkTxDirectCurrentCell ::= SEQUENCE {

servCellIndex ServCellIndex,

uplinkDirectCurrentBWP SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofBWPs)) OF UplinkTxDirectCurrentBWP,

…,

[[

uplinkDirectCurrentBWP-SUL SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofBWPs)) OF UplinkTxDirectCurrentBWP OPTIONAL

]]

}

UplinkTxDirectCurrentBWP ::= SEQUENCE {

bwp-Id BWP-Id,

shift7dot5kHz BOOLEAN,

txDirectCurrentLocation INTEGER (0..3301)

}

— TAG-UPLINKTXDIRECTCURRENTLIST-STOP

— ASN1STOP

UplinkTxDirectCurrentBWP field descriptions

bwp-Id

The BWP-Id of the corresponding uplink BWP.

shift7dot5kHz

Indicates whether there is 7.5 kHz shift or not. 7.5 kHz shift is applied if the field is set to true. Otherwise 7.5 kHz shift is not applied.

txDirectCurrentLocation

The uplink Tx Direct Current location for the carrier. Only values in the value range of this field between 0 and 3299, which indicate the subcarrier index within the carrier corresponding to the numerology of the corresponding uplink BWP and value 3300, which indicates "Outside the carrier" and value 3301, which indicates "Undetermined position within the carrier" are used in this version of the specification.

UplinkTxDirectCurrentCell field descriptions

servCellIndex

The serving cell ID of the serving cell corresponding to the uplinkDirectCurrentBWP.

uplinkDirectCurrentBWP

The Tx Direct Current locations for all the uplink BWPs configured at the corresponding serving cell.

uplinkDirectCurrentBWP-SUL

The Tx Direct Current locations for all the supplementary uplink BWPs configured at the corresponding serving cell.

ZP-CSI-RS-Resource

The IE ZP-CSI-RS-Resource is used to configure a Zero-Power (ZP) CSI-RS resource (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.2). Reconfiguration of a ZP-CSI-RS-Resource between periodic or semi-persistent and aperiodic is not supported.

ZP-CSI-RS-Resource information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-ZP-CSI-RS-RESOURCE-START

ZP-CSI-RS-Resource ::= SEQUENCE {

zp-CSI-RS-ResourceId ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId,

resourceMapping CSI-RS-ResourceMapping,

periodicityAndOffset CSI-ResourcePeriodicityAndOffset OPTIONAL, –Cond PeriodicOrSemiPersistent

}

ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofZP-CSI-RS-Resources-1)

— TAG-ZP-CSI-RS-RESOURCE-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ZP-CSI-RS-Resource field descriptions

periodicityAndOffset

Periodicity and slot offset for periodic/semi-persistent ZP-CSI-RS (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.2). Network always configures the UE with a value for this field for periodic and semi-persistent ZP-CSI-RS resource (as indicated in PDSCH-Config).

resourceMapping

OFDM symbol and subcarrier occupancy of the ZP-CSI-RS resource within a slot.

zp-CSI-RS-ResourceId

ZP CSI-RS resource configuration ID (see TS 38.214 [19], clause 5.1.4.2).

Conditional Presence

Explanation

PeriodicOrSemiPersistent

The field is optionally present, Need M, for periodic and semi-persistent ZP-CSI-RS-Resources (as indicated in PDSCH-Config). The field is absent otherwise.

ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet

The IE ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet refers to a set of ZP-CSI-RS-Resources using their ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceIds.

ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-ZP-CSI-RS-RESOURCESET-START

ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet ::= SEQUENCE {

zp-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId,

zp-CSI-RS-ResourceIdList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxNrofZP-CSI-RS-ResourcesPerSet)) OF ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId,

}

— TAG-ZP-CSI-RS-RESOURCESET-STOP

— ASN1STOP

ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet field descriptions

zp-CSI-RS-ResourceIdList

The list of ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId identifying the ZP-CSI-RS-Resource elements belonging to this set.

ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId

The IE ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId identifies a ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet.

ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId information element

— ASN1START

— TAG-ZP-CSI-RS-RESOURCESETID-START

ZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId ::= INTEGER (0..maxNrofZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSets-1)

— TAG-ZP-CSI-RS-RESOURCESETID-STOP

— ASN1STOP